<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><?xml-stylesheet href="https://feeds.captivate.fm/style.xsl" type="text/xsl"?><rss xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/" xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/" xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" version="2.0" xmlns:googleplay="http://www.google.com/schemas/play-podcasts/1.0" xmlns:itunes="http://www.itunes.com/dtds/podcast-1.0.dtd" xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/" xmlns:podcast="https://podcastindex.org/namespace/1.0"><channel><atom:link href="https://feeds.captivate.fm/podcast-radio-business/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml"/><title><![CDATA[Podcast Radio Business Interviews]]></title><podcast:guid>671893ef-7201-5347-8b34-c3c9b29052fd</podcast:guid><lastBuildDate>Tue, 22 Jul 2025 00:33:56 +0000</lastBuildDate><generator>Captivate.fm</generator><language><![CDATA[en]]></language><copyright><![CDATA[Copyright 2025 Podcast Radio]]></copyright><managingEditor>Podcast Radio</managingEditor><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcast Radio Business chats to many people about many things - in the dynamic world of business. There is a lot going on, you know.

Here you can catch Podcast Radio's podjocks chatting to all sorts of weird and wonderful business personalities about all sorts of weird and wonderful things in business.]]></itunes:summary><image><url>https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png</url><title>Podcast Radio Business Interviews</title><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link></image><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><itunes:owner><itunes:name>Podcast Radio</itunes:name></itunes:owner><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author><description>Podcast Radio Business chats to many people about many things - in the dynamic world of business. There is a lot going on, you know.

Here you can catch Podcast Radio&apos;s podjocks chatting to all sorts of weird and wonderful business personalities about all sorts of weird and wonderful things in business.</description><link>https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/</link><atom:link href="https://pubsubhubbub.appspot.com" rel="hub"/><itunes:subtitle><![CDATA[Original audio from Podcast Radio Business]]></itunes:subtitle><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:type>episodic</itunes:type><itunes:category text="Business"></itunes:category><itunes:category text="Business"><itunes:category text="Entrepreneurship"/></itunes:category><itunes:category text="Business"><itunes:category text="Management"/></itunes:category><podcast:locked>no</podcast:locked><podcast:medium>podcast</podcast:medium><item><title>50% OF UK BUSINESS FOUNDERS FEAR THEY WILL NOT SURVIVE 12 MONTHS | Andy Fishburn</title><itunes:title>50% OF UK BUSINESS FOUNDERS FEAR THEY WILL NOT SURVIVE 12 MONTHS | Andy Fishburn</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Andy Fishburn, Managing Director at Virgin StartUp,  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio </strong>to discuss why <strong>50% OF UK BUSINESS FOUNDERS FEAR THEY WILL NOT SURVIVE 12 MONTHS</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs) make up 99% of businesses in the UK, supporting 27 million jobs across the country and collectively account for £4.5 trillion in annual turnover.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Recognising their pivotal role in the UK economy, the former government made 2024 the “Year of the SME” to highlight their plight and tackle the key issues they face.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">But now, new research has revealed that half (50%) of founders are concerned that their venture will not survive the next 12 months, versus only 11% having the same concerns last year.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">That’s according to the new Founder Barometer report from Virgin StartUp, which has revealed that the cost-of-living crisis (52%) is the biggest challenge they face today. This explains why, from this new government, they would most like to see: </p><ul><li class="ql-align-justify">Business rates scrapped (33%)</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Greater support for businesses and regions outside London (32%)</li><li class="ql-align-justify">A cut in corporation tax (26%)</li><li class="ql-align-justify">The facilitation of greater access to capital (23%).</li></ul><br/><p class="ql-align-justify">When it comes to mentorship, more than one in 10 (13%) say the most valuable advice comes from fellow founders/peers, and 11% from online communities – with almost one in five (19%) having experienced a eureka moment after engaging with them. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">Meanwhile, 16% say spending time with fellow founders has improved their mental health, while 17% have received expert knowledge and information from their communities.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Andy Fishburn, Managing Director at Virgin StartUp,</strong> Virgin’s not-for-profit home of entrepreneurship, which Richard Branson launched in 2013, discusses the need for continuous support as well as funding to founders, and what they can gain from better engaging with each other to celebrate the launch of the Virgin StartUp Community Platform.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Andy Fishburn, Managing Director at Virgin StartUp,  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio </strong>to discuss why <strong>50% OF UK BUSINESS FOUNDERS FEAR THEY WILL NOT SURVIVE 12 MONTHS</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs) make up 99% of businesses in the UK, supporting 27 million jobs across the country and collectively account for £4.5 trillion in annual turnover.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Recognising their pivotal role in the UK economy, the former government made 2024 the “Year of the SME” to highlight their plight and tackle the key issues they face.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">But now, new research has revealed that half (50%) of founders are concerned that their venture will not survive the next 12 months, versus only 11% having the same concerns last year.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">That’s according to the new Founder Barometer report from Virgin StartUp, which has revealed that the cost-of-living crisis (52%) is the biggest challenge they face today. This explains why, from this new government, they would most like to see: </p><ul><li class="ql-align-justify">Business rates scrapped (33%)</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Greater support for businesses and regions outside London (32%)</li><li class="ql-align-justify">A cut in corporation tax (26%)</li><li class="ql-align-justify">The facilitation of greater access to capital (23%).</li></ul><br/><p class="ql-align-justify">When it comes to mentorship, more than one in 10 (13%) say the most valuable advice comes from fellow founders/peers, and 11% from online communities – with almost one in five (19%) having experienced a eureka moment after engaging with them. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">Meanwhile, 16% say spending time with fellow founders has improved their mental health, while 17% have received expert knowledge and information from their communities.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Andy Fishburn, Managing Director at Virgin StartUp,</strong> Virgin’s not-for-profit home of entrepreneurship, which Richard Branson launched in 2013, discusses the need for continuous support as well as funding to founders, and what they can gain from better engaging with each other to celebrate the launch of the Virgin StartUp Community Platform.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">abe3c7c3-fc61-4ebe-8338-275280bd18b4</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 16 Jul 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/7722b7e1-b61e-4018-b99e-b2f45842c80d/Podcast-Radio-Business-Andy-Fishburn-16-07-24.mp3" length="32181811" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:25</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>URGENT ACTION NEEDED TO TACKLE DISCRIMINATION AGAINST NEURODIVERSE WORKERS  | Clare Reynolds</title><itunes:title>URGENT ACTION NEEDED TO TACKLE DISCRIMINATION AGAINST NEURODIVERSE WORKERS  | Clare Reynolds</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Clare Reynolds, Business Psychologist, Pearn Kandola  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio </strong>to discuss why  <strong>URGENT ACTION IS NEEDED TO TACKLE DISCRIMINATION AGAINST NEURODIVERSE WORKERS.</strong></p><p>A new report released today (Tuesday 16th July 2024) reveals workplaces across the UK are experiencing endemic discrimination of neurodiverse workers, with almost half of employees admitting they’ve experienced discriminatory behaviour towards neurodiverse colleagues.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">It is thought that about 15 to 20 percent of the world's population is neurodivergent, a general term which includes conditions such as Autism, ADHD: Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder, or ADD: Attention Deficit Disorder, Dyscalculia, Dyslexia and Dyspraxia.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">The Neurodiversity At Work (2024) report by Pearn Kandola, a business psychology consultants, found when job hunting, the barriers neurodiverse candidates face were “bias and negative attitudes” from employers, based on neurotypical assumptions and employers not offering or making reasonable adjustments.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong><u>KEY FINDINGS AT A GLANCE:</u></strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Almost half of employees (46%) have experienced discriminatory behaviour towards neurodiverse colleagues</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Six in ten (63%) neurodiverse employees mask their condition from colleagues, and more than two in five (42%) admit to feelinguncomfortable asking their employer for adjustments to accommodate their neurodiverse traits </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Six in Ten managers in the workplace have never had any training on how to manage colleague with neurodiversity</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">When they were able to navigate the job application and interview process, many found the workplace a hostile environment, with 6 in ten (63%) neurodiverse employees revealing they masked their condition from colleagues – hiding their discomfort or emotions - and more than two in five (42%) admitting they were uncomfortable asking their employer for adjustments to accommodate their neurodiverse traits.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Training was also lacking with seven in ten (70%) workers in the UK believing businesses do not do enough to accommodate people with invisible disabilities – such as providing visual aids to help people with dyslexia. Of those surveyed who manage staff at work (45%), six in 10 had never had any training on how to manage colleagues with neurodiversity.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Clare Reynolds is a Business Psychologist at Pearn Kandola </strong>who contributed to the report, and discusses the findings, and the importance of tackling inequality for neurodiverse workers and what more needs to be done.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Clare Reynolds, Business Psychologist, Pearn Kandola  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio </strong>to discuss why  <strong>URGENT ACTION IS NEEDED TO TACKLE DISCRIMINATION AGAINST NEURODIVERSE WORKERS.</strong></p><p>A new report released today (Tuesday 16th July 2024) reveals workplaces across the UK are experiencing endemic discrimination of neurodiverse workers, with almost half of employees admitting they’ve experienced discriminatory behaviour towards neurodiverse colleagues.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">It is thought that about 15 to 20 percent of the world's population is neurodivergent, a general term which includes conditions such as Autism, ADHD: Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder, or ADD: Attention Deficit Disorder, Dyscalculia, Dyslexia and Dyspraxia.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">The Neurodiversity At Work (2024) report by Pearn Kandola, a business psychology consultants, found when job hunting, the barriers neurodiverse candidates face were “bias and negative attitudes” from employers, based on neurotypical assumptions and employers not offering or making reasonable adjustments.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong><u>KEY FINDINGS AT A GLANCE:</u></strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Almost half of employees (46%) have experienced discriminatory behaviour towards neurodiverse colleagues</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Six in ten (63%) neurodiverse employees mask their condition from colleagues, and more than two in five (42%) admit to feelinguncomfortable asking their employer for adjustments to accommodate their neurodiverse traits </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Six in Ten managers in the workplace have never had any training on how to manage colleague with neurodiversity</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">When they were able to navigate the job application and interview process, many found the workplace a hostile environment, with 6 in ten (63%) neurodiverse employees revealing they masked their condition from colleagues – hiding their discomfort or emotions - and more than two in five (42%) admitting they were uncomfortable asking their employer for adjustments to accommodate their neurodiverse traits.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Training was also lacking with seven in ten (70%) workers in the UK believing businesses do not do enough to accommodate people with invisible disabilities – such as providing visual aids to help people with dyslexia. Of those surveyed who manage staff at work (45%), six in 10 had never had any training on how to manage colleagues with neurodiversity.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Clare Reynolds is a Business Psychologist at Pearn Kandola </strong>who contributed to the report, and discusses the findings, and the importance of tackling inequality for neurodiverse workers and what more needs to be done.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">0d16d9e3-4243-4bfc-84bf-67ba98208405</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 16 Jul 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/4ab1111d-fc17-4d80-993e-0aba85d28d69/Podcast-Radio-Business-Clare-Reynolds-16-07-24.mp3" length="23516472" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:48</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Avon UK appoints Dragon&apos;s Den Star as Chief Inspiration Officer | Sara Davies MBE</title><itunes:title>Avon UK appoints Dragon&apos;s Den Star as Chief Inspiration Officer | Sara Davies MBE</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sara Davies MBE, Entrepreneur &amp; Avon UK's Chief Inspiration Officer  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio </strong>to discuss her new role as  <strong>Avon UK's Chief Inspiration Officer</strong></p><p>Entrepreneur, founder of Crafter’s Companion and business investor Sara Davies has been appointed as Avon UK’s Chief Inspiration Officer.</p><p>Avon research reveals nearly a third of British women face barriers when starting their own business including knowing how to access finance, not knowing where to start, as well as lack of confidence</p><p>Being an Avon Rep enables women to work flexibly and gives them the tools and opportunity to run their own business as well as the potential to become a Leader and coach a team of Reps</p><p>Beauty brand Avon UK has appointed prolific entrepreneur and businesswoman Sara Davies MBE as its Chief Inspiration Officer.</p><p>The role will see Sara help more women run and build their own successful business and she will host inspiring masterclasses to coach and mentor Avon Reps while offering tailored advice on how to be their own boss, grow their businesses and lead a team.</p><p>Sara’s appointment comes as Avon research shows various factors deter many women from starting their own business.</p><p>The research reveals a third (33%) of women in the UK believe setting up their own business is in favour of men and just under a quarter (23%) feel they have fewer choices than men when it comes to starting their own business.</p><p>While there is appetite to change working circumstances, many women continue to face obstacles to achieving their goals.</p><p>Nearly a third (31%) of women say there are barriers to them starting their own business including money/finance (53%), not knowing where to start (40%), lack of confidence (39%), fear of failure (37%) and lack of knowledge of the market (33%).</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Sara Davies, Avon UK’s Chief Inspiration Officer, said:</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“I am thrilled to join Avon UK as its first Chief Inspiration Officer.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“It’s a brilliant opportunity to work with new and existing Avon Reps who have the hunger to build and run their own business, on their own terms.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“The research reflects so many of the barriers I came up against when starting up my own business.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“I know that it still impacts women today, who have that drive, but face the same issues.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“I have always been passionate about entrepreneurship and helping people to realise their ambitions so having the opportunity to share my own knowledge and experience to inspire others is incredibly exciting.”</em></p><p><strong>Sara’s top tips for building your own business and motivating a team:</strong></p><p><strong>Have a plan, set your goals and put them on paper: </strong>writing down what you want to achieve helps you to stick to your plans and hold yourself accountable.</p><p><strong>Do your research: </strong>ensure that you feel a connection to the brand and what they stand for. This will make promoting your business feel natural.</p><p><strong>Build a personal brand: </strong>give customers the chance to buy into you, not just the products you sell.</p><p><strong>Use your support network</strong>: reach out to those around you for advice and be loud and proud when something goes well for you.</p><p><strong>Lead from the front: </strong>as your business grows your team will increasingly look to you for inspiration and motivation. Successful leadership doesn’t come from what you do occasionally but from what you do consistently.<strong> </strong></p><p><strong>Tailor your leadership style</strong>: listen to what each individual team member needs to support their growth and development as you recruit new talent. If someone has done a good job, tell them and...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sara Davies MBE, Entrepreneur &amp; Avon UK's Chief Inspiration Officer  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio </strong>to discuss her new role as  <strong>Avon UK's Chief Inspiration Officer</strong></p><p>Entrepreneur, founder of Crafter’s Companion and business investor Sara Davies has been appointed as Avon UK’s Chief Inspiration Officer.</p><p>Avon research reveals nearly a third of British women face barriers when starting their own business including knowing how to access finance, not knowing where to start, as well as lack of confidence</p><p>Being an Avon Rep enables women to work flexibly and gives them the tools and opportunity to run their own business as well as the potential to become a Leader and coach a team of Reps</p><p>Beauty brand Avon UK has appointed prolific entrepreneur and businesswoman Sara Davies MBE as its Chief Inspiration Officer.</p><p>The role will see Sara help more women run and build their own successful business and she will host inspiring masterclasses to coach and mentor Avon Reps while offering tailored advice on how to be their own boss, grow their businesses and lead a team.</p><p>Sara’s appointment comes as Avon research shows various factors deter many women from starting their own business.</p><p>The research reveals a third (33%) of women in the UK believe setting up their own business is in favour of men and just under a quarter (23%) feel they have fewer choices than men when it comes to starting their own business.</p><p>While there is appetite to change working circumstances, many women continue to face obstacles to achieving their goals.</p><p>Nearly a third (31%) of women say there are barriers to them starting their own business including money/finance (53%), not knowing where to start (40%), lack of confidence (39%), fear of failure (37%) and lack of knowledge of the market (33%).</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Sara Davies, Avon UK’s Chief Inspiration Officer, said:</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“I am thrilled to join Avon UK as its first Chief Inspiration Officer.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“It’s a brilliant opportunity to work with new and existing Avon Reps who have the hunger to build and run their own business, on their own terms.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“The research reflects so many of the barriers I came up against when starting up my own business.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“I know that it still impacts women today, who have that drive, but face the same issues.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“I have always been passionate about entrepreneurship and helping people to realise their ambitions so having the opportunity to share my own knowledge and experience to inspire others is incredibly exciting.”</em></p><p><strong>Sara’s top tips for building your own business and motivating a team:</strong></p><p><strong>Have a plan, set your goals and put them on paper: </strong>writing down what you want to achieve helps you to stick to your plans and hold yourself accountable.</p><p><strong>Do your research: </strong>ensure that you feel a connection to the brand and what they stand for. This will make promoting your business feel natural.</p><p><strong>Build a personal brand: </strong>give customers the chance to buy into you, not just the products you sell.</p><p><strong>Use your support network</strong>: reach out to those around you for advice and be loud and proud when something goes well for you.</p><p><strong>Lead from the front: </strong>as your business grows your team will increasingly look to you for inspiration and motivation. Successful leadership doesn’t come from what you do occasionally but from what you do consistently.<strong> </strong></p><p><strong>Tailor your leadership style</strong>: listen to what each individual team member needs to support their growth and development as you recruit new talent. If someone has done a good job, tell them and share with your community. This will inspire and motivate others.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Sara added</strong>: “<em>The world of work has changed. The rigid 9-to-5, which is notoriouslydifficult for mums, has been replaced by more flexible work, offering women the option to put the hours in whenever suits them.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“The country is filled with women from all walks of life, who have amazing entrepreneurial spirit and ambition.</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“So, unlocking all this potential should benefit them and beyond, it would be such a boost for business and the wider economy.”</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Sara began her own entrepreneurship journey while at university after being introduced to the world of crafting.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">After discovering a gap in the market Sara founded Crafter's Companion in 2005, now a global retailer and multimillion pound company.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">In 2019, she joined the panel on the BBC’s <em>Dragons’ Den, </em>becoming the programme’s youngest female investor.</p><p>One of Sara’s greatest passions is helping women in business achieve their dreams and she has already inspired and empowered hundreds of Avon Reps across the country.</p><p><strong>About the research</strong></p><p>The research was conducted by Censuswide with 1,000 women across the UK.&nbsp; Censuswide abide by and employ members of the Market Research Society and follows the MRS code of conduct which is based on the ESOMAR principles. Censuswide is also a member of The British Polling Council.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">30de6cd0-144f-4a01-95f0-fb00b18958e0</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 11 Jul 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/b5f95281-2034-44a3-947c-9b5f90140359/The-Cashflow-Show-Podcast-Radio-Business-Sara-Davies-08-07-24.mp3" length="23522742" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:48</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>The Rise of European Venture Capital | Andreas Munk Holm</title><itunes:title>The Rise of European Venture Capital | Andreas Munk Holm</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Andreas Munk Holm , Co-Founder of EU VC  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>The Rise of European Venture Capital</strong></p><p>Andreas is one of the co-founders of EUVC where he acts as podcast host and Europe’s LP hypeman. He runs content &amp; marketing for EUVC where he works tirelessly to champion and connect the European VC ecosystem. </p><p>Andreas started his career in venture right after school, helping build his university’s incubator to then join a local pre-seed fund focusing on bridging the valley of death for deep tech startups. </p><p>Since then, Andreas has co-authored a book on the soft issues of family business succession and helped emerging managers build their first funds, first as an advisor and now institutionalised via EUVC.</p><p>Listen to the EU VC podcast on&nbsp;<a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/the-european-vc/id1544598239" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Apple&nbsp;</a>|&nbsp;<a href="https://open.spotify.com/show/0WO5adjTSnzxCC3l2sRq1f?si=4f0cb843b99d4812" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Spotify&nbsp;</a>|&nbsp;<a href="http://eu.vc/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank"><em>eu.vc</em></a><em>&nbsp;</em></p><p><a href="http://floww.io/raise" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Pre-register for the State of European VC Fundraising</a></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Andreas Munk Holm , Co-Founder of EU VC  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>The Rise of European Venture Capital</strong></p><p>Andreas is one of the co-founders of EUVC where he acts as podcast host and Europe’s LP hypeman. He runs content &amp; marketing for EUVC where he works tirelessly to champion and connect the European VC ecosystem. </p><p>Andreas started his career in venture right after school, helping build his university’s incubator to then join a local pre-seed fund focusing on bridging the valley of death for deep tech startups. </p><p>Since then, Andreas has co-authored a book on the soft issues of family business succession and helped emerging managers build their first funds, first as an advisor and now institutionalised via EUVC.</p><p>Listen to the EU VC podcast on&nbsp;<a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/the-european-vc/id1544598239" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Apple&nbsp;</a>|&nbsp;<a href="https://open.spotify.com/show/0WO5adjTSnzxCC3l2sRq1f?si=4f0cb843b99d4812" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Spotify&nbsp;</a>|&nbsp;<a href="http://eu.vc/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank"><em>eu.vc</em></a><em>&nbsp;</em></p><p><a href="http://floww.io/raise" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Pre-register for the State of European VC Fundraising</a></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">2ffe4710-f66a-4c9b-8461-f2b393bdec3b</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 11 Jul 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/c1e3a3bc-2956-4678-95cc-1c705072e228/Podcast-Radio-Andreas-Munk-Holm-03-07-24.mp3" length="76308897" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>31:48</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>WHY UK BUSINESSES LACK CONFIDENCE TO INTEGRATE AI &amp; GREEN TECH | John D’Arcy</title><itunes:title>WHY UK BUSINESSES LACK CONFIDENCE TO INTEGRATE AI &amp; GREEN TECH | John D’Arcy</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>John D’Arcy, Director, The Open University in Ireland &amp; Northern Ireland</strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHY BUSINESSES LACK CONFIDENCE TO INTEGRATE AI &amp; GREEN TECH BECAUSE OF UK SKILLS SHORTAGE.</strong></p><p>More than three in five (62%) organisations in the UK continue to struggle with skills gaps, resulting in 64% lacking the confidence to integrate either AI or green technologies – crucial to growth and sustainability for businesses and the wider economy. </p><p>That’s according to data from the latest Business Barometer by The Open University and the British Chambers of Commerce, which reveals skills shortages remain a major issue across sectors and regions in all four nations. </p><p>Despite this, less than one in five (19%) organisations have implemented a written skills plan for their workforce, hindering the ability to strategically address these issues and prepare for future demands. </p><p>More than two-thirds (68%) of employers say shortages have increased the workload of their employees – impacting morale and wellbeing – a clear indicator that they need a strategic, inclusive skills plan to develop talent to fill key gaps. </p><p>Organisations recognise this, with 39% intending to use mentoring or coaching and 35% intending to use short courses within the next twelve months, helping to develop skills as well as fostering a supportive learning environment to enhance employee attraction, engagement and retention.</p><p>Meanwhile, encouragingly, 86% that currently use apprenticeship programmes are expecting to increase or commit to the same number of learners over the next 12 months, highlighting the value placed on apprenticeships as a means of cultivating new talent and addressing specific skill needs.</p><p>But, while there is a commitment to address the skills shortage from some organisations, the report reveals the majority (63%) still do not have specific initiatives in place for underrepresented groups e.g. young people or those with disabilities, therefore missing out by not widening talent pools to plug their shortages.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>John D’Arcy, Director, The Open University in Ireland &amp; Northern Ireland</strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHY BUSINESSES LACK CONFIDENCE TO INTEGRATE AI &amp; GREEN TECH BECAUSE OF UK SKILLS SHORTAGE.</strong></p><p>More than three in five (62%) organisations in the UK continue to struggle with skills gaps, resulting in 64% lacking the confidence to integrate either AI or green technologies – crucial to growth and sustainability for businesses and the wider economy. </p><p>That’s according to data from the latest Business Barometer by The Open University and the British Chambers of Commerce, which reveals skills shortages remain a major issue across sectors and regions in all four nations. </p><p>Despite this, less than one in five (19%) organisations have implemented a written skills plan for their workforce, hindering the ability to strategically address these issues and prepare for future demands. </p><p>More than two-thirds (68%) of employers say shortages have increased the workload of their employees – impacting morale and wellbeing – a clear indicator that they need a strategic, inclusive skills plan to develop talent to fill key gaps. </p><p>Organisations recognise this, with 39% intending to use mentoring or coaching and 35% intending to use short courses within the next twelve months, helping to develop skills as well as fostering a supportive learning environment to enhance employee attraction, engagement and retention.</p><p>Meanwhile, encouragingly, 86% that currently use apprenticeship programmes are expecting to increase or commit to the same number of learners over the next 12 months, highlighting the value placed on apprenticeships as a means of cultivating new talent and addressing specific skill needs.</p><p>But, while there is a commitment to address the skills shortage from some organisations, the report reveals the majority (63%) still do not have specific initiatives in place for underrepresented groups e.g. young people or those with disabilities, therefore missing out by not widening talent pools to plug their shortages.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">9cd83a07-7d21-4b8d-be0c-189600bdd1eb</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 23 Jun 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/82cc434f-bae6-4332-aa4e-bd69232848ab/Podcast-Radio-Business-John-Darcy-19-06-24.mp3" length="33514056" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:58</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>GROWING NUMBERS &apos;WILL NEVER BE ABLE TO AFFORD TO RETIRE&apos; | Jonathan Watts-Lay</title><itunes:title>GROWING NUMBERS &apos;WILL NEVER BE ABLE TO AFFORD TO RETIRE&apos; | Jonathan Watts-Lay</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jonathan Watts-Lay, of WEALTH at work </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHY GROWING NUMBERS 'WILL NEVER BE ABLE TO AFFORD TO RETIRE'.</strong></p><p>The number of people in full-time employment who believe they will never be able to afford to retire because of the impact of the rising cost of living is on the rise, with two fifths (39%) of workers claiming they will never be able to afford to stop working, up from one in three (33%) twelve months ago.</p><p>Those aged 35-44 years old are the age group most likely to believe they will be able to afford to retire, with almost half of workers (46%) thinking this.</p><p>Whilst rising costs have affected every generation, this age group have had less time to build up savings and could be feeling particularly squeezed with managing high childcare and property costs. Not only this, many of them may not have benefited from a full working life of automatic enrolment, and are less likely to reach retirement with generous defined benefit (or final salary) pensions than some older generations.</p><p>The figures from WEALTH at work also show that rising costs also mean that almost a third (32%) will look to delay retirement, up from a fifth (21%) this time last year.&nbsp;</p><p>Eight in ten (81%) are also concerned that it means they will be less comfortable in retirement due to a shortfall in savings, with the same amount (81%) saying they are concerned they will have to work longer to make up for the shortfall.</p><p>With the International Monetary Fund (IMF) recommending interest rates in the UK should be cut to 3.5% by the end of next year, down from their current level at 5.25%, and with the British Retail Consortium last month announcing the rate of prices in UK shops is returning to ‘normal levels’, the affordability outlook is at least looking a little brighter for people.</p><p>Jonathan Watts-Lay, from financial wellbeing and retirement specialists, WEALTH shares his thoughts on how to balance your finances to make retirement both realistic and comfortable. Also, with 41% feeling unsupported by the workplace, he will discuss the valuable ways many employers are helping staff gain control of their financial future.</p><h4><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>This year’s research was conducted by Opinion Matters between 22/05/24 and 23/05/24. 2,019 UK adults aged 22+ in full-time employment were surveyed.</p><p>Last year’s research was also carried out by Opinion Matters between 13/4/23 and 17/04/23. 2,025 UK adults aged 22+ in full time employment were surveyed. </p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jonathan Watts-Lay, of WEALTH at work </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHY GROWING NUMBERS 'WILL NEVER BE ABLE TO AFFORD TO RETIRE'.</strong></p><p>The number of people in full-time employment who believe they will never be able to afford to retire because of the impact of the rising cost of living is on the rise, with two fifths (39%) of workers claiming they will never be able to afford to stop working, up from one in three (33%) twelve months ago.</p><p>Those aged 35-44 years old are the age group most likely to believe they will be able to afford to retire, with almost half of workers (46%) thinking this.</p><p>Whilst rising costs have affected every generation, this age group have had less time to build up savings and could be feeling particularly squeezed with managing high childcare and property costs. Not only this, many of them may not have benefited from a full working life of automatic enrolment, and are less likely to reach retirement with generous defined benefit (or final salary) pensions than some older generations.</p><p>The figures from WEALTH at work also show that rising costs also mean that almost a third (32%) will look to delay retirement, up from a fifth (21%) this time last year.&nbsp;</p><p>Eight in ten (81%) are also concerned that it means they will be less comfortable in retirement due to a shortfall in savings, with the same amount (81%) saying they are concerned they will have to work longer to make up for the shortfall.</p><p>With the International Monetary Fund (IMF) recommending interest rates in the UK should be cut to 3.5% by the end of next year, down from their current level at 5.25%, and with the British Retail Consortium last month announcing the rate of prices in UK shops is returning to ‘normal levels’, the affordability outlook is at least looking a little brighter for people.</p><p>Jonathan Watts-Lay, from financial wellbeing and retirement specialists, WEALTH shares his thoughts on how to balance your finances to make retirement both realistic and comfortable. Also, with 41% feeling unsupported by the workplace, he will discuss the valuable ways many employers are helping staff gain control of their financial future.</p><h4><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>This year’s research was conducted by Opinion Matters between 22/05/24 and 23/05/24. 2,019 UK adults aged 22+ in full-time employment were surveyed.</p><p>Last year’s research was also carried out by Opinion Matters between 13/4/23 and 17/04/23. 2,025 UK adults aged 22+ in full time employment were surveyed. </p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">edd0410c-e167-46c4-9f93-b594a3b14086</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 23 Jun 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/2d1af11e-109a-4763-a65a-821e3e2db6be/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jonathan-Watts-Lay-19-06-24.mp3" length="32270627" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:27</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>WHY MORE BUSINESSES NEEED TO EMBRACE SKILLS-BASED VOLUNTEERING SCHEMES | Kevin Barker-Lee</title><itunes:title>WHY MORE BUSINESSES NEEED TO EMBRACE SKILLS-BASED VOLUNTEERING SCHEMES | Kevin Barker-Lee</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Kevin Lee-Barker, Senior Finance Strategy &amp; Community Team at Lloyds Banking Group  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHY MORE BUSINESSES NEEED TO EMBRACE SKILLS-BASED VOLUNTEERING SCHEMES.</strong></p><p>Businesses adopting volunteering schemes and programmes for their employees stand to benefit from fostering an engaged and purpose-driven workforce, as well as improving their corporate social responsibility creds. </p><p>That is according to the <em>Skills Based Volunteering: A Win, Win, Win</em> report from Lloyds Bank Foundation which analyses the mutually beneficial rewards for businesses, workforces, and charities through skilled based volunteering.</p><p>It found that charities across the UK are calling out for skilled volunteers in finance, strategy and governance to assist them in navigating strategic challenges, access in-demand knowledge and insight, and unlock new connections and networks. </p><p>Meanwhile, skilled employees that take part can gain invaluable professional development, build confidence and connections, as well as develop transferable skills and provide them the opportunity to gain a better understanding of social issues.</p><p>To mark National Volunteers Week (3 – 9 June 2024), the report aims to encourage businesses and charities to embrace schemes and initiatives as a conduit for mutual growth that has a huge potential for surrounding communities. Its recommendations include: </p><ul><li>Offer a variety of skilled volunteering programmes, from one-off virtual opportunities to longer-term ongoing support, as well</li><li> as one-to-one and group based opportunities.</li><li>Support corporate employees in translating their skills to a different sector by sharing volunteer experiences and having an</li><li> onboarding process.</li><li>Embed support for volunteering into leadership and your organisation’s culture.</li><li>Maintain an ongoing relationship, as in many cases skilled volunteers support charities beyond the length of a programme.</li><li>Identify the needs of charities and where volunteers can have the biggest impact.</li></ul><br/>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Kevin Lee-Barker, Senior Finance Strategy &amp; Community Team at Lloyds Banking Group  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHY MORE BUSINESSES NEEED TO EMBRACE SKILLS-BASED VOLUNTEERING SCHEMES.</strong></p><p>Businesses adopting volunteering schemes and programmes for their employees stand to benefit from fostering an engaged and purpose-driven workforce, as well as improving their corporate social responsibility creds. </p><p>That is according to the <em>Skills Based Volunteering: A Win, Win, Win</em> report from Lloyds Bank Foundation which analyses the mutually beneficial rewards for businesses, workforces, and charities through skilled based volunteering.</p><p>It found that charities across the UK are calling out for skilled volunteers in finance, strategy and governance to assist them in navigating strategic challenges, access in-demand knowledge and insight, and unlock new connections and networks. </p><p>Meanwhile, skilled employees that take part can gain invaluable professional development, build confidence and connections, as well as develop transferable skills and provide them the opportunity to gain a better understanding of social issues.</p><p>To mark National Volunteers Week (3 – 9 June 2024), the report aims to encourage businesses and charities to embrace schemes and initiatives as a conduit for mutual growth that has a huge potential for surrounding communities. Its recommendations include: </p><ul><li>Offer a variety of skilled volunteering programmes, from one-off virtual opportunities to longer-term ongoing support, as well</li><li> as one-to-one and group based opportunities.</li><li>Support corporate employees in translating their skills to a different sector by sharing volunteer experiences and having an</li><li> onboarding process.</li><li>Embed support for volunteering into leadership and your organisation’s culture.</li><li>Maintain an ongoing relationship, as in many cases skilled volunteers support charities beyond the length of a programme.</li><li>Identify the needs of charities and where volunteers can have the biggest impact.</li></ul><br/>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">2c50ff31-d16d-4070-9547-29dd494357c7</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 08 Jun 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/383fa715-0f12-4226-afef-6ec821f4ef52/Podcast-Radio-Business-Kevin-Barker-Lee-06-06-24.mp3" length="24361795" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:09</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>DOES THE UK FACE A CREDIT CRUNCH?  | Ryan Etchells</title><itunes:title>DOES THE UK FACE A CREDIT CRUNCH?  | Ryan Etchells</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Ryan Etchells, Chief Commercial Officer, Together, UK’s largest specialist lender  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>DOES THE UK FACE A CREDIT CRUNCH?</strong></p><p>Overly cautious banks and a lack of investment breaks and benefits from local and national government threaten investment and growth goals for SMEs across the country.</p><p>That’s according to new research from specialist lender Together which has revealed, on average, UK SMEs would like to invest £450,000 in their business over the next two years.</p><p>While many are confident they will be able to achieve this, barriers remain and cast aspersion over plans for growth and expansion, with the biggest ones being:&nbsp;</p><ul><li>A lack of investment breaks and benefits from local and national government (27%)</li><li>Overly cautious banks (23%)</li><li>Difficulty accessing finance for specialist lenders (23%)</li></ul><br/><p>Meanwhile, with the General Election a month away [in July 2024], SMEs would most like the next Government focus their first six months on introducing policies which prioritise:</p><ul><li>Reduce energy bills (49%)</li><li>Increase tax breaks (39%)</li><li>Improving access to finance (35%)</li><li>Boost investment in the SME growth sector (33%)</li><li>Remove red tape around business</li><li>loan applications (26%)</li></ul><br/><p>This comes as only 55% admit they think the banking sector is supportive of small businesses, with 73% thinking mainstream banks are being overly cautious about lending.</p><p>Almost half (46%) believe they do not understand the needs of the average SME applicant, and 55% believe they will have a better chance of fulfilling business objectives if they identify an alternative finance source or provider. </p><p>Ryan Etchells, Chief Commercial Officer at Together, has said the sector will be carefully weighing up Sunak and Starmer’s pledges as it continues to face tough cost and labour challenges.</p><p><em>“Given that securing real economic growth will surely be a central plank of all parties’ election promises, we need to see concrete plans for the business community especially when it comes to providing adequate resource and support for SME recovery and future growth. Unlocking access to finance is certainly one element, but fundamentally it will take lenders, developers, and innovative funders to work together and ensure that – whatever the political outcome – that promises are not left empty and that a course is charted which provides in full what’s needed most.”</em></p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p><strong>About Together</strong></p><p>Togetherhas been delivering specialist secured lending for 50 years, using its wealth of expertise and industry knowledgeto consider individual circumstances to find a way to help its customers. All applications are considered on their merits and the product range includes residential mortgages, short-term finance, buy-to-let, commercial and semi-commercial mortgages and loans, auction finance and development funding throughout mainland UK. </p><p>Based in Cheadle, Cheshire, the company employs more than 750 colleagues and has a loan book of £7 billion. For more information go to&nbsp;<a href="https://togethermoney.com/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://togethermoney.com/</a></p><h4><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>Research commissioned by Together and conducted by Opinion Matters between 17 – 21 May 2024 among 1,002 DMS/ Directors of SMEs. Opinion Matters abides by and employs members of the Market Research Society which is based on the ESOMAR principles.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Ryan Etchells, Chief Commercial Officer, Together, UK’s largest specialist lender  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>DOES THE UK FACE A CREDIT CRUNCH?</strong></p><p>Overly cautious banks and a lack of investment breaks and benefits from local and national government threaten investment and growth goals for SMEs across the country.</p><p>That’s according to new research from specialist lender Together which has revealed, on average, UK SMEs would like to invest £450,000 in their business over the next two years.</p><p>While many are confident they will be able to achieve this, barriers remain and cast aspersion over plans for growth and expansion, with the biggest ones being:&nbsp;</p><ul><li>A lack of investment breaks and benefits from local and national government (27%)</li><li>Overly cautious banks (23%)</li><li>Difficulty accessing finance for specialist lenders (23%)</li></ul><br/><p>Meanwhile, with the General Election a month away [in July 2024], SMEs would most like the next Government focus their first six months on introducing policies which prioritise:</p><ul><li>Reduce energy bills (49%)</li><li>Increase tax breaks (39%)</li><li>Improving access to finance (35%)</li><li>Boost investment in the SME growth sector (33%)</li><li>Remove red tape around business</li><li>loan applications (26%)</li></ul><br/><p>This comes as only 55% admit they think the banking sector is supportive of small businesses, with 73% thinking mainstream banks are being overly cautious about lending.</p><p>Almost half (46%) believe they do not understand the needs of the average SME applicant, and 55% believe they will have a better chance of fulfilling business objectives if they identify an alternative finance source or provider. </p><p>Ryan Etchells, Chief Commercial Officer at Together, has said the sector will be carefully weighing up Sunak and Starmer’s pledges as it continues to face tough cost and labour challenges.</p><p><em>“Given that securing real economic growth will surely be a central plank of all parties’ election promises, we need to see concrete plans for the business community especially when it comes to providing adequate resource and support for SME recovery and future growth. Unlocking access to finance is certainly one element, but fundamentally it will take lenders, developers, and innovative funders to work together and ensure that – whatever the political outcome – that promises are not left empty and that a course is charted which provides in full what’s needed most.”</em></p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p><strong>About Together</strong></p><p>Togetherhas been delivering specialist secured lending for 50 years, using its wealth of expertise and industry knowledgeto consider individual circumstances to find a way to help its customers. All applications are considered on their merits and the product range includes residential mortgages, short-term finance, buy-to-let, commercial and semi-commercial mortgages and loans, auction finance and development funding throughout mainland UK. </p><p>Based in Cheadle, Cheshire, the company employs more than 750 colleagues and has a loan book of £7 billion. For more information go to&nbsp;<a href="https://togethermoney.com/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://togethermoney.com/</a></p><h4><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>Research commissioned by Together and conducted by Opinion Matters between 17 – 21 May 2024 among 1,002 DMS/ Directors of SMEs. Opinion Matters abides by and employs members of the Market Research Society which is based on the ESOMAR principles.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">a6968d2f-3525-4256-b412-ddfe1800d2bf</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 08 Jun 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/ff647d42-e2ff-4eec-823c-00ee54e5d37a/Podcast-Radio-Business-Ryan-Etchells-03-06-24.mp3" length="34754350" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:29</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>SUN, SEA AND SWITCHING OFF! | Dilly Carter</title><itunes:title>SUN, SEA AND SWITCHING OFF! | Dilly Carter</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dilly Carter, entrepreneur and TV presenter   </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Sun, Sea and Switching Off!</strong></p><ul><li><strong>97% of small business owners and local entrepreneurs end up working while on holiday.</strong></li><li><strong>On average entrepreneurs took 5 days actually ‘off work’ last year.</strong></li><li><strong>48% so passionate about growing their business that they find it hard to switch off.</strong></li></ul><br/><p>Running a business, even as a side hustle, takes plenty of blood, sweat and tears, requiring tonnes of passion. But, it seems many who do, whether as retailers, personal trainers, make-up artists, builders or farmers, are embracing their entrepreneurial spirit a little too much, without really ever taking their foot off the throttle.</p><p>So dedicated are these entrepreneurs to the daily grind, that they took off only five days in the last year—less than a third of the time claimed by their salaried colleagues, who enjoyed an average of 17 days away from their 9-5.</p><p>Even when they do finally give themselves time off for a break, 97% still end up working, meaning that they never really switch off, with them putting in on average 3.5 hours a day when they are supposed to be relaxing, nearly half a day!</p><p>TUI’s research highlights there is a ‘Downtime Deficit’ among a growing number of local entrepreneurs and small business owners, who ignore the temptations of tropical sun and embrace the hustle, doubling down on work.</p><p>Entrepreneur Dilly Carter offers the benefits of her experience, explaining how she developed her business while also discussing the advantages of time away from the daily grind. </p><p>There is clearly an appetite for rest and relaxation, with 45% wishing they could take more holiday, 48% seeing their mental health benefit from regular breaks and holidays while 44% notice feeling refreshed after a trip away has a positive effect on their work. </p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dilly Carter, entrepreneur and TV presenter   </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Sun, Sea and Switching Off!</strong></p><ul><li><strong>97% of small business owners and local entrepreneurs end up working while on holiday.</strong></li><li><strong>On average entrepreneurs took 5 days actually ‘off work’ last year.</strong></li><li><strong>48% so passionate about growing their business that they find it hard to switch off.</strong></li></ul><br/><p>Running a business, even as a side hustle, takes plenty of blood, sweat and tears, requiring tonnes of passion. But, it seems many who do, whether as retailers, personal trainers, make-up artists, builders or farmers, are embracing their entrepreneurial spirit a little too much, without really ever taking their foot off the throttle.</p><p>So dedicated are these entrepreneurs to the daily grind, that they took off only five days in the last year—less than a third of the time claimed by their salaried colleagues, who enjoyed an average of 17 days away from their 9-5.</p><p>Even when they do finally give themselves time off for a break, 97% still end up working, meaning that they never really switch off, with them putting in on average 3.5 hours a day when they are supposed to be relaxing, nearly half a day!</p><p>TUI’s research highlights there is a ‘Downtime Deficit’ among a growing number of local entrepreneurs and small business owners, who ignore the temptations of tropical sun and embrace the hustle, doubling down on work.</p><p>Entrepreneur Dilly Carter offers the benefits of her experience, explaining how she developed her business while also discussing the advantages of time away from the daily grind. </p><p>There is clearly an appetite for rest and relaxation, with 45% wishing they could take more holiday, 48% seeing their mental health benefit from regular breaks and holidays while 44% notice feeling refreshed after a trip away has a positive effect on their work. </p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">62c179d2-767f-42d1-bce9-1e7afb0ef443</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 13 May 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/ca2cfe86-82e3-4013-830d-c5e1fb90dd64/Podcast-Radio-The-Cashflow-Show-Dilly-Carter-08-05-24.mp3" length="29120260" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>12:08</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Your Password Isn&apos;t Strong Enough | Dr Junade Ali</title><itunes:title>Your Password Isn&apos;t Strong Enough | Dr Junade Ali</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dr. Junade Ali, Computer Scientist &amp; Security Expert  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>Your Password Isn't Strong Enough!</strong></p><p>We are all guilty of using our favourite holiday destination, a pet’s name or our birth year for a memorable password  across multiple sites. </p><p>But this World Password Day<em> (Thursday 2nd May 2024),</em> a Cyber Security Expert is warning that the importance of strong passwords on our devices and online accounts is more important than ever as hackers are targeting multiple accounts of victims due to weak and predictable passwords.</p><p>65% of people in the UK admit they are scared about being hacked in the future, with 84% thinking hackers are becoming more inventive. Yet only a fifth of people (20%) are able to correctly identify a secure password over a compromised one which can be cracked by a computer in less than a second, and 20% admit to having just one password for multiple websites and devices.</p><p>New research by the Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) shows we are extremely predictable from a scammer’s perspective, with almost half using a significant date (21%) or a pet’s name (20%) as the topic of our passwords.&nbsp;</p><p>When we do stray away from the predictable, we aren’t putting much thought into it either, with <em>38% believing replacing letters with numbers e.g.</em>p4$$w0rd is more secure when thinking about a password, with 45% believing it makes them harder to guess.</p><p>65% of people think passwords should never be written down, despite advice from cybersecurity experts, and 77% think changing passwords frequently makes them more secure, despite GCHQ recommending against this practice.</p><p><em>p4$$w0rd</em>&nbsp;is in dictionaries of common passwords, so it can be cracked in less than a second. If you use the same password for every website and the password is breached from one site, all sites can be compromised without the attacker needing to try any other passwords - this is known as credential stuffing.</p><p>Cyber Security Expert and Computer Scientist Junade Ali is urging us to take action now with these simple tips to boost our security and keep hackers away: </p><ul><li>Use randomly generated, long, unique passwords for each website.</li><li>Enable Two-Factor Authentication where possible.</li><li>Use a password manager to store your passwords for you and tell you when they have been in a data breach.</li></ul><br/><p>The threat is ever growing with 40% of 16-24-year-olds (Generation Z) and more than a third (37%) of 25-34-year-olds (Millennials) admitting to being impacted by cybercrime.</p><p>In fact, even those who haven’t been impacted are being targeted regularly, with a fifth (21%) of people receiving a scam email every day, 73% thinking hackers are becoming harder to detect and 41% admitting they wouldn’t know what to do if they’d been hacked.</p><p>Junade Ali wants to raise awareness of our common password pitfalls and provide some useful insight to bolster our defences against cyber threats.</p><h4><strong>ABOUT JUNADE ALI:</strong></h4><p>Dr Junade Ali (27) was named the youngest-ever Fellow of the IET in June 2023, and is believed to be the youngest ever Fellow of a professional engineering institution. </p><p>In order to secure Fellowship, Dr Ali demonstrated personal responsibility for significant technological innovation and independent contributions to original research that have resulted in international recognition.</p><p>During his career, he invented the technology which allows websites, password managers and web browsers to warn users when their password has been found in a data breach, without the password ever needing to be shared with a third party. This technology has been adopted by companies including Apple and Google.</p><p>Other contributions have included developing software to help de-escalate cyberwarfare situations...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dr. Junade Ali, Computer Scientist &amp; Security Expert  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>Your Password Isn't Strong Enough!</strong></p><p>We are all guilty of using our favourite holiday destination, a pet’s name or our birth year for a memorable password  across multiple sites. </p><p>But this World Password Day<em> (Thursday 2nd May 2024),</em> a Cyber Security Expert is warning that the importance of strong passwords on our devices and online accounts is more important than ever as hackers are targeting multiple accounts of victims due to weak and predictable passwords.</p><p>65% of people in the UK admit they are scared about being hacked in the future, with 84% thinking hackers are becoming more inventive. Yet only a fifth of people (20%) are able to correctly identify a secure password over a compromised one which can be cracked by a computer in less than a second, and 20% admit to having just one password for multiple websites and devices.</p><p>New research by the Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) shows we are extremely predictable from a scammer’s perspective, with almost half using a significant date (21%) or a pet’s name (20%) as the topic of our passwords.&nbsp;</p><p>When we do stray away from the predictable, we aren’t putting much thought into it either, with <em>38% believing replacing letters with numbers e.g.</em>p4$$w0rd is more secure when thinking about a password, with 45% believing it makes them harder to guess.</p><p>65% of people think passwords should never be written down, despite advice from cybersecurity experts, and 77% think changing passwords frequently makes them more secure, despite GCHQ recommending against this practice.</p><p><em>p4$$w0rd</em>&nbsp;is in dictionaries of common passwords, so it can be cracked in less than a second. If you use the same password for every website and the password is breached from one site, all sites can be compromised without the attacker needing to try any other passwords - this is known as credential stuffing.</p><p>Cyber Security Expert and Computer Scientist Junade Ali is urging us to take action now with these simple tips to boost our security and keep hackers away: </p><ul><li>Use randomly generated, long, unique passwords for each website.</li><li>Enable Two-Factor Authentication where possible.</li><li>Use a password manager to store your passwords for you and tell you when they have been in a data breach.</li></ul><br/><p>The threat is ever growing with 40% of 16-24-year-olds (Generation Z) and more than a third (37%) of 25-34-year-olds (Millennials) admitting to being impacted by cybercrime.</p><p>In fact, even those who haven’t been impacted are being targeted regularly, with a fifth (21%) of people receiving a scam email every day, 73% thinking hackers are becoming harder to detect and 41% admitting they wouldn’t know what to do if they’d been hacked.</p><p>Junade Ali wants to raise awareness of our common password pitfalls and provide some useful insight to bolster our defences against cyber threats.</p><h4><strong>ABOUT JUNADE ALI:</strong></h4><p>Dr Junade Ali (27) was named the youngest-ever Fellow of the IET in June 2023, and is believed to be the youngest ever Fellow of a professional engineering institution. </p><p>In order to secure Fellowship, Dr Ali demonstrated personal responsibility for significant technological innovation and independent contributions to original research that have resulted in international recognition.</p><p>During his career, he invented the technology which allows websites, password managers and web browsers to warn users when their password has been found in a data breach, without the password ever needing to be shared with a third party. This technology has been adopted by companies including Apple and Google.</p><p>Other contributions have included developing software to help de-escalate cyberwarfare situations (including in relation to North Korea) and conducting research into topics including burnout, wrongdoing and whistleblower retaliation in software engineering.</p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND  INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>The research for <strong>the</strong> <strong>IET </strong>was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>18/04/2024 </strong>to <strong>22/04/2024 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in <strong>2,000 National Representative UK (aged 16+)</strong>responding.<strong> </strong>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. </p><p>Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">4e938c6e-23f0-4ed7-8436-b81e20862004</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 27 Apr 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/329b71ed-48a4-43ec-86c0-46be9b18aca3/Podcast-Radio-Business-Junade-Ali-26-04-24.mp3" length="26966725" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>11:14</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>PECKHAM BAKERS WIN OVER ALDI BOSSES WITH JAMAICAN FLAKE BAKE PATTIES | Mike Williams</title><itunes:title>PECKHAM BAKERS WIN OVER ALDI BOSSES WITH JAMAICAN FLAKE BAKE PATTIES | Mike Williams</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Mike Willians Co-Founder &amp; CEO of Flake Bake </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>BAKING THE BIG TIME: PECKHAM BAKERS WIN OVER ALDI BOSSES WITH JAMAICAN FLAKE BAKE PATTIES.</strong></p><p>An independent, family run wholesale bakery in Peckham, South London, producing authentic Jamaican patties, has landed a life changing contract with supermarket Aldi. The supermarket will stock its Flake Bake Beef patty (99p, 140g) in stores nationwide from today (10th April).</p><p>Flake Bake produces authentic Jamaican patties, filled with a range of flavours including chicken, lamb, saltfish and vegetables – a Jamaican twist on the beloved British Cornish pasty.</p><p>Paul Williams, (54) and son Mike (33) of Flake Bake showcased their most popular flavour, Flake Bake Beef patty, as part of Channel 4 series ‘Aldi’s Next Big Thing’, now in its second season. Mike and Paul were picked from hundreds of applicants competing for the coveted contract to stock Aldi stores nationwide.&nbsp;</p><p>From dinners and baked goods to party foods and confectionery, each episode sees hopeful suppliers compete for a space on Aldi’s shelves, before Julie Ashfield, Managing Director of Buying at Aldi UK, decides on a winner which will appear as a Specialbuy in over 1,000 stores.</p><p>Impressing the judges with its standout flavour, Mike and Paul’s Flake Bake Beef patty beat five other hopefuls, including the world’s first bowler hat shaped bread, an edible cookie dough range, an award-winning brioche bun and an allergen free gooseberry and elderflower whoopie pie.</p><p>Bursting with Caribbean flavours, the Flake Bake patties come with a spicy ground beef filling, wrapped in a flaky pastry crust. Julie was blown away with the taste and flakiness of the pastry, but with no packaging, a production line falling short of Julie’s minimum order and a shelf life of just five days, the father and son duo needed to scale up production and make changes to the recipe, without changing the flavour of the patty, to win the order.</p><p>Mike and Paul got to work addressing Julie’s feedback, enlisting the help of a food scientist who suggested the addition of garlic, a natural flavour enhancer that preserves the life of food with its powerful  antioxidant properties.</p><p>Having successfully doubled the shelf life to meet Julie’s quota, the pair then sought the help of Mike’s uncle, Lavar, a graphic designer, to create a shelf-ready and eye-catching, individual packaging design.&nbsp;</p><p>Returning to Aldi Headquarters, Mike and Paul wowed with their new look Flake Bake Beef patties, presented in individually wrapped packs.The judges were delighted with the changes made, agreeing the flavour was just as delicious as the first batch, and the duo successfully secured an order to supply over 1,000 Aldi stores nationwide.&nbsp;</p><p>The father and son duo pride themselves on the bakery’s origins and its dedicated workforce, who hand craft every element of their patties. Producing thousands of patties a week, Flake Bake also has social responsibility and community values baked into its core.</p><p>Working with local charity, Leaders of Tomorrow UK as well as local schools, it provides work placements for students at its factory. Most notably, the family business trained and mentored BBC Young Master Chef contestant, Jaheel John, then just 15 years old. Jaheel is now an Assistant Manager at a major British restaurant, at the tender age of 19.</p><p><strong>Julie Ashfield, Managing Director of Buying at Aldi UK, says: </strong><em>“You can’t help but fall in love with Paul and Mike, and their product tastes beautiful. It’s clear how much care goes into making the product. The pastry is unbelievable, every part of it is delicious – I just love it!”</em></p><p><strong>Mike Williams, Co-Owner of Flake Bake, says:</strong><em> “We have an incredible team, they’ve been making patties for a long time,...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Mike Willians Co-Founder &amp; CEO of Flake Bake </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>BAKING THE BIG TIME: PECKHAM BAKERS WIN OVER ALDI BOSSES WITH JAMAICAN FLAKE BAKE PATTIES.</strong></p><p>An independent, family run wholesale bakery in Peckham, South London, producing authentic Jamaican patties, has landed a life changing contract with supermarket Aldi. The supermarket will stock its Flake Bake Beef patty (99p, 140g) in stores nationwide from today (10th April).</p><p>Flake Bake produces authentic Jamaican patties, filled with a range of flavours including chicken, lamb, saltfish and vegetables – a Jamaican twist on the beloved British Cornish pasty.</p><p>Paul Williams, (54) and son Mike (33) of Flake Bake showcased their most popular flavour, Flake Bake Beef patty, as part of Channel 4 series ‘Aldi’s Next Big Thing’, now in its second season. Mike and Paul were picked from hundreds of applicants competing for the coveted contract to stock Aldi stores nationwide.&nbsp;</p><p>From dinners and baked goods to party foods and confectionery, each episode sees hopeful suppliers compete for a space on Aldi’s shelves, before Julie Ashfield, Managing Director of Buying at Aldi UK, decides on a winner which will appear as a Specialbuy in over 1,000 stores.</p><p>Impressing the judges with its standout flavour, Mike and Paul’s Flake Bake Beef patty beat five other hopefuls, including the world’s first bowler hat shaped bread, an edible cookie dough range, an award-winning brioche bun and an allergen free gooseberry and elderflower whoopie pie.</p><p>Bursting with Caribbean flavours, the Flake Bake patties come with a spicy ground beef filling, wrapped in a flaky pastry crust. Julie was blown away with the taste and flakiness of the pastry, but with no packaging, a production line falling short of Julie’s minimum order and a shelf life of just five days, the father and son duo needed to scale up production and make changes to the recipe, without changing the flavour of the patty, to win the order.</p><p>Mike and Paul got to work addressing Julie’s feedback, enlisting the help of a food scientist who suggested the addition of garlic, a natural flavour enhancer that preserves the life of food with its powerful  antioxidant properties.</p><p>Having successfully doubled the shelf life to meet Julie’s quota, the pair then sought the help of Mike’s uncle, Lavar, a graphic designer, to create a shelf-ready and eye-catching, individual packaging design.&nbsp;</p><p>Returning to Aldi Headquarters, Mike and Paul wowed with their new look Flake Bake Beef patties, presented in individually wrapped packs.The judges were delighted with the changes made, agreeing the flavour was just as delicious as the first batch, and the duo successfully secured an order to supply over 1,000 Aldi stores nationwide.&nbsp;</p><p>The father and son duo pride themselves on the bakery’s origins and its dedicated workforce, who hand craft every element of their patties. Producing thousands of patties a week, Flake Bake also has social responsibility and community values baked into its core.</p><p>Working with local charity, Leaders of Tomorrow UK as well as local schools, it provides work placements for students at its factory. Most notably, the family business trained and mentored BBC Young Master Chef contestant, Jaheel John, then just 15 years old. Jaheel is now an Assistant Manager at a major British restaurant, at the tender age of 19.</p><p><strong>Julie Ashfield, Managing Director of Buying at Aldi UK, says: </strong><em>“You can’t help but fall in love with Paul and Mike, and their product tastes beautiful. It’s clear how much care goes into making the product. The pastry is unbelievable, every part of it is delicious – I just love it!”</em></p><p><strong>Mike Williams, Co-Owner of Flake Bake, says:</strong><em> “We have an incredible team, they’ve been making patties for a long time, some of them before I was born, so they really know what they’re doing. We’ve worked so hard for the last ten years and this feels like the ultimate dream. It’s a lifetime achievement</em>.”</p><p><strong>Paul Williams, Co-Owner of Flake Bake, says: </strong><em>“I cannot explain how happy I am right now. I am very proud of my son, without him, it couldn’t have happened.”&nbsp; </em><strong><em>&nbsp;</em></strong></p><p>The multi-category competition is part of Aldi’s ongoing commitment to support British suppliers. Last year, Aldi spent an additional £1.3 billion with British suppliers and growers, and they provide more than three quarters of all items sold in its stores.The supermarket has also introduced a<a href="https://groceries.aldi.co.uk/en-GB/best-of-british?origin=dropdown&amp;c1=groceries&amp;c2=best-of-british&amp;clickedon=best-of-british" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank"> ‘Best of British’</a> section to its website, which includes a wide selection of groceries from meat to dairy products and everyday essentials, in a bid to help shoppers support British businesses.</p><p>Mike and Paul’s Flake Bake Beef patty (99p, 140g) is available in stores now. But shoppers need to get in quick for a chance to try, as with all Specialbuys, once they’re gone, they’re gone!</p><p>Aldi’s Next Big Thing airs on Channel 4, every Tuesday at 8pm until 7th May.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">6158a234-34a4-47c5-92c5-6076fad4552b</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 23 Apr 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/de9bdd91-2544-4205-8cb1-9b2daf776fb7/The-Cashlfow-Show-Podcast-Radio-Mike-Williams-17-04-24.mp3" length="71725974" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>29:53</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>FROM DEEPFAKES TO CHATGPT PHISHING, WARNING OVER RISING SCAM THREAT AI POSES | Katie Paxton-Fear</title><itunes:title>FROM DEEPFAKES TO CHATGPT PHISHING, WARNING OVER RISING SCAM THREAT AI POSES | Katie Paxton-Fear</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Katie Paxton-Fear, lecturer in Cybersecurity at Manchester Metropolitan University  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>FROM DEEPFAKES TO CHATGPT PHISHING, WARNING OVER RISING SCAM THREAT AI POSES.</strong></p><p><strong>With fraudsters scamming more than £1 billion, 48% of us feel more at risk of scams</strong></p><p>We are being warned about the growing threat Artificial Intelligence (AI) poses to us as it emerges that fraudsters have already scammed more than £1 billion from our bank accounts since the start of the year.</p><p>Top 3 Scamming Tactics This Year </p><ul><li>Phishing Emails or Messages (11%)</li><li>Contact from unknown individuals (11%) </li><li>Fake Online Shops (8%) </li></ul><br/><p>Almost half of us (48%) are feeling more at risk of scams as&nbsp;&nbsp;scammers become increasingly sophisticated in how they use advances in technology to overcome the measures financial institutions put in place to protect us. Conventional scams are difficult enough to spot, but AI-based scams are even more dangerous because they are even harder to detect.</p><p>Deepfakes allow criminals to create seemingly legitimate audio and video, often featuring someone famous, while ChatGPT phishing gives text the tone and coherence of legitimate sources, voice cloning replicates somebody’s tone and language to trick someone else into having a genuine phone conversation, and verification fraud can be used to subvert standard security checks. With these tools ready to use at the scammer's will, a surprising three in five (61%) UK adults are confident they can tell the difference between human and AI-generated communication.</p><p>Despite us losing on average £83.69 as a result of scams in the last year, with them costing men (£93.48) more than women (£70.22), fewer than a third (30%) of us report the incident to the bank, according to Raisin’s research, with only a quarter notifying the relevant online sales platform, with more than one in four (27%) not reporting the scam at all. This may be due to anemotional cost, with us most likely to feel very angry (28%) and anxious (27%), while 23% develop trust issues.</p><h4><u>RESEARCH INFORMATION: </u></h4><p>The research for Raisin was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>23.02.2024 – 26.02.2024 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in <strong>2000</strong> UK adults responding.<strong> </strong></p><p>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Katie Paxton-Fear, lecturer in Cybersecurity at Manchester Metropolitan University  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>FROM DEEPFAKES TO CHATGPT PHISHING, WARNING OVER RISING SCAM THREAT AI POSES.</strong></p><p><strong>With fraudsters scamming more than £1 billion, 48% of us feel more at risk of scams</strong></p><p>We are being warned about the growing threat Artificial Intelligence (AI) poses to us as it emerges that fraudsters have already scammed more than £1 billion from our bank accounts since the start of the year.</p><p>Top 3 Scamming Tactics This Year </p><ul><li>Phishing Emails or Messages (11%)</li><li>Contact from unknown individuals (11%) </li><li>Fake Online Shops (8%) </li></ul><br/><p>Almost half of us (48%) are feeling more at risk of scams as&nbsp;&nbsp;scammers become increasingly sophisticated in how they use advances in technology to overcome the measures financial institutions put in place to protect us. Conventional scams are difficult enough to spot, but AI-based scams are even more dangerous because they are even harder to detect.</p><p>Deepfakes allow criminals to create seemingly legitimate audio and video, often featuring someone famous, while ChatGPT phishing gives text the tone and coherence of legitimate sources, voice cloning replicates somebody’s tone and language to trick someone else into having a genuine phone conversation, and verification fraud can be used to subvert standard security checks. With these tools ready to use at the scammer's will, a surprising three in five (61%) UK adults are confident they can tell the difference between human and AI-generated communication.</p><p>Despite us losing on average £83.69 as a result of scams in the last year, with them costing men (£93.48) more than women (£70.22), fewer than a third (30%) of us report the incident to the bank, according to Raisin’s research, with only a quarter notifying the relevant online sales platform, with more than one in four (27%) not reporting the scam at all. This may be due to anemotional cost, with us most likely to feel very angry (28%) and anxious (27%), while 23% develop trust issues.</p><h4><u>RESEARCH INFORMATION: </u></h4><p>The research for Raisin was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>23.02.2024 – 26.02.2024 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in <strong>2000</strong> UK adults responding.<strong> </strong></p><p>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">0f57a687-63e2-4112-81b4-bd4cda66c7c9</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 23 Apr 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/85aee9c5-5070-4e11-8038-6e6ca85819b5/Podcast-Radio-Business-Katie-Paxton-Fear-17-04-24.mp3" length="34620603" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:25</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Aldi&apos;s Next Big Thing |  Chris Bavin</title><itunes:title>Aldi&apos;s Next Big Thing |  Chris Bavin</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chris Bavin </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss<strong> Aldi's Next Big Thing</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Supermarket Aldi will consider selling a ‘Stormzy approved’ Short Rib Mac &amp; Cheese in the new series of <em>Aldi’s Next Big Thing</em>.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">The six-part prime time show, which kicks off again on Tuesday 2nd April with the ‘dinner’ episode, sees artisan suppliers pitch to win a life-changing</p><p class="ql-align-justify"> contract and have their product land on shelves in over 1,000 Aldi stores nationwide.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Viewers will see chef to the stars, ‘Chef Vickz’ pitch client Stormzy’s favourite to Managing Director of Buying at Aldi UK, Julie Ashfield.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Chef Vickz, from South-East London, has been a personal chef to Stormzy, amongst other clients, for six years, since qualifying in Patisserie and Confectionary at the University of West London.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">She says:<em>“Stormzy was looking for a chef and I got put forward, that's how it all started… This Mac &amp; Cheese is his favourite dish.“It’s special as it’s made with short rib, which has been slow roasted for a very long time.“It would be the opportunity of a lifetime to have my product in Aldi, I want to be able to cook for thousands.”</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Multi award-winning rapper and singer-songwriter Stormzy will send his well wishes to the chef via a cameo on the show:</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“Vick we’re rooting for you, we love you, you’re the best. Hurry up and get back…I’m hungry!”</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify">On the first show in the series, Chef Vickz will be pitching her dinner time treat against other creations including:</p><ul><li class="ql-align-justify">Halal Wagyu Pastrami from the Malik Butchers</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Pasta Bombs from the Stonehouse Smokery</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Rainbow Burgers from Leonati Catering</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Vegan Toad in the Hole from Mabel’s Foods</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Crabululous Crabcakes from The Fabulous Catch Company</li></ul><br/><p class="ql-align-justify">Hosts, broadcaster and author, Anita Rani and Chris Bavin, of BBC’s<em>The One Show</em> and <em>Eat Well for Less</em>, are joined by Aldi boss Julie, who deliberates on taste, affordability and scalability, before deciding if the celebrity-approved dish will make it into the final two.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Finalists then have four weeks to work on Julie’s feedback, before returning to Aldi with their new and improved products, to learn who has won the biggest contract of their lives.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">The winning product will then appear as a Specialbuy in over 1,000 Aldi stores nationwide on Wednesday 3rd April.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Anita Rani, says:</strong><em>“For these small food and drink businesses, winning a contract with Aldi is a potentially life changing opportunity.“Seeing products go from a prototype to supermarket shelves, in just a few months and finding out the stories behind them, has been a really special experience.“I’m excited to see viewers’ reactions - I'm sure everyone will love the winning products just as much as we do.”</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Chris Bavin, says:</strong><em> “As an ex-greengrocer, I know only too well the ups and downs of running your own business.“It’s inspiring seeing such an incredible mix of homegrown food and drink suppliers and heartening to know they’re getting the recognition they deserve, by one of the UK’s largest retailers.“I can’t wait for viewers to discover the winning products for themselves!”</em></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chris Bavin </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss<strong> Aldi's Next Big Thing</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Supermarket Aldi will consider selling a ‘Stormzy approved’ Short Rib Mac &amp; Cheese in the new series of <em>Aldi’s Next Big Thing</em>.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">The six-part prime time show, which kicks off again on Tuesday 2nd April with the ‘dinner’ episode, sees artisan suppliers pitch to win a life-changing</p><p class="ql-align-justify"> contract and have their product land on shelves in over 1,000 Aldi stores nationwide.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Viewers will see chef to the stars, ‘Chef Vickz’ pitch client Stormzy’s favourite to Managing Director of Buying at Aldi UK, Julie Ashfield.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Chef Vickz, from South-East London, has been a personal chef to Stormzy, amongst other clients, for six years, since qualifying in Patisserie and Confectionary at the University of West London.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">She says:<em>“Stormzy was looking for a chef and I got put forward, that's how it all started… This Mac &amp; Cheese is his favourite dish.“It’s special as it’s made with short rib, which has been slow roasted for a very long time.“It would be the opportunity of a lifetime to have my product in Aldi, I want to be able to cook for thousands.”</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Multi award-winning rapper and singer-songwriter Stormzy will send his well wishes to the chef via a cameo on the show:</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><em>“Vick we’re rooting for you, we love you, you’re the best. Hurry up and get back…I’m hungry!”</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify">On the first show in the series, Chef Vickz will be pitching her dinner time treat against other creations including:</p><ul><li class="ql-align-justify">Halal Wagyu Pastrami from the Malik Butchers</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Pasta Bombs from the Stonehouse Smokery</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Rainbow Burgers from Leonati Catering</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Vegan Toad in the Hole from Mabel’s Foods</li><li class="ql-align-justify">Crabululous Crabcakes from The Fabulous Catch Company</li></ul><br/><p class="ql-align-justify">Hosts, broadcaster and author, Anita Rani and Chris Bavin, of BBC’s<em>The One Show</em> and <em>Eat Well for Less</em>, are joined by Aldi boss Julie, who deliberates on taste, affordability and scalability, before deciding if the celebrity-approved dish will make it into the final two.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Finalists then have four weeks to work on Julie’s feedback, before returning to Aldi with their new and improved products, to learn who has won the biggest contract of their lives.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">The winning product will then appear as a Specialbuy in over 1,000 Aldi stores nationwide on Wednesday 3rd April.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Anita Rani, says:</strong><em>“For these small food and drink businesses, winning a contract with Aldi is a potentially life changing opportunity.“Seeing products go from a prototype to supermarket shelves, in just a few months and finding out the stories behind them, has been a really special experience.“I’m excited to see viewers’ reactions - I'm sure everyone will love the winning products just as much as we do.”</em></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>Chris Bavin, says:</strong><em> “As an ex-greengrocer, I know only too well the ups and downs of running your own business.“It’s inspiring seeing such an incredible mix of homegrown food and drink suppliers and heartening to know they’re getting the recognition they deserve, by one of the UK’s largest retailers.“I can’t wait for viewers to discover the winning products for themselves!”</em></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">e83bcd75-0522-4009-8a08-12c85cd8b97c</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 01 Apr 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/f230cb26-d62f-4617-9abc-2576a1c4a650/Podcast-Radio-Business-The-Cashflow-Show-Chris-Bavin-02-04-24.mp3" length="26984488" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>11:15</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>73% BUSINESSES EXPECT TO BE AFFECTED BY CYBERATTACK IN NEXT 2 YEARS | Scott Manson</title><itunes:title>73% BUSINESSES EXPECT TO BE AFFECTED BY CYBERATTACK IN NEXT 2 YEARS | Scott Manson</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Scott Manson, Director of Cyber Security at CISCO UK &amp; I </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why<strong> 73% OF BUSINESSES EXPECT TO BE AFFECTED BY CYBERATTACK IN NEXT 2 YEARS</strong></p><p>Last week, Britain’s AI minster urged UK businesses to “step up” their cybersecurity in response to growing challenges and risks,noting the UK is second-most attacked country in Europe behind Ukraine.</p><p>Today, data from cybersecurity leader Cisco has revealed 54% of UK businesses experienced a cyberattack in the last 12 months,while 70% believe an incident will disrupt operations within the next 12 – 24 months.</p><p>Meanwhile,analysis of cybersecurity protections – based on five core pillars: Identity Intelligence, Machine Trustworthiness,Network Resilience, Cloud Reinforcement, and AI Fortification – has determined only 2% have security measures rated ‘mature’ to remain resilient.</p><p>Similarly, despite many acknowledging the impact AI is having for both defenders and attackers, only 5% are rated ‘mature’ specifically on AI Fortification, with more than half yet to have deployed any AI into their security.</p><p>Despite this, 78% feel very or moderately confident in their ability to stay  resilient against the evolving threat landscape, which is seeing supply chains attacked, social engineering used to compromise networks, and criminals increasingly exploiting vulnerabilities in common applications.</p><p>This overconfidence could stem from the fact 91% have increased their cybersecurity budgets over the last few years, and the majority expect they will grow further. Cisco believes UK firms are not properly assessing the true scale of the challenges they face.</p><p>To improve readiness to face future threats, Cisco recommends UK businesses:</p><p>1.Continueto accelerate investment in protective cybersecurity measures across the board, and adopt a ‘platform’ approach to ensure solutions can be effectively leveraged</p><p>2.Urgently assess and close vulnerability gaps created by unmanaged devices and unsecured WiFi networks</p><p>3.Keep abreast of the latest developments in Generative AI technology and use them to enhance security programs and operational resilience</p><p>4.Ramp up recruitment to close security talent gaps and avoid more costly downstream consequences.</p><p>5.Establish a company baseline of how ‘ready’ you are across the five major security pillars</p><h4>ABOUT CISCO:</h4><p>Cisco (NASDAQ: CSCO) is the worldwide technology leader that securely connects everything to make anything possible. Our purpose is to power an inclusive future for all by helping our customers reimagine their applications, power hybrid work, secure their enterprise, transform their infrastructure, and meet their sustainability goals. Discover more on The Newsroom and follow us on X at @Cisco.&nbsp; </p><p>Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries.</p><p> A listing of Cisco's trademarks can be found at <a href="http://www.cisco.com/go/trademarks" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.cisco.com/go/trademarks</a>. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company.</p><h4>ABOUT THE 2024 CISCO CYBERSECURITY READINESS INDEX:</h4><p>The 2024 Cisco Cybersecurity Readiness Index is based on a double-blind survey of 8,136 private sector business leaders who have cybersecurity responsibilities in their organizations.</p><p>The organizations cover 30 territories in North America, Latin America, EMEA and Asia Pacific: Australia, Brazil, Canada, Mainland China, France, Germany, Hong Kong SAR, India, Indonesia, Italy, Japan, Malaysia, Mexico, Netherlands, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Saudi Arabia, Singapore, South Africa, South Korea, Spain, Sweden,...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Scott Manson, Director of Cyber Security at CISCO UK &amp; I </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why<strong> 73% OF BUSINESSES EXPECT TO BE AFFECTED BY CYBERATTACK IN NEXT 2 YEARS</strong></p><p>Last week, Britain’s AI minster urged UK businesses to “step up” their cybersecurity in response to growing challenges and risks,noting the UK is second-most attacked country in Europe behind Ukraine.</p><p>Today, data from cybersecurity leader Cisco has revealed 54% of UK businesses experienced a cyberattack in the last 12 months,while 70% believe an incident will disrupt operations within the next 12 – 24 months.</p><p>Meanwhile,analysis of cybersecurity protections – based on five core pillars: Identity Intelligence, Machine Trustworthiness,Network Resilience, Cloud Reinforcement, and AI Fortification – has determined only 2% have security measures rated ‘mature’ to remain resilient.</p><p>Similarly, despite many acknowledging the impact AI is having for both defenders and attackers, only 5% are rated ‘mature’ specifically on AI Fortification, with more than half yet to have deployed any AI into their security.</p><p>Despite this, 78% feel very or moderately confident in their ability to stay  resilient against the evolving threat landscape, which is seeing supply chains attacked, social engineering used to compromise networks, and criminals increasingly exploiting vulnerabilities in common applications.</p><p>This overconfidence could stem from the fact 91% have increased their cybersecurity budgets over the last few years, and the majority expect they will grow further. Cisco believes UK firms are not properly assessing the true scale of the challenges they face.</p><p>To improve readiness to face future threats, Cisco recommends UK businesses:</p><p>1.Continueto accelerate investment in protective cybersecurity measures across the board, and adopt a ‘platform’ approach to ensure solutions can be effectively leveraged</p><p>2.Urgently assess and close vulnerability gaps created by unmanaged devices and unsecured WiFi networks</p><p>3.Keep abreast of the latest developments in Generative AI technology and use them to enhance security programs and operational resilience</p><p>4.Ramp up recruitment to close security talent gaps and avoid more costly downstream consequences.</p><p>5.Establish a company baseline of how ‘ready’ you are across the five major security pillars</p><h4>ABOUT CISCO:</h4><p>Cisco (NASDAQ: CSCO) is the worldwide technology leader that securely connects everything to make anything possible. Our purpose is to power an inclusive future for all by helping our customers reimagine their applications, power hybrid work, secure their enterprise, transform their infrastructure, and meet their sustainability goals. Discover more on The Newsroom and follow us on X at @Cisco.&nbsp; </p><p>Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries.</p><p> A listing of Cisco's trademarks can be found at <a href="http://www.cisco.com/go/trademarks" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.cisco.com/go/trademarks</a>. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company.</p><h4>ABOUT THE 2024 CISCO CYBERSECURITY READINESS INDEX:</h4><p>The 2024 Cisco Cybersecurity Readiness Index is based on a double-blind survey of 8,136 private sector business leaders who have cybersecurity responsibilities in their organizations.</p><p>The organizations cover 30 territories in North America, Latin America, EMEA and Asia Pacific: Australia, Brazil, Canada, Mainland China, France, Germany, Hong Kong SAR, India, Indonesia, Italy, Japan, Malaysia, Mexico, Netherlands, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Saudi Arabia, Singapore, South Africa, South Korea, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, Thailand, UAE, UK, USA, and Vietnam.</p><p>We looked at 31 different solutions across the five core pillars of cybersecurity protection: Identity Intelligence,Machine Trustworthiness, Network Resilience, Cloud Reinforcement, and AI Fortification.</p><p>Respondents were asked to indicate which of these they had deployed, the stage of deployment, and if these solutions were not already deployed then what budgets had been approved, and the intended timeline of deployment. Each solution was assigned individual weightings based on its relative importance in helping safeguard the applicable pillar.</p><p>The scores for each organization were then derived based on the stage of deployment of various solutions under each of the five pillars, with partially deployed solutions assigned a 50% weighting and fully deployed solutions weighted at 100%.</p><p>The scores for each pillar are then combined and weighted to arrive at an overall cybersecurity readiness score for each organization. The importance of each pillar was weighted as Identity Intelligence (25%); Network Resilience (25%); Machine Trustworthiness (20%); Cloud Reinforcement (15%); and AI Fortification (15%).</p><p>The respondents are drawn from 18 industries: business services; construction; education; engineering, design, architecture; financial services; healthcare; manufacturing; media and communications; natural resources; personal care and services; real estate; restaurant services; retail; technology services; transportation; travel services; wholesale; and ‘others.’</p><p>The research was carried out in January and February 2024 using online interviews.</p><h4>REFERENCES:</h4><p>1 <a href="https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/cyber-security-longitudinal-survey-wave-three-results/cyber-security-longitudinal-survey-wave-three" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/cyber-security-longitudinal-survey-wave-three-results/cyber-security-longitudinal-survey-wave-three</a></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">c2bdfdfe-e28b-469e-9138-5f16fbc086d6</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 01 Apr 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/0d30ba86-82f8-4f64-a14d-ee9578ad51a4/Podcast-Radio-Business-Scott-Manson-27-03-24.mp3" length="39849272" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:36</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>BOOSTING FEMALE-FOUNDED BUSINESSES | Wendy McMillan</title><itunes:title>BOOSTING FEMALE-FOUNDED BUSINESSES | Wendy McMillan</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Wendy McMillan, Partner </strong>of<strong> Waterland Private Equity </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>BOOSTING FEMALE-FOUNDED BUSINESSES </strong>via <strong>Private Equity.</strong></p><p><strong>Wendy McMillan, Partner at Waterland Private Equity,</strong> talks about recent initiatives announced by the UK government to unlock and boost private investment in female-founded businesses?</p><p>Wendy, who herself was a female entrepreneur and CEO, and has experience as a VC and consultant to private equity, joined the European private equity investment group Waterland(€14BN AUM) in January 2024. </p><p>Wendy was keen to discuss:</p><p>1.How the Invest in Women Taskforce and other similar initiatives are crucial to helping scale female-founded businesses, but that support from private capital is key in helping them to progress them beyond the early stages.</p><p>2.The role private equity currently plays in supporting female-founded SMBs to build and expand internationally – and how private equity must do more to by providing partnership, empathy and expertise which are all equally important for long-term sustainable success. </p><p>3.How diversity in background, experience, and gender can generate greater diversity in ideas and innovations which ultimately build into successful businesses, solving more problems and catering to a broader consumer base.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Wendy McMillan, Partner </strong>of<strong> Waterland Private Equity </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>BOOSTING FEMALE-FOUNDED BUSINESSES </strong>via <strong>Private Equity.</strong></p><p><strong>Wendy McMillan, Partner at Waterland Private Equity,</strong> talks about recent initiatives announced by the UK government to unlock and boost private investment in female-founded businesses?</p><p>Wendy, who herself was a female entrepreneur and CEO, and has experience as a VC and consultant to private equity, joined the European private equity investment group Waterland(€14BN AUM) in January 2024. </p><p>Wendy was keen to discuss:</p><p>1.How the Invest in Women Taskforce and other similar initiatives are crucial to helping scale female-founded businesses, but that support from private capital is key in helping them to progress them beyond the early stages.</p><p>2.The role private equity currently plays in supporting female-founded SMBs to build and expand internationally – and how private equity must do more to by providing partnership, empathy and expertise which are all equally important for long-term sustainable success. </p><p>3.How diversity in background, experience, and gender can generate greater diversity in ideas and innovations which ultimately build into successful businesses, solving more problems and catering to a broader consumer base.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">7af09a73-3ed0-4fbd-a023-a5d73b5a3a0d</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 01 Apr 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/b0688d8d-11d1-43a6-82d4-6ad3a2497139/Podcast-Radio-Business-Wendy-McMillan-27-03-24.mp3" length="40224391" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:46</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>TACKLING THE GLOBAL WATER CRISIS | Duncan Goose</title><itunes:title>TACKLING THE GLOBAL WATER CRISIS | Duncan Goose</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Duncan Goose, Founder </strong>of <strong>One Water &amp; The One Foundation </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss  <strong>TACKLING THE GLOBAL WATER CRISIS</strong></p><p>About 1.8 billion people are predicted to be facing absolute water scarcity by 2025, according to the United Nations, with two-thirds of the global population expected to be grappling with water “stress”</p><p>1. 703 million people in the world lack access to safe, clean drinking water</p><p>2.<strong> </strong>including 115 million who still collect water to drink from rivers, lakes, and other surface water services.</p><p>These people survive on as little as five litres of water a day for all their needs, whereas we use in the region of 150 litres of water each day, with one toilet flush typically using at least five litres itself.</p><p>Lack of access to safe water leaves families in some of the most exposed and vulnerable areas on the planet trapped in poverty, forcing them to spend up to four hours a day collecting water at the expense of working or attending school or earning a livelihood.</p><p>Tragically, more than 1,000 children aged under five die each day from illnesses caused by unsafe water and sanitation</p><p>3.Entrepreneur Duncan Goose, founder of One Water and The One Foundation, is available on World Water Day (FRIDAY 22nd MARCH), a designated United Nations observance day which inspires action to tackle the global water crisis, to support the achievement of Sustainable Development Goal 6: Water and Sanitation.</p><p>He has been able to make a difference with The One Foundation, changing the lives of more than five million people in the most water-stressed areas of the world, having raised £30 million.</p><p>Goose, a marketing executive who returned from a two-year motorcycle adventure around the world, started One Water in 2004 with the aim of raising enough funds to change one person’s life.</p><p>The rise of climate related disasters such as floods and droughts disrupt precipitation patterns and the entire water cycle. This is something Founder Duncan Goose witnessed first-hand during his travels through Honduras in October 1998 as Hurricane Mitch, one of the deadliest tropical cyclones on record,  caused devastation across the Atlantic coast. One Water together with its partner, the One Foundation, offers solutions to combat these challenges.</p><p>Almost 20 years on the multi-million-pound fundraising milestone, achieved through sales of One Water and donations to The One Foundation, has helped to fund crucial programmes in the most water-stressed areas of the world, focusing on Rwanda, Ghana, Kenya, and Malawi.</p><p>Duncan Goose, founder of One Water and The One Foundation, is available to talk about his journey and helping to change five million lives, raising £30 million, over the last two decades.</p><h4><strong>FOOTNOTES:</strong></h4><p>&nbsp;</p><p>1.By 2025, 1.8 billion people are likely to face what the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) calls “<a href="https://www.fao.org/land-water/water/water-scarcity/en/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">absolute</a></p><p><a href="https://www.fao.org/land-water/water/water-scarcity/en/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank"> water scarcity</a>” and two-thirds of the global population is expected to be grappling with water stress</p><p><a href="https://www.unep.org/news-and-stories/story/shortages-mount-countries-hunt-novel-sources-water" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.unep.org/news-and-stories/story/shortages-mount-countries-hunt-novel-sources-water</a></p><p><strong>2</strong>. 703 million people in the world lack access to safe, clean drinking water <a href="https://data.unicef.org/topic/water-and-sanitation/drinking-" rel="noopener noreferrer"...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Duncan Goose, Founder </strong>of <strong>One Water &amp; The One Foundation </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss  <strong>TACKLING THE GLOBAL WATER CRISIS</strong></p><p>About 1.8 billion people are predicted to be facing absolute water scarcity by 2025, according to the United Nations, with two-thirds of the global population expected to be grappling with water “stress”</p><p>1. 703 million people in the world lack access to safe, clean drinking water</p><p>2.<strong> </strong>including 115 million who still collect water to drink from rivers, lakes, and other surface water services.</p><p>These people survive on as little as five litres of water a day for all their needs, whereas we use in the region of 150 litres of water each day, with one toilet flush typically using at least five litres itself.</p><p>Lack of access to safe water leaves families in some of the most exposed and vulnerable areas on the planet trapped in poverty, forcing them to spend up to four hours a day collecting water at the expense of working or attending school or earning a livelihood.</p><p>Tragically, more than 1,000 children aged under five die each day from illnesses caused by unsafe water and sanitation</p><p>3.Entrepreneur Duncan Goose, founder of One Water and The One Foundation, is available on World Water Day (FRIDAY 22nd MARCH), a designated United Nations observance day which inspires action to tackle the global water crisis, to support the achievement of Sustainable Development Goal 6: Water and Sanitation.</p><p>He has been able to make a difference with The One Foundation, changing the lives of more than five million people in the most water-stressed areas of the world, having raised £30 million.</p><p>Goose, a marketing executive who returned from a two-year motorcycle adventure around the world, started One Water in 2004 with the aim of raising enough funds to change one person’s life.</p><p>The rise of climate related disasters such as floods and droughts disrupt precipitation patterns and the entire water cycle. This is something Founder Duncan Goose witnessed first-hand during his travels through Honduras in October 1998 as Hurricane Mitch, one of the deadliest tropical cyclones on record,  caused devastation across the Atlantic coast. One Water together with its partner, the One Foundation, offers solutions to combat these challenges.</p><p>Almost 20 years on the multi-million-pound fundraising milestone, achieved through sales of One Water and donations to The One Foundation, has helped to fund crucial programmes in the most water-stressed areas of the world, focusing on Rwanda, Ghana, Kenya, and Malawi.</p><p>Duncan Goose, founder of One Water and The One Foundation, is available to talk about his journey and helping to change five million lives, raising £30 million, over the last two decades.</p><h4><strong>FOOTNOTES:</strong></h4><p>&nbsp;</p><p>1.By 2025, 1.8 billion people are likely to face what the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) calls “<a href="https://www.fao.org/land-water/water/water-scarcity/en/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">absolute</a></p><p><a href="https://www.fao.org/land-water/water/water-scarcity/en/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank"> water scarcity</a>” and two-thirds of the global population is expected to be grappling with water stress</p><p><a href="https://www.unep.org/news-and-stories/story/shortages-mount-countries-hunt-novel-sources-water" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.unep.org/news-and-stories/story/shortages-mount-countries-hunt-novel-sources-water</a></p><p><strong>2</strong>. 703 million people in the world lack access to safe, clean drinking water <a href="https://data.unicef.org/topic/water-and-sanitation/drinking-" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.worldvision.org/clean-water-news-stories/global-water-crisis-facts#:~:text=703%20million%20people%20lack%20access,haul%2040%20pounds%20of%20water.-</a></p><p>3. More than 1,000 children aged under five die each day from illnesses caused by unsafe water and sanitation <a href="https://www.unicef.org.uk/press-releases/a-triple-threat-of-water-related-crises-is-endangering-the-lives-of-190-million-children-unicef/#:~:text=Globally%2C%20more%20than%201%2C000%20children,to%20climate%20and%20environmental%20threats" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.unicef.org.uk/press-releases/a-triple-threat-of-water-related-crises-is-endangering-the-lives-of-190-million-children-unicef/#:~:text=Globally%2C%20more%20than%201%2C000%20children,to%20climate%20and%20environmental%20threats</a>.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ABOUT ONE AND THE ONE FOUNDATION:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;ONE IS A LIFE-CHANGING BRAND&nbsp;</strong></h4><p class="ql-align-justify"><br></p><p><a href="http://www.onewater.org.uk/about-us/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.onewater.org.uk/about-us/</a></p><p>One funds clean water projects in areas that need it most. So far, we have helped The One Foundation raise over £20 million, changing the lives of over 4 million people.</p><p>One Water was launched with a simple vision: to sell bottled water in the UK to fund water projects across the world. The name One represents the idea that you can’t change a billion people’s lives, but if you can change just One that’s a definition of success.</p><p>Select bottles of One’s water are currently available in Starbucks, Co-op, World Duty Free, Whole Foods Market, Holland &amp; Barrett, other major wholesalers including Bidfood and Brakes or can be purchased directly through One Water’s website.</p><p><strong>THE ONE FOUNDATION</strong></p><p><a href="https://theonefoundation.org.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://theonefoundation.org.uk/</a></p><p>Our mission is to support sustainable water and sanitation services to change lives in some of the world’s poorest communities. We work in both rural and urban environments, varying our approach to meet local needs and focusing on providing clean water and sanitation as a sustainable service for all</p><p><strong>703 million people in the world do not have access to clean water.</strong></p><p>Water is essential for life, yet millions of people around the world are still living without access to safe drinking water with more than 1,000 children aged under five dying each day from illnesses caused by water-related diseases and poor sanitation.&nbsp;Lack of access to safe water leaves families trapped in poverty, as they are forced to spend up to 4 hours a day collecting water at the expense of working or attending school.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">b0a29157-6646-46e3-ad57-cc952cb4b900</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 01 Apr 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/c8ae48bd-1b22-4298-a096-7fa8ca02559b/Podcast-Radio-Business-Duncan-Goose-25-03-24.mp3" length="39141876" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:19</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>HOW TO SOLVE THE UK’S EV AFFORDABILITY PROBLEM | Luke Broad</title><itunes:title>HOW TO SOLVE THE UK’S EV AFFORDABILITY PROBLEM | Luke Broad</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Luke Broad </strong>from <strong>Dacia UK </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>HOW TO SOLVE THE UK’S EV AFFORDABILITY PROBLEM</strong></p><p>Latest figures show EV rollout in the UK is being driven by fleets and firms, with private buyers accounting for less than 1 in 5 EV purchases1.</p><p>This is largely because of the success of incentives such as the Electric Car Salary Sacrifice Scheme (ECSSS) – which uses earnings<em>before</em> tax to fund repayments on an electric car – and has seen usage grow 68% year-on-year2.</p><p>Schemes like these support businesses, which support employees and advance the overall EV rollout, as research shows 74% of UK drivers want to buy an EV but think they are too expensive. &nbsp;</p><p>As Dacia brings its all-new Spring – widely known as Europe’s most affordable EV – to the UK, it poses the question; who should foot the bill?</p><p>In the UK, high cost is the biggest barrier to owning an electric vehicle. More than three in four (74%) drivers say they would like to purchase one, but they are too expensive.</p><p>However, tackle that problem and more appear, as two thirds (66%) say the associated costs are too high, while 56% say their local area lacks the charging infrastructure needed to own and operate an EV. </p><p>This leaves 25% feeling it is unlikely they will own an EV by the 2035 deadline set out in the government’s zero emission vehicle (ZEV) mandate, while 45% say it is unlikely they will purchase an EV as their next car.&nbsp;</p><p>Offering the best value for money on the market, car brand Dacia is tackling the first and largest barrier by bringing Europe’s most affordable electric vehicle to the UK later this year. </p><p><strong>About Dacia</strong></p><p>Born in 1968, then relaunched by Renault Group from 2004 across Europe and Mediterranean countries, Dacia has always offered the best value for money cars by constantly redefining the essentials.&nbsp;As a game-changer, Dacia proposes simple, multi-purpose, reliable cars in </p><p>tune with customers’ lifestyles.</p><p>Dacia models have become a reference on the market, including <em>Sandero</em>, the best-selling retail car in Europe each year since 2017; <em>Duster</em>, the best-selling SUV to European private customers since 2018; and <em>Jogger</em>, the C-segment versatile family car.&nbsp;</p><p>Present in 44 countries, Dacia has sold more than 8 million vehicles since 2004.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>Dacia launched in the UK in January 2013 and enjoyed the most successful start ever for a new car brand in the UK. More than 270,000 Dacia vehicles have been sold in the UK to date.</strong></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Luke Broad </strong>from <strong>Dacia UK </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>HOW TO SOLVE THE UK’S EV AFFORDABILITY PROBLEM</strong></p><p>Latest figures show EV rollout in the UK is being driven by fleets and firms, with private buyers accounting for less than 1 in 5 EV purchases1.</p><p>This is largely because of the success of incentives such as the Electric Car Salary Sacrifice Scheme (ECSSS) – which uses earnings<em>before</em> tax to fund repayments on an electric car – and has seen usage grow 68% year-on-year2.</p><p>Schemes like these support businesses, which support employees and advance the overall EV rollout, as research shows 74% of UK drivers want to buy an EV but think they are too expensive. &nbsp;</p><p>As Dacia brings its all-new Spring – widely known as Europe’s most affordable EV – to the UK, it poses the question; who should foot the bill?</p><p>In the UK, high cost is the biggest barrier to owning an electric vehicle. More than three in four (74%) drivers say they would like to purchase one, but they are too expensive.</p><p>However, tackle that problem and more appear, as two thirds (66%) say the associated costs are too high, while 56% say their local area lacks the charging infrastructure needed to own and operate an EV. </p><p>This leaves 25% feeling it is unlikely they will own an EV by the 2035 deadline set out in the government’s zero emission vehicle (ZEV) mandate, while 45% say it is unlikely they will purchase an EV as their next car.&nbsp;</p><p>Offering the best value for money on the market, car brand Dacia is tackling the first and largest barrier by bringing Europe’s most affordable electric vehicle to the UK later this year. </p><p><strong>About Dacia</strong></p><p>Born in 1968, then relaunched by Renault Group from 2004 across Europe and Mediterranean countries, Dacia has always offered the best value for money cars by constantly redefining the essentials.&nbsp;As a game-changer, Dacia proposes simple, multi-purpose, reliable cars in </p><p>tune with customers’ lifestyles.</p><p>Dacia models have become a reference on the market, including <em>Sandero</em>, the best-selling retail car in Europe each year since 2017; <em>Duster</em>, the best-selling SUV to European private customers since 2018; and <em>Jogger</em>, the C-segment versatile family car.&nbsp;</p><p>Present in 44 countries, Dacia has sold more than 8 million vehicles since 2004.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>Dacia launched in the UK in January 2013 and enjoyed the most successful start ever for a new car brand in the UK. More than 270,000 Dacia vehicles have been sold in the UK to date.</strong></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">b07d6034-4179-4068-8484-b524a5d595a0</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 14 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/5c9ca5b7-3015-4af8-97c6-cb6a0e885939/Podcast-Radio-Business-Luke-Broad-14-03-24.mp3" length="39425044" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:26</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Tech Show 2024 | Flavilla Fongang - Founder, Global Tech Advocates, Black Women in Tech &amp; Black Rise</title><itunes:title>Tech Show 2024 | Flavilla Fongang - Founder, Global Tech Advocates, Black Women in Tech &amp; Black Rise</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Flavilla Fongang, Founder of Global Tech Advocates, Black Women in Tech and Black Rise </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Leveraging Diversity, Creating Networks &amp; empowering Growth</strong></p><p>Flavilla Fongang is a multi-award-winning serial entrepreneur who started her career in oil &amp; gas, then fashion and she influenced the technology sector. She is now an international and multilingual keynote speaker (English &amp; French).  Computer Weekly named her the number 1, most influential woman in tech in the UK among a list of more than 600 women in tech nationwide. </p><p>She is the founder of Black Rise, the first business platform dedicated to connecting the business world to talented, skilled and experienced black professionals and businesses. </p><p>She is a neuroscience brand expert covering strategy, design, marketing and customer experience. She is the founder of 3 Colours Rule, an award-winning branding and marketing agency. Mercedes Benz awarded Flavilla the “She’s Mercedes” businesswoman award among women such as Sheryl Sandberg, the COO of Facebook. She is the author of “99 Strategies to get customers”. </p><p>She is also the founder of Global Tech Advocates – Black Women in Tech, the 1st largest organisation of black professional women in tech. She published since October 2021, an annual book “The Voices In The Shadow”. A book that features stories of black women in tech and is distributed to secondary schools for FREE across the UK and Ireland. The books are now also archived at The British Library to protect their legacy. She is the enabler and is never afraid to challenge the norms.</p><p>She is an Entrepreneurship Expert with the Entrepreneurship Centre for Saïd Business School, University of Oxford. She has been a keynote speaker for the most prestigious international events, such as AdWeek, HubSpot, DMWF, MozCon, AdWorld, Upgrade100, CTA, MarTech and many more.</p><p>She has also delivered corporate talks for the following companies: Meta, Toyota, Zoom, Levi’s, Microsoft, Deloitte, Amazon, HSBC and many more.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Flavilla Fongang, Founder of Global Tech Advocates, Black Women in Tech and Black Rise </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Leveraging Diversity, Creating Networks &amp; empowering Growth</strong></p><p>Flavilla Fongang is a multi-award-winning serial entrepreneur who started her career in oil &amp; gas, then fashion and she influenced the technology sector. She is now an international and multilingual keynote speaker (English &amp; French).  Computer Weekly named her the number 1, most influential woman in tech in the UK among a list of more than 600 women in tech nationwide. </p><p>She is the founder of Black Rise, the first business platform dedicated to connecting the business world to talented, skilled and experienced black professionals and businesses. </p><p>She is a neuroscience brand expert covering strategy, design, marketing and customer experience. She is the founder of 3 Colours Rule, an award-winning branding and marketing agency. Mercedes Benz awarded Flavilla the “She’s Mercedes” businesswoman award among women such as Sheryl Sandberg, the COO of Facebook. She is the author of “99 Strategies to get customers”. </p><p>She is also the founder of Global Tech Advocates – Black Women in Tech, the 1st largest organisation of black professional women in tech. She published since October 2021, an annual book “The Voices In The Shadow”. A book that features stories of black women in tech and is distributed to secondary schools for FREE across the UK and Ireland. The books are now also archived at The British Library to protect their legacy. She is the enabler and is never afraid to challenge the norms.</p><p>She is an Entrepreneurship Expert with the Entrepreneurship Centre for Saïd Business School, University of Oxford. She has been a keynote speaker for the most prestigious international events, such as AdWeek, HubSpot, DMWF, MozCon, AdWorld, Upgrade100, CTA, MarTech and many more.</p><p>She has also delivered corporate talks for the following companies: Meta, Toyota, Zoom, Levi’s, Microsoft, Deloitte, Amazon, HSBC and many more.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">63a52f80-045b-4161-9ca0-148321368b7b</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/42c32aa1-79fb-44ed-a8b4-afc15dc5f00c/Podcast-Radio-Business-Flavilla-Fongang-07-03-24.mp3" length="28245680" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>11:46</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Tech Show 2024 | Piers Linney Co-Founder of Impliment AI</title><itunes:title>Tech Show 2024 | Piers Linney Co-Founder of Impliment AI</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Piers Linney, Executive Chairman &amp; Co‑Founder of Implement AI </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>AI &amp; the future of Tech in SME Businesses</strong></p><p>Piers Linney,	Executive Chairman &amp; Co‑Founder of Implement AI, is an entrepreneur, investor, and former Dragon on the prime-time BBC show Dragons’ Den. With a background in law and investment banking, Piers has established himself as a leading figure inthe UK business world, particularly in the technology sector. </p><p>He has sat on the board of Nesta, the £600m innovation foundation, and British Business Bank during the roll-out of £90bn of Covid support. Piers is also an advocate for diversity in business and sits on Sky’s Diversity Advisory Council. He has also sat on the boards of the UK Cloud Industry Forum and TechUK. Piers is the co-founder of Implement AI which is focused on helping SME's unlock the power of AI.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Piers Linney, Executive Chairman &amp; Co‑Founder of Implement AI </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>AI &amp; the future of Tech in SME Businesses</strong></p><p>Piers Linney,	Executive Chairman &amp; Co‑Founder of Implement AI, is an entrepreneur, investor, and former Dragon on the prime-time BBC show Dragons’ Den. With a background in law and investment banking, Piers has established himself as a leading figure inthe UK business world, particularly in the technology sector. </p><p>He has sat on the board of Nesta, the £600m innovation foundation, and British Business Bank during the roll-out of £90bn of Covid support. Piers is also an advocate for diversity in business and sits on Sky’s Diversity Advisory Council. He has also sat on the boards of the UK Cloud Industry Forum and TechUK. Piers is the co-founder of Implement AI which is focused on helping SME's unlock the power of AI.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">4dab68a6-ab01-4cd0-89c6-cc1c627bf76f</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/f5233a75-5175-4b58-be32-da9ef7cccb22/Podcast-Radio-Business-Piers-Linney-06-03-24.mp3" length="25493419" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:37</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Tech Show 2024 | Andy Caddy - Group Chief Information Officer, PUREGYM</title><itunes:title>Tech Show 2024 | Andy Caddy - Group Chief Information Officer, PUREGYM</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p>Andy Caddy, Group Chief Information Officer at PureGym <strong> </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Change at the speed of Gen-AI</strong></p><p>Andy joined PureGym as Group Chief Information Officer in June 2022 taking on responsibility for Digital Strategy, Digital Product and Technology across the group. </p><p>Andy had spent time in technology leadership positions at a number of companies including Group CTO at Whitbread (Premier Inn and Costa Coffee), Group CIO for Virgin Active and various roles at easyJet including CTO where he delivered their award winning mobile app and one of the busiest eCommerce sites in Europe. Previous companies include Cable &amp; Wireless, NatWest Group and Argos. </p><p>Andy has also been a non-executive director, investor and regular speaker on the changing roles of CIO and inspiring a modern technology workforce.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Andy Caddy, Group Chief Information Officer at PureGym <strong> </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Change at the speed of Gen-AI</strong></p><p>Andy joined PureGym as Group Chief Information Officer in June 2022 taking on responsibility for Digital Strategy, Digital Product and Technology across the group. </p><p>Andy had spent time in technology leadership positions at a number of companies including Group CTO at Whitbread (Premier Inn and Costa Coffee), Group CIO for Virgin Active and various roles at easyJet including CTO where he delivered their award winning mobile app and one of the busiest eCommerce sites in Europe. Previous companies include Cable &amp; Wireless, NatWest Group and Argos. </p><p>Andy has also been a non-executive director, investor and regular speaker on the changing roles of CIO and inspiring a modern technology workforce.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">a47895d5-08bd-46ca-a614-64aecd620d27</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/552f3d53-2f10-4492-8d58-2dc0c8510c24/Podcast-Radio-Business-Andy-Caddy-06-03-24.mp3" length="28970840" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>12:04</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Tech Show 2024 | Simon Press of Closerstill Media &amp; Tech Show London</title><itunes:title>Tech Show 2024 | Simon Press of Closerstill Media &amp; Tech Show London</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Simon Press, Senior Portfolio Director of Euro Tech Portfolio of events at Closerstill Media</strong>,<strong> </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Tech Show London 2024</strong></p><p>Over the past couple of years, Simon Press, the Senior Portfolio Director overseeing the Euro Tech Portfolio of events at Closerstill Media, has been on a mission to amplify the impact of tech events. These events include Tech Show Paris, Tech Show Frankfurt, and Tech Show London, which has firmly established itself as a trusted name in the industry.</p><p>Tech Show London has consistently delivered exceptional gatherings that address the ever-evolving needs of the tech community. It serves as a go-to platform for innovation, knowledge-sharing, and valuable networking opportunities across various sectors, including Retail, Travel, and Hospitality.</p><p>www.techshowlondon.co.uk</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Simon Press, Senior Portfolio Director of Euro Tech Portfolio of events at Closerstill Media</strong>,<strong> </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Tech Show London 2024</strong></p><p>Over the past couple of years, Simon Press, the Senior Portfolio Director overseeing the Euro Tech Portfolio of events at Closerstill Media, has been on a mission to amplify the impact of tech events. These events include Tech Show Paris, Tech Show Frankfurt, and Tech Show London, which has firmly established itself as a trusted name in the industry.</p><p>Tech Show London has consistently delivered exceptional gatherings that address the ever-evolving needs of the tech community. It serves as a go-to platform for innovation, knowledge-sharing, and valuable networking opportunities across various sectors, including Retail, Travel, and Hospitality.</p><p>www.techshowlondon.co.uk</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">c30ff0f1-7da9-4163-910e-1620d9aa3c46</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/5da8d94f-5821-4526-bc97-c71dfb2f3108/Podcast-Radio-Business-Simon-Press-06-03-24.mp3" length="21482056" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>08:57</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Tech Show 2024 | YSL Beauty &amp; why Abuse Is Not Love |  Delphine Helin &amp; Juleah Love</title><itunes:title>Tech Show 2024 | YSL Beauty &amp; why Abuse Is Not Love |  Delphine Helin &amp; Juleah Love</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Delphine Helin</strong> (International Retail Services &amp; Beauty Tech Director) &amp; <strong>Juleah Love</strong> (Global Head of Brand Corporate Engagement) from <strong>YSL Beauty </strong>speak to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Tech Innovation at YSL beauty &amp; why Abuse Is Not Love</strong></p><p><strong><u>Delphine Helin</u></strong>  held various positions such as Business Development Director for Ralph Lauren fragrances, Lancôme Retail Education Director and Lancôme Brand Director for Latin America. She has developed an ability to work in multicultural and highly volatile environments with a constant drive to understand the consumer tensions and elevate their experience.</p><p>Delphine has become a specialist of omnichannel retail. She is a growing voice within Women in tech, with speeches at Vivatech and Tech for Retail. Her innovative and transformative spirit is a driving force for her to continue crafting disruptive and purposeful beauty tech services, augmenting Beauty Advisors expertise and offering consumers unique and personalized beauty experiences.</p><p><strong><u>Juleah Love</u></strong> is the Global Head of Brand Corporate Engagement at YSL Beauty leading all corporate &amp; sustainability communication, as well as social and environment impact programs at the international level. She has been recognized for her work spearheading the creation, launch, and development of Abuse Is Not Love, a global program to prevent IPV with non-profit partnerships. </p><p>A public speaker, Juleah is the official spokesperson for the program reaching international audiences of over 23M people across 27 countries and has notably co-authored a paper on IPV in the workplace published in the Harvard Business Review. She was invited to the White House, UK Parliament, Embassies, conferences, and podcasts on her work on engaging corporates in the fight against domestic abuse.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Delphine Helin</strong> (International Retail Services &amp; Beauty Tech Director) &amp; <strong>Juleah Love</strong> (Global Head of Brand Corporate Engagement) from <strong>YSL Beauty </strong>speak to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Tech Innovation at YSL beauty &amp; why Abuse Is Not Love</strong></p><p><strong><u>Delphine Helin</u></strong>  held various positions such as Business Development Director for Ralph Lauren fragrances, Lancôme Retail Education Director and Lancôme Brand Director for Latin America. She has developed an ability to work in multicultural and highly volatile environments with a constant drive to understand the consumer tensions and elevate their experience.</p><p>Delphine has become a specialist of omnichannel retail. She is a growing voice within Women in tech, with speeches at Vivatech and Tech for Retail. Her innovative and transformative spirit is a driving force for her to continue crafting disruptive and purposeful beauty tech services, augmenting Beauty Advisors expertise and offering consumers unique and personalized beauty experiences.</p><p><strong><u>Juleah Love</u></strong> is the Global Head of Brand Corporate Engagement at YSL Beauty leading all corporate &amp; sustainability communication, as well as social and environment impact programs at the international level. She has been recognized for her work spearheading the creation, launch, and development of Abuse Is Not Love, a global program to prevent IPV with non-profit partnerships. </p><p>A public speaker, Juleah is the official spokesperson for the program reaching international audiences of over 23M people across 27 countries and has notably co-authored a paper on IPV in the workplace published in the Harvard Business Review. She was invited to the White House, UK Parliament, Embassies, conferences, and podcasts on her work on engaging corporates in the fight against domestic abuse.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">874cbfbc-b703-409c-9ada-548a13bfaeae</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/48e4ae81-cebb-4fa8-8dd7-35fd8d0115ba/Podcast-Radio-Business-Delphine-Helin-Juleah-Love-06-03-24.mp3" length="36021811" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:01</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>ARE INDEPENDENT ARTISTS TAKING OVER THE #BRITS? | Anthony Hamer-Hodges</title><itunes:title>ARE INDEPENDENT ARTISTS TAKING OVER THE #BRITS? | Anthony Hamer-Hodges</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Anthony Hamer-Hodges, Principal at the London College of Contemporary Music </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Are Independent Artists Taking Over The Brits?</strong></p><p>Ahead of Raye’s incredible success at the Brit Awards, which this year saw her receive a record-breaking seven nominations &amp; win an amazing six awards, it’s important to take note of how being an independent artist has changed in recent years.</p><p>In fact, according to data from Spotify, independent artists have contributed $4.5 bn to the Spotify payout.</p><p>RAYE has been an independent artist since 2021 following seven years under a record deal with Polydor Records, and since becoming independent has had a No 1 single, performed at Glastonbury and the Royal Albert Hall.</p><p>2023 saw women dominate the UK charts, with women spending 31 weeks on top of the UK singles chart, and accounted for a record seven of the year’s 10 biggest singles.</p><p>We also discuss: Beyonce, Berry Gordy,Record Company Contracts, Record Company Influence, How independent Artists Survive ,The Future of The Industry &amp; LCCM</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Anthony Hamer-Hodges, Principal at the London College of Contemporary Music </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Are Independent Artists Taking Over The Brits?</strong></p><p>Ahead of Raye’s incredible success at the Brit Awards, which this year saw her receive a record-breaking seven nominations &amp; win an amazing six awards, it’s important to take note of how being an independent artist has changed in recent years.</p><p>In fact, according to data from Spotify, independent artists have contributed $4.5 bn to the Spotify payout.</p><p>RAYE has been an independent artist since 2021 following seven years under a record deal with Polydor Records, and since becoming independent has had a No 1 single, performed at Glastonbury and the Royal Albert Hall.</p><p>2023 saw women dominate the UK charts, with women spending 31 weeks on top of the UK singles chart, and accounted for a record seven of the year’s 10 biggest singles.</p><p>We also discuss: Beyonce, Berry Gordy,Record Company Contracts, Record Company Influence, How independent Artists Survive ,The Future of The Industry &amp; LCCM</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">4026f12c-e87c-4a12-844a-23cee7bbf97e</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/a7691202-a6a0-49f9-b702-92d5e7bbbf67/Podcast-Radio-Business-The-Cashflow-Show-Anthony-Hamer-Hodges-0.mp3" length="64528717" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>26:53</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>‘ENGINEERING’ SUCCESS IN UK ECONOMY  | Dr Hilary Leevers</title><itunes:title>‘ENGINEERING’ SUCCESS IN UK ECONOMY  | Dr Hilary Leevers</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dr Hilary Leevers, Chief Executive, EngineeringUK </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>‘ENGINEERING’ SUCCESS IN UK ECONOMY</strong></p><p>This National Careers Week (4th-8th March 2024) young people are being encouraged to consider engineering as a career path, as a new report finds almost 7 in 10 (68%) engineering and technology graduates are in paid work in the engineering sector, earning more on average than those in other occupations.</p><p>The report from EngineeringUK also shows an engineering and technology degree brings graduates positive job prospects specifically relevantto their degrees, highlighting the importance of choosing your degree carefully.</p><p>Almost three quarters (73%) of engineering students went on to work in paid employment, compared to 70% of all other subjects combined, an increase compared to last year.&nbsp; </p><p>With an average salary of between £25,000 and £30,000 or higher for a graduate role, they also tend to be paid better than graduates from other degree subjects. </p><p>It seems the job role is increasing in popularity, ranking second only to ‘Doctor’ in the top 10 desirable jobs for teenagers, according to separate research carried out by BBC Bitesize.</p><p>Engineering graduates are also available to share their story and why an engineering degree is a successful career path into the industry.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong><u>About EngineeringUK:</u></strong></p><p>We are a not-for-profit organisation that drives change so more young people choose engineering and technology careers.</p><p>There aren't enough people working in engineering and technology and demand is going up. So, we need more young people to realise there could be a future for them in those careers. Many of them don't understand what the opportunities are and the different ways to get into them. We want to change that. We need a stronger, more representative workforce for engineering and technology to thrive and we have to things differently to make those careers more attractive.&nbsp;We wantmore young people to see engineering and technology could offer them a varied and rewarding career. </p><p>We are a not-for-profit working with hundreds of organisations so we can all grow the future talent pool together. We need more people and more diversity andwe all have a part to play in achieving that. We can't afford not to work together. At EngineeringUK, we drive that collective effort through research and evidence, leadership, activities for schools and advocacy, with a focus on long-term sustainability</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dr Hilary Leevers, Chief Executive, EngineeringUK </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>‘ENGINEERING’ SUCCESS IN UK ECONOMY</strong></p><p>This National Careers Week (4th-8th March 2024) young people are being encouraged to consider engineering as a career path, as a new report finds almost 7 in 10 (68%) engineering and technology graduates are in paid work in the engineering sector, earning more on average than those in other occupations.</p><p>The report from EngineeringUK also shows an engineering and technology degree brings graduates positive job prospects specifically relevantto their degrees, highlighting the importance of choosing your degree carefully.</p><p>Almost three quarters (73%) of engineering students went on to work in paid employment, compared to 70% of all other subjects combined, an increase compared to last year.&nbsp; </p><p>With an average salary of between £25,000 and £30,000 or higher for a graduate role, they also tend to be paid better than graduates from other degree subjects. </p><p>It seems the job role is increasing in popularity, ranking second only to ‘Doctor’ in the top 10 desirable jobs for teenagers, according to separate research carried out by BBC Bitesize.</p><p>Engineering graduates are also available to share their story and why an engineering degree is a successful career path into the industry.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong><u>About EngineeringUK:</u></strong></p><p>We are a not-for-profit organisation that drives change so more young people choose engineering and technology careers.</p><p>There aren't enough people working in engineering and technology and demand is going up. So, we need more young people to realise there could be a future for them in those careers. Many of them don't understand what the opportunities are and the different ways to get into them. We want to change that. We need a stronger, more representative workforce for engineering and technology to thrive and we have to things differently to make those careers more attractive.&nbsp;We wantmore young people to see engineering and technology could offer them a varied and rewarding career. </p><p>We are a not-for-profit working with hundreds of organisations so we can all grow the future talent pool together. We need more people and more diversity andwe all have a part to play in achieving that. We can't afford not to work together. At EngineeringUK, we drive that collective effort through research and evidence, leadership, activities for schools and advocacy, with a focus on long-term sustainability</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">1734dc11-7855-4dbd-b856-f4a18689ff8e</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/0b056465-e34a-43d1-8abe-c8517335240d/Podcast-Radio-Business-Hilary-Leevers-04-03-24.mp3" length="33150431" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:49</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>UK EXPORTS TO CHINA ON THE RISE | Joanna Zhou</title><itunes:title>UK EXPORTS TO CHINA ON THE RISE | Joanna Zhou</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Joanna Zhou, China Commercial Manager </strong>of<strong> Holland &amp; Barrett </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>UK EXPORTS TO CHINA ARE ON THE RISE</strong></p><p>UK exports to China increased by 54% between 2019 and 2022, according to Alibaba data which shows across 27 European countries sales via its platforms soared by a third to about €32.3 billion (£27.57 billion), highlighting demand for the good but also highlighting the growing role of digital platforms in enabling cross-border opportunities for businesses around the globe.</p><p>Almost two fifths (38%) of the gross merchandise value of goods exported was led by beauty, perfumes, personal care and make-up products, ahead of textiles and apparel (31%), food and beverages (8%), and furniture and other manufactured goods (7%) and in addition to driving growth for individual businesses, exports have been a major contributor to economic growth across Europe with these exports to China through Alibaba’s platforms contributing about £59.75 billion to the GDP of the UK, Germany, France, Italy, and Spain, while enabling the creation of more than 205,965 jobs - in excess of £956 million in estimated tax revenue was collected through sales on Alibaba’s platforms in 2022, up from £606 million in 2019 with additionally, the estimated number of UK people employed by businesses selling on Alibaba’s platforms rising from 24,006 in 2019 to more than 33,357 in 2022.</p><p><strong><u>Joanna Zhou </u></strong>has been responsible for the launch and operations of Holland &amp; Barrett’s cross-border Ecommerce business in China since 2021. Her knowledge of China, expertise in digital marketing and understanding of Chinese consumers have steered the business to grow exponentially: delighting customers, exceeding the expectations of partners, and reaching substantial milestones.</p><p>Joanna is responsible for delivering Holland &amp; Barrett’s trading strategy to thrive in the cross-border e-commerce environment, leveraging key e-commerce platforms including Tmall. She has repositioned Holland &amp; Barrett as a leading UK health and wellness consumer brand to provide a proposition perfect for China’s growing demographic of health-conscious young consumers.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Joanna Zhou, China Commercial Manager </strong>of<strong> Holland &amp; Barrett </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>UK EXPORTS TO CHINA ARE ON THE RISE</strong></p><p>UK exports to China increased by 54% between 2019 and 2022, according to Alibaba data which shows across 27 European countries sales via its platforms soared by a third to about €32.3 billion (£27.57 billion), highlighting demand for the good but also highlighting the growing role of digital platforms in enabling cross-border opportunities for businesses around the globe.</p><p>Almost two fifths (38%) of the gross merchandise value of goods exported was led by beauty, perfumes, personal care and make-up products, ahead of textiles and apparel (31%), food and beverages (8%), and furniture and other manufactured goods (7%) and in addition to driving growth for individual businesses, exports have been a major contributor to economic growth across Europe with these exports to China through Alibaba’s platforms contributing about £59.75 billion to the GDP of the UK, Germany, France, Italy, and Spain, while enabling the creation of more than 205,965 jobs - in excess of £956 million in estimated tax revenue was collected through sales on Alibaba’s platforms in 2022, up from £606 million in 2019 with additionally, the estimated number of UK people employed by businesses selling on Alibaba’s platforms rising from 24,006 in 2019 to more than 33,357 in 2022.</p><p><strong><u>Joanna Zhou </u></strong>has been responsible for the launch and operations of Holland &amp; Barrett’s cross-border Ecommerce business in China since 2021. Her knowledge of China, expertise in digital marketing and understanding of Chinese consumers have steered the business to grow exponentially: delighting customers, exceeding the expectations of partners, and reaching substantial milestones.</p><p>Joanna is responsible for delivering Holland &amp; Barrett’s trading strategy to thrive in the cross-border e-commerce environment, leveraging key e-commerce platforms including Tmall. She has repositioned Holland &amp; Barrett as a leading UK health and wellness consumer brand to provide a proposition perfect for China’s growing demographic of health-conscious young consumers.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">d3c9e056-8364-4165-bd63-aebe3a3956eb</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/4733fe47-c242-42c7-b2e4-393bfec91879/Podcast-Radio-Business-Joanna-Zhou-28-02-24.mp3" length="33917386" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:08</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>THE ‘CUSTOMER VULNERABILITY’ EPIDEMIC |  Riffat Tufail</title><itunes:title>THE ‘CUSTOMER VULNERABILITY’ EPIDEMIC |  Riffat Tufail</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Riffat Tufail, Customer Vulnerability Expert </strong>of<strong> Phoenix  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton    M.Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>THE ‘CUSTOMER VULNERABILITY’ EPIDEMIC ISSUE GROWING IN SCALE THAT URGENTLY NEEDS TO BE ADDRESSED</strong></p><p>What is customer vulnerability?</p><p>The Financial Conduct Authority’s definition is someone who, due to their personal circumstances, is especially susceptible to harm, particularly when a business is not acting with appropriate levels of care.</p><p>The impact of stress and poor mental health on decision making is well known, with researchers1 finding that having a scarcity mindset, or a feeling of not having enough money, can be the equivalent of going without seven hours of sleep. </p><p>This can lead to more impulsive decisions, difficulty understanding information, and ultimately, poor customer outcomes if businesses do not intervene with help and support.</p><p>One in four UK adults say looking after their money has caused them to lose sleep, and 23% believe money has contributed towards their poor mental health, according to recent analysis from Standard Life, part of Phoenix Group.</p><p>It also has a detrimental impact on people’s long-term financial futures, with 59% of people saying current pressures are making them worry about what their future might look like.&nbsp; Companies often speak to people when they are at their most vulnerable and worried, so we have a real responsibility to get to know and understand our customers' individual needs.</p><p><strong><u>About Phoenix Group</u></strong></p><p><a href="https://www.thephoenixgroup.com/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Phoenix Group</a> is the UK’s largest long-term savings and retirement business with £259 billion of assets under administration.</p><p>As life expectancy continues to increase and the pension landscape continues to shift, we offer our 12 million customers a broad range of pensions, savings and life&nbsp;insurance products across our family of brands which include Standard Life, SunLife, Phoenix Life and ReAssure. Our vision is to help even more people on their journey to and through retirement, providing the right support at the right time.</p><p>We are a growing and sustainable business united by a common purpose – helping people secure a life of possibilities. This drives everything we do and means taking responsible and sustainable investment decisions and using our presence and voice to drive forward change for the better, for our customers, our colleagues, and our wider community.</p><p>A FTSE 100 company, we also feature in the FTSE100 ESG Select Index series and we are playing an active role in helping to invest in a sustainable future. As part of this, we have committed to our operations being <a href="https://www.thephoenixgroup.com/our-impact/planet/net-zero-transition-plan/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">net zero carbon</a> by 2025 and for our investment portfolios we have set an interim target of a 50% reduction in the carbon emission intensity of c£250bn by 2030, as we progress towards our portfolios being net zero carbon by 2050 or sooner.</p><p>We have been recognised as a leading employer for many years. We are accredited as a Living Wage Employer, Living Pension Employer and as a Carer Positive Exemplary Employer for offering the best support to colleagues who are carers. </p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Riffat Tufail, Customer Vulnerability Expert </strong>of<strong> Phoenix  </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton    M.Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>THE ‘CUSTOMER VULNERABILITY’ EPIDEMIC ISSUE GROWING IN SCALE THAT URGENTLY NEEDS TO BE ADDRESSED</strong></p><p>What is customer vulnerability?</p><p>The Financial Conduct Authority’s definition is someone who, due to their personal circumstances, is especially susceptible to harm, particularly when a business is not acting with appropriate levels of care.</p><p>The impact of stress and poor mental health on decision making is well known, with researchers1 finding that having a scarcity mindset, or a feeling of not having enough money, can be the equivalent of going without seven hours of sleep. </p><p>This can lead to more impulsive decisions, difficulty understanding information, and ultimately, poor customer outcomes if businesses do not intervene with help and support.</p><p>One in four UK adults say looking after their money has caused them to lose sleep, and 23% believe money has contributed towards their poor mental health, according to recent analysis from Standard Life, part of Phoenix Group.</p><p>It also has a detrimental impact on people’s long-term financial futures, with 59% of people saying current pressures are making them worry about what their future might look like.&nbsp; Companies often speak to people when they are at their most vulnerable and worried, so we have a real responsibility to get to know and understand our customers' individual needs.</p><p><strong><u>About Phoenix Group</u></strong></p><p><a href="https://www.thephoenixgroup.com/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Phoenix Group</a> is the UK’s largest long-term savings and retirement business with £259 billion of assets under administration.</p><p>As life expectancy continues to increase and the pension landscape continues to shift, we offer our 12 million customers a broad range of pensions, savings and life&nbsp;insurance products across our family of brands which include Standard Life, SunLife, Phoenix Life and ReAssure. Our vision is to help even more people on their journey to and through retirement, providing the right support at the right time.</p><p>We are a growing and sustainable business united by a common purpose – helping people secure a life of possibilities. This drives everything we do and means taking responsible and sustainable investment decisions and using our presence and voice to drive forward change for the better, for our customers, our colleagues, and our wider community.</p><p>A FTSE 100 company, we also feature in the FTSE100 ESG Select Index series and we are playing an active role in helping to invest in a sustainable future. As part of this, we have committed to our operations being <a href="https://www.thephoenixgroup.com/our-impact/planet/net-zero-transition-plan/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">net zero carbon</a> by 2025 and for our investment portfolios we have set an interim target of a 50% reduction in the carbon emission intensity of c£250bn by 2030, as we progress towards our portfolios being net zero carbon by 2050 or sooner.</p><p>We have been recognised as a leading employer for many years. We are accredited as a Living Wage Employer, Living Pension Employer and as a Carer Positive Exemplary Employer for offering the best support to colleagues who are carers. </p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">c1f23566-e031-491d-b153-126825779781</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/8f092ec8-3cd9-4e25-b90c-ea9bee21a4da/Podcast-Radio-Business-Riffat-Tufail-26-02-24.mp3" length="22628309" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:26</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>MORE THAN JUST A NAME:  Nearly A Third Of Adults Have Felt Judged By Their Name | Professor Pragya Agarwal</title><itunes:title>MORE THAN JUST A NAME:  Nearly A Third Of Adults Have Felt Judged By Their Name | Professor Pragya Agarwal</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Professor Pragya Agarwal, Behavioral Scientist &amp; Professor </strong>of<strong> Social Inequities</strong> and<strong> Injustice, Loughborough University </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>MORE THAN JUST A NAME: Why Nearly A Third Of Adults Have Felt Judged By Their Name</strong></p><p>You’ve likely heard of bias. It’s a phase often used to describe unfair or judgement for an external factor like skin colour, race, gender and religion.</p><p>But shocking new research reveals its not only these that people are making preconceived judgements on, there is also one type of prejudice that is rarely spoken about. New research conducted by Samsung UK has found that nearly a third of us have felt judged by our name, rising to more than half (53%) of people from minority ethnic backgrounds.</p><p>Some of the most frequent misconceptions made about the names of those from diverse ethnic backgrounds are related to where they’re from (39%), their cultural heritage (31%), and a false assumption that English isn’t their first language (27%).&nbsp; </p><p>The issue is leading to drastic steps being taken but some to achieve career goals or feel accepted in society. More than 1 in 10 (12%) of people from minority backgrounds who aren’t white admit to changing their name in a job application or interview in the hope they would progress further in the process. The study also found that 16% said having or using a ‘western-sounding’ name has benefited them; this is felt most acutely by those from Arab descent (21%), followed by the Black community (19%).</p><p>To address this, Professor of Social Inequities and Injustice, Pragya Agarwal is calling on people in the community and the workplace to take extra care when pronouncing and spelling someone’s name and be aware of the bias they may portraywithout realising. </p><p>With over a fifth (22%) of people believing promotion of correct name pronunciation and understanding of cultural significance will help to reduce name bias in the workplace. 19% would even like to see anonymous job applications where names are removed from CVs to help alleviate prejudice.</p><p> Professor Argawal talks about the shocking research, explain how things can improve and explain some of the real world examples facing people across the UK.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</strong></h4><p>&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>About Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Samsung inspires the world and shapes the future with transformative ideas and technologies. The company is redefining the worlds of TVs, smartphones,wearable devices, tablets, digital appliances, network systems, and memory, system LSI, foundry and LED solutions. For the latest news, please visit the Samsung Newsroom at <a href="http://news.samsung.com" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">http://news.samsung.com</a></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><br></p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION</strong></h4><p>The research for Samsung was carried out online by Onepoll&nbsp;throughout<strong>November 2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in 2,000 UK adults<strong> </strong>responding.</p><p>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Professor Pragya Agarwal, Behavioral Scientist &amp; Professor </strong>of<strong> Social Inequities</strong> and<strong> Injustice, Loughborough University </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>MORE THAN JUST A NAME: Why Nearly A Third Of Adults Have Felt Judged By Their Name</strong></p><p>You’ve likely heard of bias. It’s a phase often used to describe unfair or judgement for an external factor like skin colour, race, gender and religion.</p><p>But shocking new research reveals its not only these that people are making preconceived judgements on, there is also one type of prejudice that is rarely spoken about. New research conducted by Samsung UK has found that nearly a third of us have felt judged by our name, rising to more than half (53%) of people from minority ethnic backgrounds.</p><p>Some of the most frequent misconceptions made about the names of those from diverse ethnic backgrounds are related to where they’re from (39%), their cultural heritage (31%), and a false assumption that English isn’t their first language (27%).&nbsp; </p><p>The issue is leading to drastic steps being taken but some to achieve career goals or feel accepted in society. More than 1 in 10 (12%) of people from minority backgrounds who aren’t white admit to changing their name in a job application or interview in the hope they would progress further in the process. The study also found that 16% said having or using a ‘western-sounding’ name has benefited them; this is felt most acutely by those from Arab descent (21%), followed by the Black community (19%).</p><p>To address this, Professor of Social Inequities and Injustice, Pragya Agarwal is calling on people in the community and the workplace to take extra care when pronouncing and spelling someone’s name and be aware of the bias they may portraywithout realising. </p><p>With over a fifth (22%) of people believing promotion of correct name pronunciation and understanding of cultural significance will help to reduce name bias in the workplace. 19% would even like to see anonymous job applications where names are removed from CVs to help alleviate prejudice.</p><p> Professor Argawal talks about the shocking research, explain how things can improve and explain some of the real world examples facing people across the UK.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</strong></h4><p>&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>About Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Samsung inspires the world and shapes the future with transformative ideas and technologies. The company is redefining the worlds of TVs, smartphones,wearable devices, tablets, digital appliances, network systems, and memory, system LSI, foundry and LED solutions. For the latest news, please visit the Samsung Newsroom at <a href="http://news.samsung.com" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">http://news.samsung.com</a></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><br></p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION</strong></h4><p>The research for Samsung was carried out online by Onepoll&nbsp;throughout<strong>November 2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in 2,000 UK adults<strong> </strong>responding.</p><p>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">20effff5-9f96-4298-a090-dc3b98376299</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 08 Feb 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/0f37ad71-bc9c-4622-9315-163056d4d302/Podcast-Radio-Business-Professor-Pragya-Argawal-08-02-24.mp3" length="34440880" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:21</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>SHOULD WE PAY REMOTE WORKERS LESS? | Thorbjorn Fink</title><itunes:title>SHOULD WE PAY REMOTE WORKERS LESS? | Thorbjorn Fink</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Thorbjørn Fink COO</strong> at<strong> Pleo </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>SHOULD WE PAY REMOTE WORKERS LESS?</strong></p><p><strong>IMPROVING OVERSIGHT OF BUSINESS OUTGOINGS SHOULD BE NO 1 PRIORITY BEFORE CHANGES ARE MADE, SAY PLEO</strong></p><p>The majority of UK SMBs are optimistic at the start of 2024, with 49% saying the year will be easier than 2023. But it remains that 25% are looking to reduce outgoings as high costs continue to impact operations.</p><p>One key area they will look to do this is by rethinking their approach to remote working with 20% exploring whether they can reduce pay for remote workers.</p><p>However, with 27% lacking confidence in their financial ability to recruit in 2024, this should be done with caution. Before attempting this, a firm should have a strong financial visibility and assess all areas.</p><p>But, only 36% report feeling they have a good grip on their expenditure, and only 28% have strong visibility of their financial health and performance.</p><p>Pleo COO, Thorbjørn Fink believes that, for businesses to meet their revenue growth and saving goals of 2024, they need to ensure they have full visibility and insights into all outgoings.</p><p><em>“When there is real pressure on financial growth, companies can no longer afford to silo their outgoings into expenses and spend. Choosing to ignore low-cost items means CFOs are needlessly putting blinkers on and, in the process, only getting half of the spend management picture,” he says</em></p><p>This comes as the data reveals 20% treat business spend and expenses as two separate outgoings streams, with 23% “not too bothered” about tracking smaller expenses.</p><p>Pleo is the Europe’s leading spend management platform for SMBs, compiling and streamlining all outgoings to provide leaders with contemporaneous and exhaustive insight on operations.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Thorbjørn Fink COO</strong> at<strong> Pleo </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>SHOULD WE PAY REMOTE WORKERS LESS?</strong></p><p><strong>IMPROVING OVERSIGHT OF BUSINESS OUTGOINGS SHOULD BE NO 1 PRIORITY BEFORE CHANGES ARE MADE, SAY PLEO</strong></p><p>The majority of UK SMBs are optimistic at the start of 2024, with 49% saying the year will be easier than 2023. But it remains that 25% are looking to reduce outgoings as high costs continue to impact operations.</p><p>One key area they will look to do this is by rethinking their approach to remote working with 20% exploring whether they can reduce pay for remote workers.</p><p>However, with 27% lacking confidence in their financial ability to recruit in 2024, this should be done with caution. Before attempting this, a firm should have a strong financial visibility and assess all areas.</p><p>But, only 36% report feeling they have a good grip on their expenditure, and only 28% have strong visibility of their financial health and performance.</p><p>Pleo COO, Thorbjørn Fink believes that, for businesses to meet their revenue growth and saving goals of 2024, they need to ensure they have full visibility and insights into all outgoings.</p><p><em>“When there is real pressure on financial growth, companies can no longer afford to silo their outgoings into expenses and spend. Choosing to ignore low-cost items means CFOs are needlessly putting blinkers on and, in the process, only getting half of the spend management picture,” he says</em></p><p>This comes as the data reveals 20% treat business spend and expenses as two separate outgoings streams, with 23% “not too bothered” about tracking smaller expenses.</p><p>Pleo is the Europe’s leading spend management platform for SMBs, compiling and streamlining all outgoings to provide leaders with contemporaneous and exhaustive insight on operations.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">9aa8e80e-5b48-4de4-9a97-60d37862da00</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/58483e63-e0b1-4289-8618-0897da84d649/Podcast-Radio-Business-Thorbjorn-Fink-07-02-24.mp3" length="37085517" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:27</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>BURNOUT IN THE WORKFORCE A CAUSE FOR CONCERN | Claire Neal</title><itunes:title>BURNOUT IN THE WORKFORCE A CAUSE FOR CONCERN | Claire Neal</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Claire Neal, Head of Workplace Mental Health, </strong>at<strong> Mental Health UK </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>BURNOUT IN THE WORKFORCE A CAUSE FOR CONCERN - 1 IN 5 IN THE UK TOOK TIME OFF LAST YEAR DUE TO WORKPLACE PRESSURE</strong></p><p>One in five workers have been forced to take time off work because of poor mental health caused by pressure or stress in the workplace, according to Mental Health UK with the charity also finding that 35% have experienced high or extreme levels of stress in the past year, suggesting workplaces could be ill-equipped to prevent and combat burnout.</p><p>About 49% say their employer does not have plans in place to help colleagues spot the signs of chronic stress and prevent burnout, while 35% of employees would not be comfortable letting their line manager or senior leader know if they were experiencing high or extreme levels of pressure and stress at work, with high or an increased workload or volume of tasks (54%), working unpaid overtime beyond contracted hours (45%) and feeling isolated at work (42%) the main factors for contributing to burnout. Only 29% of working adults say their workplace has measures in place to spot the signs of chronic stress and prevent burnout in employees, however, 38% of workers have taken on additional paid work because of the cost-of living crisis contributing to high or extreme levels of pressure or stress.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Claire Neal, Head of Workplace Mental Health, </strong>at<strong> Mental Health UK </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>BURNOUT IN THE WORKFORCE A CAUSE FOR CONCERN - 1 IN 5 IN THE UK TOOK TIME OFF LAST YEAR DUE TO WORKPLACE PRESSURE</strong></p><p>One in five workers have been forced to take time off work because of poor mental health caused by pressure or stress in the workplace, according to Mental Health UK with the charity also finding that 35% have experienced high or extreme levels of stress in the past year, suggesting workplaces could be ill-equipped to prevent and combat burnout.</p><p>About 49% say their employer does not have plans in place to help colleagues spot the signs of chronic stress and prevent burnout, while 35% of employees would not be comfortable letting their line manager or senior leader know if they were experiencing high or extreme levels of pressure and stress at work, with high or an increased workload or volume of tasks (54%), working unpaid overtime beyond contracted hours (45%) and feeling isolated at work (42%) the main factors for contributing to burnout. Only 29% of working adults say their workplace has measures in place to spot the signs of chronic stress and prevent burnout in employees, however, 38% of workers have taken on additional paid work because of the cost-of living crisis contributing to high or extreme levels of pressure or stress.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">c6efc361-70b8-4a16-bedb-f5854e911c71</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/58062a32-ae68-45fd-87d3-7f65e8d63db2/Podcast-Radio-Business-Claire-Neal-22-01-24.mp3" length="24440162" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:11</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>GOVERNMENT AND OTHER SECTOR ORGANISATIONS URGED TO SUPPORT SMALL BUSINESSES IN IMPROVING APPRENTICESHIP SUCCESS RATES | Sarah Dhanda</title><itunes:title>GOVERNMENT AND OTHER SECTOR ORGANISATIONS URGED TO SUPPORT SMALL BUSINESSES IN IMPROVING APPRENTICESHIP SUCCESS RATES | Sarah Dhanda</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sarah Dhanda, Head of Policy and Partnerships</strong> at<strong> Enginuity </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>GOVERNMENT AND OTHER SECTOR ORGANISATIONS URGED TO SUPPORT SMALL BUSINESSES IN IMPROVING APPRENTICESHIP SUCCESS RATES</strong></p><p>With the number of people completing their apprenticeships successfully falling tolittle more than half (53%) within a 12-month period, this National Apprenticeship Week (5th-11th February), the UK’s leading engineering and manufacturing skills charity, is calling on the sector and the government to support small businesses to help improve completion rates.&nbsp;</p><p><a href="https://commonslibrary.parliament.uk/research-briefings/sn06113/#:~:text=In%20the%202021%2F22%20academic,in%20the%20previous%20academic%20year." rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Despite a rise in the number of people starting Apprenticeships</a>, up to 27,800 in 2021/22, the charity Enginuity highlights a 4% fall in completion rates of overall apprenticeships, warning the higher education sector is going to struggle to meet the government’s target rate of 67% achievement, if the situation isn’t tackled.&nbsp; Furthermore, of concern is that the Engineering and Manufacturing achievement rates in England for females, non-white ethnic minorities, and learners with disabilities are consistently lower than their corresponding groups.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>Enginuity will be conducting new research in partnership with The Engineer magazine to understand why SMEs struggle more than larger employers to attain good apprenticeship achievement rates, identify the key barriers and explore how businesses and apprentices can be better supported.</p><p>Sarah joined Enginuity (then SEMTA) in October 2018 as Head of Strategic Partnerships following a successful career in the Marine sector, where she worked for many years latterly as Chief Officer of Membership &amp; Services at British Marine, the trade Association for the marine sector. Sarah’s background is in skills and she initially joined British Marine as Director of Training Services to head up their apprenticeship &amp; qualifications development activity. Prior to joining British Marine, Sarah worked at City &amp; Guilds where she was the Sector Manager for IT and Business qualifications. Sarah is responsible for Enginuity’s work on Standards and Frameworks, as well as taking the lead on Enginuity Policy work across the 4 Nations and working with regional and local stakeholders. One of her key objectives is the sharing of knowledge and good practice across sectors to ensure connectivity on key skills and workforce development challenges. The Enginuity group is a not-for-profit organisation responsible for engineering skills for the future of the UK's most advanced sectors. Led by employers, its job is to transform the skills and productivity of the people who power our engineering and advanced manufacturing technologies sectors, enabling UK industry to compete on the global stage.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sarah Dhanda, Head of Policy and Partnerships</strong> at<strong> Enginuity </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>GOVERNMENT AND OTHER SECTOR ORGANISATIONS URGED TO SUPPORT SMALL BUSINESSES IN IMPROVING APPRENTICESHIP SUCCESS RATES</strong></p><p>With the number of people completing their apprenticeships successfully falling tolittle more than half (53%) within a 12-month period, this National Apprenticeship Week (5th-11th February), the UK’s leading engineering and manufacturing skills charity, is calling on the sector and the government to support small businesses to help improve completion rates.&nbsp;</p><p><a href="https://commonslibrary.parliament.uk/research-briefings/sn06113/#:~:text=In%20the%202021%2F22%20academic,in%20the%20previous%20academic%20year." rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Despite a rise in the number of people starting Apprenticeships</a>, up to 27,800 in 2021/22, the charity Enginuity highlights a 4% fall in completion rates of overall apprenticeships, warning the higher education sector is going to struggle to meet the government’s target rate of 67% achievement, if the situation isn’t tackled.&nbsp; Furthermore, of concern is that the Engineering and Manufacturing achievement rates in England for females, non-white ethnic minorities, and learners with disabilities are consistently lower than their corresponding groups.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>Enginuity will be conducting new research in partnership with The Engineer magazine to understand why SMEs struggle more than larger employers to attain good apprenticeship achievement rates, identify the key barriers and explore how businesses and apprentices can be better supported.</p><p>Sarah joined Enginuity (then SEMTA) in October 2018 as Head of Strategic Partnerships following a successful career in the Marine sector, where she worked for many years latterly as Chief Officer of Membership &amp; Services at British Marine, the trade Association for the marine sector. Sarah’s background is in skills and she initially joined British Marine as Director of Training Services to head up their apprenticeship &amp; qualifications development activity. Prior to joining British Marine, Sarah worked at City &amp; Guilds where she was the Sector Manager for IT and Business qualifications. Sarah is responsible for Enginuity’s work on Standards and Frameworks, as well as taking the lead on Enginuity Policy work across the 4 Nations and working with regional and local stakeholders. One of her key objectives is the sharing of knowledge and good practice across sectors to ensure connectivity on key skills and workforce development challenges. The Enginuity group is a not-for-profit organisation responsible for engineering skills for the future of the UK's most advanced sectors. Led by employers, its job is to transform the skills and productivity of the people who power our engineering and advanced manufacturing technologies sectors, enabling UK industry to compete on the global stage.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">920b45c3-6eb9-4f2b-9e69-816629ea9abc</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/7eab47f0-983f-4a46-ad5c-4e20d0108ec1/Podcast-Radio-Business-Sarah-Dhanda-05-02-24.mp3" length="24299101" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:07</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>CRACKING THE CAREER CODE IN 2024:  ACTOR SEAN WILSON + ANTHONY CLARKE</title><itunes:title>CRACKING THE CAREER CODE IN 2024:  ACTOR SEAN WILSON + ANTHONY CLARKE</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sean Wilson of Artisan Farm &amp; </strong> at<strong> Anthony Clarke of AAT</strong> speak to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>CRACKING THE CAREER CODE IN 2024: ACTOR SEAN WILSON ON THE FORMULA TO SWITCHING GEARS TO A NEW CAREER</strong></p><p>This year marks 15 years since actor Sean Wilson founded the Saddleworth Cheese Company (now known as Artisan Farm), after leaving Weatherfield, the fictional home of the soap opera Cornation Street,  to pursue his passion as an artisanal cheese maker.</p><p>His first lesson in this entrepreneurial endeavour – he had to be Gouda maths!</p><p>Luckily, he pursued his dream with help from a mentor, who helped him navigate the red tape associated when starting a business and venturing into an entirely new field.</p><p>But this support will not be available to all interested in pursuing a similar venture. And, as new research from the Association of Accounting Technicians (AAT) reveals:&nbsp;</p><ul><li>30% aim to change careers before the year is out.</li><li>16% wish to do so and start their own venture or become self-employed.</li><li>21% do not know what steps to take to make a career change.</li></ul><br/><p>Sean appears, alongside Anthony Clarke from the AAT, to share his advice for those considering a career change and promote the benefits of proficiency with numbers when doing so.</p><p>He will also be able to discuss how, with the UCAS deadline and National Apprenticeship Week fast approaching, there are many routes to achieving a successful career in accountancy – providing support to the 61% of school leavers who said they felt pressure to go to university after leaving school.</p><p>This comes as a recent analysis by the AAT has revealed that 71% of accountancy apprentices reported a salary increase since beginning their apprenticeships, enabling them to earn close to £60K in the time it would have taken them to accrue an average £50K debt had they decided to go to university!</p><h4>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:</h4><p><strong>About the Association of Accounting Technicians (AAT)</strong></p><p>AAT (Association of Accounting Technicians) is the UK’s leading qualification and professional body for technical accountants and bookkeepers and has around 130,000 members and students in over 100 countries. We have been helping people enter and develop their skills within the accounting sector for the past 40 years.</p><h4>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</h4><p>Research A for the AAT was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>12.01.2023 – 15.01.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in 2,000 nationally representative UK adults (aged 18+) responding.</p><p>Research B for the AAT was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>12.01.2023 – 15.01.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in 500 UK children aged 14 – 18 years old, who are still in school, responding.</p><p>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sean Wilson of Artisan Farm &amp; </strong> at<strong> Anthony Clarke of AAT</strong> speak to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>CRACKING THE CAREER CODE IN 2024: ACTOR SEAN WILSON ON THE FORMULA TO SWITCHING GEARS TO A NEW CAREER</strong></p><p>This year marks 15 years since actor Sean Wilson founded the Saddleworth Cheese Company (now known as Artisan Farm), after leaving Weatherfield, the fictional home of the soap opera Cornation Street,  to pursue his passion as an artisanal cheese maker.</p><p>His first lesson in this entrepreneurial endeavour – he had to be Gouda maths!</p><p>Luckily, he pursued his dream with help from a mentor, who helped him navigate the red tape associated when starting a business and venturing into an entirely new field.</p><p>But this support will not be available to all interested in pursuing a similar venture. And, as new research from the Association of Accounting Technicians (AAT) reveals:&nbsp;</p><ul><li>30% aim to change careers before the year is out.</li><li>16% wish to do so and start their own venture or become self-employed.</li><li>21% do not know what steps to take to make a career change.</li></ul><br/><p>Sean appears, alongside Anthony Clarke from the AAT, to share his advice for those considering a career change and promote the benefits of proficiency with numbers when doing so.</p><p>He will also be able to discuss how, with the UCAS deadline and National Apprenticeship Week fast approaching, there are many routes to achieving a successful career in accountancy – providing support to the 61% of school leavers who said they felt pressure to go to university after leaving school.</p><p>This comes as a recent analysis by the AAT has revealed that 71% of accountancy apprentices reported a salary increase since beginning their apprenticeships, enabling them to earn close to £60K in the time it would have taken them to accrue an average £50K debt had they decided to go to university!</p><h4>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:</h4><p><strong>About the Association of Accounting Technicians (AAT)</strong></p><p>AAT (Association of Accounting Technicians) is the UK’s leading qualification and professional body for technical accountants and bookkeepers and has around 130,000 members and students in over 100 countries. We have been helping people enter and develop their skills within the accounting sector for the past 40 years.</p><h4>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</h4><p>Research A for the AAT was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>12.01.2023 – 15.01.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in 2,000 nationally representative UK adults (aged 18+) responding.</p><p>Research B for the AAT was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>12.01.2023 – 15.01.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in 500 UK children aged 14 – 18 years old, who are still in school, responding.</p><p>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">b0d529fd-a286-4d54-aa3a-68451a7a4c69</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/ebdfbd3c-09d5-4f19-b0db-de2e788b686a/Podcast-Radio-Business-Sean-Wilson-Anthony-Clarke-30-01-24.mp3" length="34555819" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:24</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>RENOVATION, RENOVATION, RENOVATION: WHY LONDONERS ARE RENOVATING OVER RELOCATING | Grant Bates</title><itunes:title>RENOVATION, RENOVATION, RENOVATION: WHY LONDONERS ARE RENOVATING OVER RELOCATING | Grant Bates</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Grant Bates, London real estate expert&nbsp;</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>RENOVATION, RENOVATION, RENOVATION: WHY LONDONERS ARE RENOVATING OVER RELOCATING</strong></p><p>Last month, ONS data revealed London saw the largest fall in average house prices in October, down 3.6%1. Updated figures, out today (Wednesday 17th January), will reveal whether this trend continued for another month.</p><p>Therefore, it may come as no surprise that homeowners are choosing to renovate over relocate, with 78% saying they would rather invest and improve their home than venture into the real estate market and risk losing value.</p><p>That’s according to new research from London renovation experts, Beams, which has also found 77% say at least one room in their home needs work this year.</p><p>This supports the news that London’s pandemic-driven exodus is in reverse, with recent data showing the figure of people leaving the capital has reached its lowest level in nine years2.</p><p>However, almost two thirds (61%) are unsure which renovations are worth the investment, despite 35% saying added value is the main reason for them wanting to do so.</p><p>With 47% looking to do-up their bathroom, and 44% their kitchen, the capital’s leading real estate expert, Grant Bates will be available to give advice to boost your valuation.</p><p>Grant, who almost exclusively deals in the Prime and Super Prime markets across London, has a keen eye for high-end finishes in design-led homes.</p><p><strong>Grant Bates, London real estate expert&nbsp; </strong></p><p>With nearly 20 years’ experience, Grant Bates has spent more than half of his highly successful career in property. </p><p>He primarily focusses on the Prime and Super Prime markets across London, where he has made a name for himself thanks tohis keen eye for design-led homes with high-end finishes. </p><p>This has also garnered him an impressive and loyal social media following, that is regarded to be the highest of a corporate agent, thanks to his influential house tour videos.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Grant Bates, London real estate expert&nbsp;</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>RENOVATION, RENOVATION, RENOVATION: WHY LONDONERS ARE RENOVATING OVER RELOCATING</strong></p><p>Last month, ONS data revealed London saw the largest fall in average house prices in October, down 3.6%1. Updated figures, out today (Wednesday 17th January), will reveal whether this trend continued for another month.</p><p>Therefore, it may come as no surprise that homeowners are choosing to renovate over relocate, with 78% saying they would rather invest and improve their home than venture into the real estate market and risk losing value.</p><p>That’s according to new research from London renovation experts, Beams, which has also found 77% say at least one room in their home needs work this year.</p><p>This supports the news that London’s pandemic-driven exodus is in reverse, with recent data showing the figure of people leaving the capital has reached its lowest level in nine years2.</p><p>However, almost two thirds (61%) are unsure which renovations are worth the investment, despite 35% saying added value is the main reason for them wanting to do so.</p><p>With 47% looking to do-up their bathroom, and 44% their kitchen, the capital’s leading real estate expert, Grant Bates will be available to give advice to boost your valuation.</p><p>Grant, who almost exclusively deals in the Prime and Super Prime markets across London, has a keen eye for high-end finishes in design-led homes.</p><p><strong>Grant Bates, London real estate expert&nbsp; </strong></p><p>With nearly 20 years’ experience, Grant Bates has spent more than half of his highly successful career in property. </p><p>He primarily focusses on the Prime and Super Prime markets across London, where he has made a name for himself thanks tohis keen eye for design-led homes with high-end finishes. </p><p>This has also garnered him an impressive and loyal social media following, that is regarded to be the highest of a corporate agent, thanks to his influential house tour videos.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">cfa70a73-99bd-4d18-827f-6cc12764efb8</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/fd906a48-3f1f-4d5b-8d27-b542c1ee628e/Podcast-Radio-Business-Grant-Bates-19-01-24.mp3" length="24347166" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:09</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>A BMW, casket and pets – the bizarre items left behind by tenants | Sarah Casey</title><itunes:title>A BMW, casket and pets – the bizarre items left behind by tenants | Sarah Casey</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sarah Casey, Landlord Product Manager </strong>at <strong>Direct Line Business Insurance</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss: <strong>A BMW, casket and pets – the bizarre items left behind by tenants</strong></p><p>New research from Direct Line business insurance, reveals that almost three quarters (72%) of landlords have had to deal with belongings left by tenants after their tenancy has ended.</p><p>For those who have been left clearing up after their renters, rubbish was the main headache (63%), followed by general junk (56%), clothes (42%) and kitchenware (38%).</p><p>Landlords were also asked to share the most unusual items that had been left behind by tenants.</p><p>Some of the most bizarre things included: Toys (of the sort not designed for children), the ashes of a relative, bottles of wee, a casket, under wear, a BMW  and pets, sadly, only some of which were alive.</p><p>Landlords say they have been forced into action to clear up items left behind by their tenants. Two thirds (66%) say they’ve needed to dispose of an old tenant’s belongings, 25% have had to store belongings and almost a third (32%) have had to chase down ex-tenants to collect their items.</p><p>Tidying up after tenants have moved out is not cheap; on average, it cost landlords £209 to clear up their tenants’ mess and 12% of respondents reported that they’d spent over £500 on resolving the issue.</p><p>But that’s not all, more than a third (34%) of landlords say they’ve had to delay getting in new tenants as a result of ex-tenants leaving property behind; and almost a quarter (23%) have had to seek legal advice or take legal action to deal with the problem.</p><p>There are strict rules relating to what a landlord can and can’t do with property that is left behind by tenants.Yet 32% of landlords surveyed didn’t have a clause in their tenancy agreement relating to the disposal of tenant belongings that have been left behind, and only half (52%) were clear on the correct procedure to follow should this happen.</p><p><strong>Regional findings</strong></p><p>The data also revealed wide regional variations: tenants in the North-East are the worst at leaving behind belongings, with 86% of landlords reporting issues, closely followed by London (83%).</p><p>Conversely, the East of England are the best behaved, with just over half (55 per cent) of landlords reporting issues.</p><p>For more information about Direct Line's landlord insurance, please visit: <a href="https://www.directlineforbusiness.co.uk/landlord-insurance" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.directlineforbusiness.co.uk/landlord-insurance</a></p><p><strong>About the Research:</strong></p><p>Survey conducted for Direct Line for Business by Opinium of 500 UK Landlords between 31st October 2023 – 7th November 2023</p><p><strong>About Direct Line business insurance:</strong></p><p>Launched in 2007 Direct Line business insurance now has over half a million customer policies, providing a flexible range of insurance products for the landlord, van and small business sectors.</p><p>Direct Line business insurance policies are underwritten by U K Insurance Limited, Registeredoffice: The Wharf, Neville Street, Leeds LS1 4AZ. Registered in England and Wales No 1179980.</p><p>UK Insurance Limited is authorised by the Prudential Regulation Authority and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority and the Prudential Regulation Authority.</p><p>Direct Line business insurance and UK Insurance limited are both part of Direct Line Insurance Group plc.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sarah Casey, Landlord Product Manager </strong>at <strong>Direct Line Business Insurance</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss: <strong>A BMW, casket and pets – the bizarre items left behind by tenants</strong></p><p>New research from Direct Line business insurance, reveals that almost three quarters (72%) of landlords have had to deal with belongings left by tenants after their tenancy has ended.</p><p>For those who have been left clearing up after their renters, rubbish was the main headache (63%), followed by general junk (56%), clothes (42%) and kitchenware (38%).</p><p>Landlords were also asked to share the most unusual items that had been left behind by tenants.</p><p>Some of the most bizarre things included: Toys (of the sort not designed for children), the ashes of a relative, bottles of wee, a casket, under wear, a BMW  and pets, sadly, only some of which were alive.</p><p>Landlords say they have been forced into action to clear up items left behind by their tenants. Two thirds (66%) say they’ve needed to dispose of an old tenant’s belongings, 25% have had to store belongings and almost a third (32%) have had to chase down ex-tenants to collect their items.</p><p>Tidying up after tenants have moved out is not cheap; on average, it cost landlords £209 to clear up their tenants’ mess and 12% of respondents reported that they’d spent over £500 on resolving the issue.</p><p>But that’s not all, more than a third (34%) of landlords say they’ve had to delay getting in new tenants as a result of ex-tenants leaving property behind; and almost a quarter (23%) have had to seek legal advice or take legal action to deal with the problem.</p><p>There are strict rules relating to what a landlord can and can’t do with property that is left behind by tenants.Yet 32% of landlords surveyed didn’t have a clause in their tenancy agreement relating to the disposal of tenant belongings that have been left behind, and only half (52%) were clear on the correct procedure to follow should this happen.</p><p><strong>Regional findings</strong></p><p>The data also revealed wide regional variations: tenants in the North-East are the worst at leaving behind belongings, with 86% of landlords reporting issues, closely followed by London (83%).</p><p>Conversely, the East of England are the best behaved, with just over half (55 per cent) of landlords reporting issues.</p><p>For more information about Direct Line's landlord insurance, please visit: <a href="https://www.directlineforbusiness.co.uk/landlord-insurance" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.directlineforbusiness.co.uk/landlord-insurance</a></p><p><strong>About the Research:</strong></p><p>Survey conducted for Direct Line for Business by Opinium of 500 UK Landlords between 31st October 2023 – 7th November 2023</p><p><strong>About Direct Line business insurance:</strong></p><p>Launched in 2007 Direct Line business insurance now has over half a million customer policies, providing a flexible range of insurance products for the landlord, van and small business sectors.</p><p>Direct Line business insurance policies are underwritten by U K Insurance Limited, Registeredoffice: The Wharf, Neville Street, Leeds LS1 4AZ. Registered in England and Wales No 1179980.</p><p>UK Insurance Limited is authorised by the Prudential Regulation Authority and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority and the Prudential Regulation Authority.</p><p>Direct Line business insurance and UK Insurance limited are both part of Direct Line Insurance Group plc.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">4b1b1035-bccd-4d8d-89e5-bcdaba24ba04</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/8ec633e7-4046-41a4-bf2c-1eac745f12d8/Podcast-Radio-Business-Sarah-Casey-31-01-24.mp3" length="22972080" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:34</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Two Thirds of SME-Sized Businesses Considering Technical Education Schemes| Nicola Drury</title><itunes:title>Two Thirds of SME-Sized Businesses Considering Technical Education Schemes| Nicola Drury</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Nicola Drury UK Apprenticeship Manager</strong> at<strong> Amazon</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>Two thirds of small and medium sized businesses considering technical education schemes, such as apprenticeships and T-levels, this year</strong></p><ul><li>The Skills Horizon 2024 Barometer shows two-thirds of SMEs in England are looking at low-cost recruitment tactics to</li><li>invest in talent in light of financial challenges</li><li>Appetite for technical education schemes has increased, as confidence grows through success stories – nearly 74% report seeing other businesses benefit</li><li>Despite concerns the economic landscape, SMEs expect to grow 26.43% in the next year while recession fears are down</li><li>The opportunity to shape young talent (55%) and the ability to upskill existing team members (52%) are considered the top benefits of technical routes by SMEs</li></ul><br/><p>More small and medium sized businesses (SMEs) are turning to technical education schemes, according to a new report.</p><p>As many as two thirds of SMEs are considering schemes such as apprenticeships (53%) and offering work placements, such as T Levels (60%) this year.</p><p>Now in its second year, the Skills Horizon 2024 Barometer, launched in partnership with the British Chambers of Commerce, found appetite for technical education is increasing as confidence grows through success stories – with nearly three-quarters reporting seeing other businesses benefit.</p><p>SMEs consider the top benefits of these technical education options to be the opportunity to shape young talent (55%), the ability to upskill existing team members (52%), and the chance to address skills gaps in the business (50%).</p><p>The latest findings from the Skills Horizon Barometer coincide with National Apprenticeship Week - a moment dedicated to celebrating apprenticeships, and new routes that can lead to them such as T Levels, as well as their positive impact on communities, businesses, and the wider economy.</p><p>The current top skills SME employers are looking for in job candidates are reflective of this change in approach:</p><p>‘A particular level of qualification’ might have once been a non-negotiable on most job descriptions, but it is now at the bottom of the agenda (14%) for employers.</p><p>Instead, ‘a good work ethic’ (38% of employers agree), being ’a team player’ (37%) and ‘a quick learner’ (31%) are the top traits employers will look for in 2024.</p><p>Diversity, equity and inclusion also remain crucial for employers, with two in five (40%)hoping new talent recruited in 2024 will help diversify the workforce ahead of 2025 –up from 30% in 2023.</p><p><strong>CONCERNS AND CONFIDENCE</strong></p><p>The report also identified that over half of SMEs agree that the top concern for the year ahead is increased running costs (51%), with many also concerned about staff wellbeing linked to the cost of living (41%).</p><p>Despite this, there is optimism for the year ahead as a high majority (86%) of businesses plan to grow revenue in 2024, a 3% increase from last year.</p><p>On average, SMEs expect to grow 26.43% in the next year and recession fears are down on last year’s report (16% in 2024 vs 26% in 2023).</p><p>These ambitious targets may well be reflective of the advantage SMEs feel they have with nearly three quarters (73%) believing they can be more agile than larger businesses when it comes to recruitment and upskilling their workforce.</p><p>This ambition is shared by the Skills for Life campaign which helps SMEs understand all the technical education training and employment schemes available to them, including the aforementioned Apprenticeships and T Levels as well as Skills Bootcamps, HTQs and Multiply numeracy courses.</p><p><strong>ENDS</strong></p><p><strong>About the Research</strong></p><p>Research carried out with 3Gem Research &amp; Insights between 11/12/2023 -...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Nicola Drury UK Apprenticeship Manager</strong> at<strong> Amazon</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>Two thirds of small and medium sized businesses considering technical education schemes, such as apprenticeships and T-levels, this year</strong></p><ul><li>The Skills Horizon 2024 Barometer shows two-thirds of SMEs in England are looking at low-cost recruitment tactics to</li><li>invest in talent in light of financial challenges</li><li>Appetite for technical education schemes has increased, as confidence grows through success stories – nearly 74% report seeing other businesses benefit</li><li>Despite concerns the economic landscape, SMEs expect to grow 26.43% in the next year while recession fears are down</li><li>The opportunity to shape young talent (55%) and the ability to upskill existing team members (52%) are considered the top benefits of technical routes by SMEs</li></ul><br/><p>More small and medium sized businesses (SMEs) are turning to technical education schemes, according to a new report.</p><p>As many as two thirds of SMEs are considering schemes such as apprenticeships (53%) and offering work placements, such as T Levels (60%) this year.</p><p>Now in its second year, the Skills Horizon 2024 Barometer, launched in partnership with the British Chambers of Commerce, found appetite for technical education is increasing as confidence grows through success stories – with nearly three-quarters reporting seeing other businesses benefit.</p><p>SMEs consider the top benefits of these technical education options to be the opportunity to shape young talent (55%), the ability to upskill existing team members (52%), and the chance to address skills gaps in the business (50%).</p><p>The latest findings from the Skills Horizon Barometer coincide with National Apprenticeship Week - a moment dedicated to celebrating apprenticeships, and new routes that can lead to them such as T Levels, as well as their positive impact on communities, businesses, and the wider economy.</p><p>The current top skills SME employers are looking for in job candidates are reflective of this change in approach:</p><p>‘A particular level of qualification’ might have once been a non-negotiable on most job descriptions, but it is now at the bottom of the agenda (14%) for employers.</p><p>Instead, ‘a good work ethic’ (38% of employers agree), being ’a team player’ (37%) and ‘a quick learner’ (31%) are the top traits employers will look for in 2024.</p><p>Diversity, equity and inclusion also remain crucial for employers, with two in five (40%)hoping new talent recruited in 2024 will help diversify the workforce ahead of 2025 –up from 30% in 2023.</p><p><strong>CONCERNS AND CONFIDENCE</strong></p><p>The report also identified that over half of SMEs agree that the top concern for the year ahead is increased running costs (51%), with many also concerned about staff wellbeing linked to the cost of living (41%).</p><p>Despite this, there is optimism for the year ahead as a high majority (86%) of businesses plan to grow revenue in 2024, a 3% increase from last year.</p><p>On average, SMEs expect to grow 26.43% in the next year and recession fears are down on last year’s report (16% in 2024 vs 26% in 2023).</p><p>These ambitious targets may well be reflective of the advantage SMEs feel they have with nearly three quarters (73%) believing they can be more agile than larger businesses when it comes to recruitment and upskilling their workforce.</p><p>This ambition is shared by the Skills for Life campaign which helps SMEs understand all the technical education training and employment schemes available to them, including the aforementioned Apprenticeships and T Levels as well as Skills Bootcamps, HTQs and Multiply numeracy courses.</p><p><strong>ENDS</strong></p><p><strong>About the Research</strong></p><p>Research carried out with 3Gem Research &amp; Insights between 11/12/2023 - 22/12/2023, commissioned by DfE and Kindred, with 1,500 SME senior decision makers in England</p><p><strong>Skills for Life</strong></p><p>The Skills for Life campaign aims to help SMEs understand all the training and employment schemes available to them, including Apprenticeships, T Levels, Skills Bootcamps, HTQs and Multiply numeracy courses. Employers who are considering hiring employees, offering work experience or upskilling existing staff are encouraged to visit the <a href="https://find-employer-schemes.education.gov.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Find Training and Employment Schemes for your Business</a> webpage which allows SMEs to compare schemes and find out more. These include: </p><ul><li>Apprenticeships - Paid </li><li>employment for over 16s, combining work and study in a job allowing you </li><li>to develop your workforce and business</li><li>T Levels: industry </li><li>placements - Offering a T Level placement gives you early access to the </li><li>brightest young people entering the market and the opportunity to </li><li>develop your workforce of the future</li><li>Sector-based Work Academy</li><li> Programme (SWAP) – Up to six week placement for benefit claimants for </li><li>those aged 18 and over designed to help you recruit a workforce with the</li><li> right skills to sustain</li><li> and grow your business</li><li>Skills Bootcamps – </li><li>Flexible training courses for aged 19 and over to fast-track specialist </li><li>skill development, for existing or new talent for your business</li><li>Multiply - Free numeracy initiatives, offers and courses from pre-entry to level 2 for those aged 19 and over in your workforce</li><li>Higher Technical </li><li>Qualifications (HTQs) - Level 4 or 5 qualifications, for those 18 and </li><li>over, with no work placement but flexible for employees to study while </li><li>working</li><li>Supported Internships for learners with an education, health and care plan – An unpaid 6 to 12-month work placement for 16 to 24-year-olds with additional needs, including Special Educational</li><li> Needs and Disabilities (SEND), supported by a qualified job coach</li><li>Care-Leaver covenant – </li><li>Help 16 to 25-year-olds who were in local authority care become </li><li>independent through practical job-related support, in whatever way suits your business</li><li>Employing prisoners and </li><li>prison leavers – Employ prisoners and prison leavers aged 18 and over to help your business fill skills gaps and develop a loyal and talented </li><li>workforce</li><li>Free courses and additional training for your employees – Additional ways to train up existing employees through free qualifications, career advice and financial support</li></ul><br/>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">0aac4400-f563-4e03-ae44-1e1ff572c9a9</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/cf65549b-4c41-4e90-a8a1-168782627228/Podcast-Radio-Business-Nicola-Drury-06-02-24.mp3" length="28551835" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>11:54</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>MOTORISTS FEEL THE PINCH &amp; QUESTION CAR OWNERSHIP | Paul Baxter</title><itunes:title>MOTORISTS FEEL THE PINCH &amp; QUESTION CAR OWNERSHIP | Paul Baxter</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Paul Baxter, CEO at The Green Insurer </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>MOTORISTS FEEL THE PINCH &amp; QUESTION CAR OWNERSHIP</strong></p><p>The UK’s first truly green car insurance broker is opening for business and is focused on helping drivers reduce carbon emissions and drive in a more environmentally friendly way while offsetting all emissions from driving.</p><p>The Green Insurer has launched today with car insurance policies and customers can buy direct fromthe website at www.thegreeninsurer.com and through leading price comparison websites.</p><p>The company expects strong demand – new research [1] shows motorists are becoming increasingly aware of the impact of driving on the environment and are cutting the miles they drive each year in response.</p><p>More than half (53%) of drivers questioned are more aware of the impact on the environment thanthey were a year ago, while 69% are more aware of the impact than they were three years ago.</p><p>Around 28% say they plan to drive fewer miles in the next 12 months. More than six out of 10 (61%)say they’re cutting back on the miles they drive to help the environment while 76% say they are doing so because of the cost of living.</p><p>The Green Insurer will cut insurance costs for drivers at a time of rapidly rising premiums by negotiating special deals with insurers. The company will also offer rewards for environmentallyfriendly driving worth on average £20 a year through its Leaves scheme as well as discounts of up to 6% on weekly supermarket shopping through a range of partnerships. It expects to be mostcompetitive for drivers doing low annual mileage.</p><p>A customer’s Green Driving Score in the app will be used to calculate their renewal premium and to offer discounts when they renew. Environmentally conscious driving also means lower fuel costs andbeing safer in their car.</p><p>Policies are linked to a mobile app, which monitors how customers drive. The data is logged in a free App, which measures how the customer drives and how far they drive to enable The Green Insurer to calculate rewards and how much carbon to offset.</p><p>New analysis [2] from Consumer Intelligence for The Green Insurer reveals that the average car insurance premium has increased by on average 66.5% in the year to October 31st. They are now 79.1% higher than five years ago.</p><p>The Green Insurer’s Reward partners include major supermarkets, leading retailers such as Boots, Currys PC World, B&amp;Q, John Lewis, Marks &amp; Spencer and WH Smith as well as restaurant chains including Pizza Express and transport groups Eurostar and National Express. Other partners include environmentally conscious companies that share its green ethos.</p><p>Every mile driven by customers will be offset using a range of carbon offset projects which are assessed for their carbon and environmental effectiveness as well as the social impact on the people and communities where they are based.</p><p>Customers can see how much carbon has been removed to offset their driving emissions on TheGreen Insurer app. They can also see how much has been offset for all customers.</p><p><strong><u>About The Green Insurer</u></strong></p><p>The Green Insurer offers car insurance policies via its website www.thegreeninsurer.com and throughleading price comparison websites. The UK’s first truly green car insurance broker is focused on</p><p>helping drivers reduce carbon emissions and drive in a more environmentally friendly way whileoffsetting all emissions from driving.</p><p>A customer’s Green Driving Score in the app will be used to calculate their renewal premium and to offer discounts when they renew. Environmentally conscious driving also means lower fuel costs and being safer in their car.</p><p>Policies are linked to a mobile app, which monitors how customers drive. The data is logged in a free App, which measures how the customer drives and how...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Paul Baxter, CEO at The Green Insurer </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>MOTORISTS FEEL THE PINCH &amp; QUESTION CAR OWNERSHIP</strong></p><p>The UK’s first truly green car insurance broker is opening for business and is focused on helping drivers reduce carbon emissions and drive in a more environmentally friendly way while offsetting all emissions from driving.</p><p>The Green Insurer has launched today with car insurance policies and customers can buy direct fromthe website at www.thegreeninsurer.com and through leading price comparison websites.</p><p>The company expects strong demand – new research [1] shows motorists are becoming increasingly aware of the impact of driving on the environment and are cutting the miles they drive each year in response.</p><p>More than half (53%) of drivers questioned are more aware of the impact on the environment thanthey were a year ago, while 69% are more aware of the impact than they were three years ago.</p><p>Around 28% say they plan to drive fewer miles in the next 12 months. More than six out of 10 (61%)say they’re cutting back on the miles they drive to help the environment while 76% say they are doing so because of the cost of living.</p><p>The Green Insurer will cut insurance costs for drivers at a time of rapidly rising premiums by negotiating special deals with insurers. The company will also offer rewards for environmentallyfriendly driving worth on average £20 a year through its Leaves scheme as well as discounts of up to 6% on weekly supermarket shopping through a range of partnerships. It expects to be mostcompetitive for drivers doing low annual mileage.</p><p>A customer’s Green Driving Score in the app will be used to calculate their renewal premium and to offer discounts when they renew. Environmentally conscious driving also means lower fuel costs andbeing safer in their car.</p><p>Policies are linked to a mobile app, which monitors how customers drive. The data is logged in a free App, which measures how the customer drives and how far they drive to enable The Green Insurer to calculate rewards and how much carbon to offset.</p><p>New analysis [2] from Consumer Intelligence for The Green Insurer reveals that the average car insurance premium has increased by on average 66.5% in the year to October 31st. They are now 79.1% higher than five years ago.</p><p>The Green Insurer’s Reward partners include major supermarkets, leading retailers such as Boots, Currys PC World, B&amp;Q, John Lewis, Marks &amp; Spencer and WH Smith as well as restaurant chains including Pizza Express and transport groups Eurostar and National Express. Other partners include environmentally conscious companies that share its green ethos.</p><p>Every mile driven by customers will be offset using a range of carbon offset projects which are assessed for their carbon and environmental effectiveness as well as the social impact on the people and communities where they are based.</p><p>Customers can see how much carbon has been removed to offset their driving emissions on TheGreen Insurer app. They can also see how much has been offset for all customers.</p><p><strong><u>About The Green Insurer</u></strong></p><p>The Green Insurer offers car insurance policies via its website www.thegreeninsurer.com and throughleading price comparison websites. The UK’s first truly green car insurance broker is focused on</p><p>helping drivers reduce carbon emissions and drive in a more environmentally friendly way whileoffsetting all emissions from driving.</p><p>A customer’s Green Driving Score in the app will be used to calculate their renewal premium and to offer discounts when they renew. Environmentally conscious driving also means lower fuel costs and being safer in their car.</p><p>Policies are linked to a mobile app, which monitors how customers drive. The data is logged in a free App, which measures how the customer drives and how far they drive to enable The Green Insurer to calculate rewards and how much carbon to offset.</p><p>The Green Insurer is authorised and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority, under the registration number 998384.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">21c1b7af-0685-49cd-8abe-dbc33dec024a</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 08 Dec 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/91c7c28c-2ac2-4c25-b8a8-1c748990e1e8/Podcast-Radio-Business-Paul-Baxter-08-12-23.mp3" length="39737468" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:33</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>FLEXIBILITY AND EMBRACING TECH IS HOW SMEs WILL WIN IN 2024 | Chris Mills</title><itunes:title>FLEXIBILITY AND EMBRACING TECH IS HOW SMEs WILL WIN IN 2024 | Chris Mills</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chris Mills, SME Productivity Expert at Slack </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>FLEXIBILITY AND EMBRACING TECH IS HOW SMEs WILL WIN IN 2024</strong></p><p>The Chancellor Jeremy Hunt laid out plans to unlock growth and boost productivity in last week’s Autumn Statement and new research has shown this is high on the priorities for UK small businesses with 1 in 3 (34%) recognising flexibility to embrace new ways of working as their biggest business opportunity in 2024.SMEs are keen to also implement new technologies (32%) after both employees and employers struggled withloneliness and ineffective remote working set-up in this year.</p><p>Despite the challenges of the cost-of-living crisis and inflation, many SMEs go into the New Year confident with 28% saying their financial stability and cashflow had improved in 2023, while 24% said employee engagement and well-being was the most improved area.</p><p>The findings from productivity platform Slack also show that&nbsp; a quarter (24%) of SMEs are prepared to shift the way they work in order to be successful in 2024, withover a quarter (26%) of small business owners calling communication and collaboration within teams vital.</p><p>In fact, many are now calling on staff to experiment with new tech to save times and costs (30%) and embrace transparent and collaborative communication (29%) When it comes to communication, internal communications were identified as the most important (76%) employee skill for SMEs going into next year, followed by teamwork (74%) and external communication (73%).</p><p>Another challenge to many UK small businesses is the increased energy and operational costs (27%), followed by recruitment and talent retention (26%) and supply chain disruptions (25%).</p><p>Now, in the run up to Small Business Saturday, we are being encouraged to support local businesses to help them in their New Year goals with the festive season traditionally being a “make or break season” for many businesses and a time where SMEs start to think about the next financial year.</p><p>With a massive 80% of SME owners believing small businesses are crucial to the UK economy. Slack's productivity expert Chris Mills is on hand to offer small business owners advice on how to help increase team connection and boost productivity.Mills can also discuss the research and explain why communication is so important in overcoming many of the UK Small Businesses’ challenges.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</strong></h4><p><a href="https://slack.com/intl/en-gb/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://slack.com/intl/en-gb/</a></p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>The research for <strong>Slack </strong>was carried out online by  Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout<strong> 15.11.2023 - 17.11.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in <strong>502 SME owners (18+)</strong>responding.<strong> </strong>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. </p><p>Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chris Mills, SME Productivity Expert at Slack </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>FLEXIBILITY AND EMBRACING TECH IS HOW SMEs WILL WIN IN 2024</strong></p><p>The Chancellor Jeremy Hunt laid out plans to unlock growth and boost productivity in last week’s Autumn Statement and new research has shown this is high on the priorities for UK small businesses with 1 in 3 (34%) recognising flexibility to embrace new ways of working as their biggest business opportunity in 2024.SMEs are keen to also implement new technologies (32%) after both employees and employers struggled withloneliness and ineffective remote working set-up in this year.</p><p>Despite the challenges of the cost-of-living crisis and inflation, many SMEs go into the New Year confident with 28% saying their financial stability and cashflow had improved in 2023, while 24% said employee engagement and well-being was the most improved area.</p><p>The findings from productivity platform Slack also show that&nbsp; a quarter (24%) of SMEs are prepared to shift the way they work in order to be successful in 2024, withover a quarter (26%) of small business owners calling communication and collaboration within teams vital.</p><p>In fact, many are now calling on staff to experiment with new tech to save times and costs (30%) and embrace transparent and collaborative communication (29%) When it comes to communication, internal communications were identified as the most important (76%) employee skill for SMEs going into next year, followed by teamwork (74%) and external communication (73%).</p><p>Another challenge to many UK small businesses is the increased energy and operational costs (27%), followed by recruitment and talent retention (26%) and supply chain disruptions (25%).</p><p>Now, in the run up to Small Business Saturday, we are being encouraged to support local businesses to help them in their New Year goals with the festive season traditionally being a “make or break season” for many businesses and a time where SMEs start to think about the next financial year.</p><p>With a massive 80% of SME owners believing small businesses are crucial to the UK economy. Slack's productivity expert Chris Mills is on hand to offer small business owners advice on how to help increase team connection and boost productivity.Mills can also discuss the research and explain why communication is so important in overcoming many of the UK Small Businesses’ challenges.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</strong></h4><p><a href="https://slack.com/intl/en-gb/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://slack.com/intl/en-gb/</a></p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>The research for <strong>Slack </strong>was carried out online by  Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout<strong> 15.11.2023 - 17.11.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in <strong>502 SME owners (18+)</strong>responding.<strong> </strong>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. </p><p>Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">c2db2f6e-20b8-4b27-aafe-249cc48c4376</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 29 Nov 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/546b27a0-b504-4485-a707-d0148a7920ce/The-Cashflow-Show-Xtra-Podcast-Radio-Business-Chris-Mills-29-11.mp3" length="25159052" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:29</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>CONSUMERS ARE WISING UP TO BLACK FRIDAY “DEALS” | Luke Broad</title><itunes:title>CONSUMERS ARE WISING UP TO BLACK FRIDAY “DEALS” | Luke Broad</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Luke Broad, CEO of Dacia UK </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>CONSUMERS ARE WISING UP TO BLACK FRIDAY “DEALS”</strong></p><p>This Black Friday may be the biggest yet, as recent data [1] suggests many consumers have delayed their Christmas gift shopping and other big-ticket purchases to make use of the deals and discounts offered.</p><p>Despite this, Dacia, the best value for money car brand in the UK, is taking a bold step by officially shutting down online sales on the day, in a bid to prove that you can get value all year round. </p><p>Black Friday will no doubt be vital to bolster the bottom line for many businesses – both large and small – and particularly the retail sector, which has seen costs rise but footfall fall over the last few months. </p><p>However, not all industries need to take part, with consumers warned that the day may not always offer the best deals, and can in fact encourage unnecessary spending and overconsumption.</p><p>New research suggests consumers are becoming wise to this as 21% are sceptical about the deals on offer, with 70% seeing Black Friday as nothing more than a marketing gimmick, and 1 in 10 lacking trust in brands that take part (11%). &nbsp;</p><p>Meanwhile,a third (33%) say they would prefer good deals all year round, while 1 1% want to avoid scams, and 8% would rather save the money for a rainy day.</p><p>Dacia is shutting down its UK online sales on Black Friday to reinforce its commitment to offering its range at the best value all year round. The brand’s range of cars provide everything you need, and nothing you don’t, reinforcing its belief that consumers should be able to buy the essentials at the best value for money on the market.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>Dacia’s online sales will be closed for the whole of Black Friday (00:00 – 23:59). The car configurator (which helps customers build their car) will also be closed for the duration of Black Friday.</p><p><strong>About Dacia</strong></p><p>Born in 1968, then relaunched by Renault Group from 2004 across Europe and Mediterranean countries, Dacia has always offered the best value for money cars by constantly redefining the essentials.&nbsp;As a game-changer, Dacia proposes simple, multi-purpose, reliable cars in tune with customers’ lifestyles.</p><p>Dacia models have become a reference on the market, including<em>Sandero</em>, the best-selling retail car in Europe each year since 2017; <em>Duster</em>, the best-selling SUV to European private customers since 2018; and<em>Jogger</em>, the C-segment versatile family car.&nbsp;</p><p>Present in 44 countries, Dacia has sold more than 8 million vehicles since 2004.&nbsp;Dacia launched in the UK in January 2013 and enjoyed the most successful start ever for a new car brand in the UK. More than 250,000 Dacia vehicles have been sold in the UK to date.</p><h4><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</strong></h4><ol><li>The BRC-KPMG Retail Sales Monitor (RSM), October 2023 (published 07/11, accessible<a href="https://brc.org.uk/insight/content/retail-sales/retail-sales-monitor/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">here</a>)</li></ol><br/><p>The research for Dacia UK was carried out online by Opinion Matters throughout 10.11.23-13.11.2023 amongst a panel resulting in 2,003 UK adults aged 16+ responding.</p><p>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registeredwith the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Luke Broad, CEO of Dacia UK </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>CONSUMERS ARE WISING UP TO BLACK FRIDAY “DEALS”</strong></p><p>This Black Friday may be the biggest yet, as recent data [1] suggests many consumers have delayed their Christmas gift shopping and other big-ticket purchases to make use of the deals and discounts offered.</p><p>Despite this, Dacia, the best value for money car brand in the UK, is taking a bold step by officially shutting down online sales on the day, in a bid to prove that you can get value all year round. </p><p>Black Friday will no doubt be vital to bolster the bottom line for many businesses – both large and small – and particularly the retail sector, which has seen costs rise but footfall fall over the last few months. </p><p>However, not all industries need to take part, with consumers warned that the day may not always offer the best deals, and can in fact encourage unnecessary spending and overconsumption.</p><p>New research suggests consumers are becoming wise to this as 21% are sceptical about the deals on offer, with 70% seeing Black Friday as nothing more than a marketing gimmick, and 1 in 10 lacking trust in brands that take part (11%). &nbsp;</p><p>Meanwhile,a third (33%) say they would prefer good deals all year round, while 1 1% want to avoid scams, and 8% would rather save the money for a rainy day.</p><p>Dacia is shutting down its UK online sales on Black Friday to reinforce its commitment to offering its range at the best value all year round. The brand’s range of cars provide everything you need, and nothing you don’t, reinforcing its belief that consumers should be able to buy the essentials at the best value for money on the market.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>Dacia’s online sales will be closed for the whole of Black Friday (00:00 – 23:59). The car configurator (which helps customers build their car) will also be closed for the duration of Black Friday.</p><p><strong>About Dacia</strong></p><p>Born in 1968, then relaunched by Renault Group from 2004 across Europe and Mediterranean countries, Dacia has always offered the best value for money cars by constantly redefining the essentials.&nbsp;As a game-changer, Dacia proposes simple, multi-purpose, reliable cars in tune with customers’ lifestyles.</p><p>Dacia models have become a reference on the market, including<em>Sandero</em>, the best-selling retail car in Europe each year since 2017; <em>Duster</em>, the best-selling SUV to European private customers since 2018; and<em>Jogger</em>, the C-segment versatile family car.&nbsp;</p><p>Present in 44 countries, Dacia has sold more than 8 million vehicles since 2004.&nbsp;Dacia launched in the UK in January 2013 and enjoyed the most successful start ever for a new car brand in the UK. More than 250,000 Dacia vehicles have been sold in the UK to date.</p><h4><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</strong></h4><ol><li>The BRC-KPMG Retail Sales Monitor (RSM), October 2023 (published 07/11, accessible<a href="https://brc.org.uk/insight/content/retail-sales/retail-sales-monitor/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">here</a>)</li></ol><br/><p>The research for Dacia UK was carried out online by Opinion Matters throughout 10.11.23-13.11.2023 amongst a panel resulting in 2,003 UK adults aged 16+ responding.</p><p>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registeredwith the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">b6668aa9-71db-4471-bcbd-58c8c55e1ab5</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 22 Nov 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/80a72ace-def8-48e3-8f96-b2842dfa17e9/Podcast-Radio-Business-Luke-Broad-24-11-23.mp3" length="37289272" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:32</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>AGEING WORKFORCE MEANS BETTER SUPPORT NEEDED FOR OLDER WORKERS | Claire Hawkins</title><itunes:title>AGEING WORKFORCE MEANS BETTER SUPPORT NEEDED FOR OLDER WORKERS | Claire Hawkins</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Claire Hawkins,  of Phoenix Group </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why an <strong>AGEING WORKFORCE MEANS BETTER SUPPORT NEEDED FOR OLDER WORKERS </strong></p><p>As  we live longer, how long we work for, the jobs we do, how and when we learn and acquire new skills and how and when we care for others need to change.</p><p>With an aging workforce and labour shortages, the over 50s are becoming increasingly dominant and important in the workplace. Today, three in 10 of the working age population are over 50. This means employers need to have the right policies and procedures in place to attract and retain older workers, or risk losing out on valuable experience and talent.</p><p>But despite their importance to the workforce, over one in three 50-to-70 years olds feel disadvantaged when applying for a job because of their age, and over half of over 50s in the UK agree that “older people are left behind by employers”. This can have a huge impact on businesses, societies and individuals.</p><p>Claire Hawkins at Phoenix Group – the UK’s biggest long-term savings and retirement business - believes we need to develop a successful strategy for ‘good work’, which will lead to more fulfilling longer lives, and enable better financial security in retirement. </p><p>Ahead of National Older Workers Week, beginning on 20 November 2023, Phoenix Group is launching its ‘Good Work for Longer Lives’ Report, which highlights the diverse challenges facing older workers in the UK, from a lack of readily available career advice to the impact of managing long-term ill health and caring responsibilities.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</strong></h4><p><a href="https://www.thephoenixgroup.com/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Phoenix Group</a> is the UK’s largest long-term savings and retirement business with £259 billion of assets under administration.</p><p>As life expectancy continues to increase and the pension landscape continues to shift, we offer our 12 million customers a broad range of pensions, savings and life&nbsp;insurance products across our family of brands which include Standard Life, SunLife, Phoenix Life and ReAssure. Our vision is to help even more people on their journey to and through retirement, providing the right support at the right time.&nbsp;</p><p>We are a growing and sustainable business united by a common purpose – helping people secure a life of possibilities. This drives everything we do and means taking responsible and sustainable investment decisions, and using our presence and voice to drive forward change for the better, for our customers, our colleagues, and our wider community.</p><p>We have been recognised as a leading employer for many years. We are accredited as a Living Wage Employer, Living Pension Employer and as a Carer Positive Exemplary Employer for offering the best support to colleagues who are carers.</p><p>In 2022, Phoenix Group introduced its policy of up to 10 days paid carers leave. Data from Phoenix Group shows that providing adequate statutory support for carers is not just a societal issue it also makes good economic sense. In 2022 and 2023 , 7% and 5.7% respectively of the organisation’s registered carers in a workforce of over 7,000 staff, took an average 3 paid leave days pa</p><p>Providing unpaid carers leave takes time away from paid work, affects individuals’ ability to save in the short and long term, and limits their possibilities for later life.&nbsp; As our society continues to age, a focus on working carers is essential to enable more people to remain in good work and is key to ensuring that more people aged over 50 are able to participate in the labour market for as long as they wish.</p><p>National Older Workers Week, sponsored by Phoenix Group, is being held on 20 – 24 November. You can find out more information <a href="https://www.nationalolderworkersweek.co.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer"...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Claire Hawkins,  of Phoenix Group </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why an <strong>AGEING WORKFORCE MEANS BETTER SUPPORT NEEDED FOR OLDER WORKERS </strong></p><p>As  we live longer, how long we work for, the jobs we do, how and when we learn and acquire new skills and how and when we care for others need to change.</p><p>With an aging workforce and labour shortages, the over 50s are becoming increasingly dominant and important in the workplace. Today, three in 10 of the working age population are over 50. This means employers need to have the right policies and procedures in place to attract and retain older workers, or risk losing out on valuable experience and talent.</p><p>But despite their importance to the workforce, over one in three 50-to-70 years olds feel disadvantaged when applying for a job because of their age, and over half of over 50s in the UK agree that “older people are left behind by employers”. This can have a huge impact on businesses, societies and individuals.</p><p>Claire Hawkins at Phoenix Group – the UK’s biggest long-term savings and retirement business - believes we need to develop a successful strategy for ‘good work’, which will lead to more fulfilling longer lives, and enable better financial security in retirement. </p><p>Ahead of National Older Workers Week, beginning on 20 November 2023, Phoenix Group is launching its ‘Good Work for Longer Lives’ Report, which highlights the diverse challenges facing older workers in the UK, from a lack of readily available career advice to the impact of managing long-term ill health and caring responsibilities.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</strong></h4><p><a href="https://www.thephoenixgroup.com/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Phoenix Group</a> is the UK’s largest long-term savings and retirement business with £259 billion of assets under administration.</p><p>As life expectancy continues to increase and the pension landscape continues to shift, we offer our 12 million customers a broad range of pensions, savings and life&nbsp;insurance products across our family of brands which include Standard Life, SunLife, Phoenix Life and ReAssure. Our vision is to help even more people on their journey to and through retirement, providing the right support at the right time.&nbsp;</p><p>We are a growing and sustainable business united by a common purpose – helping people secure a life of possibilities. This drives everything we do and means taking responsible and sustainable investment decisions, and using our presence and voice to drive forward change for the better, for our customers, our colleagues, and our wider community.</p><p>We have been recognised as a leading employer for many years. We are accredited as a Living Wage Employer, Living Pension Employer and as a Carer Positive Exemplary Employer for offering the best support to colleagues who are carers.</p><p>In 2022, Phoenix Group introduced its policy of up to 10 days paid carers leave. Data from Phoenix Group shows that providing adequate statutory support for carers is not just a societal issue it also makes good economic sense. In 2022 and 2023 , 7% and 5.7% respectively of the organisation’s registered carers in a workforce of over 7,000 staff, took an average 3 paid leave days pa</p><p>Providing unpaid carers leave takes time away from paid work, affects individuals’ ability to save in the short and long term, and limits their possibilities for later life.&nbsp; As our society continues to age, a focus on working carers is essential to enable more people to remain in good work and is key to ensuring that more people aged over 50 are able to participate in the labour market for as long as they wish.</p><p>National Older Workers Week, sponsored by Phoenix Group, is being held on 20 – 24 November. You can find out more information <a href="https://www.nationalolderworkersweek.co.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">here</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">ec9aeac4-4ec6-4b86-a332-cf179171c53b</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 17 Nov 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/df673855-baa0-4815-bf0e-103eedbdc9f2/Podcast-Radio-Business-Claire-Hawkins-20-11-23.mp3" length="34121142" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:13</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>WHEN IT’S SMART TO BE ‘DUMB’  | Arne Bangsgaarrd Mathiasen</title><itunes:title>WHEN IT’S SMART TO BE ‘DUMB’  | Arne Bangsgaarrd Mathiasen</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Arne Bangsgaarrd Mathiasen, Educator &amp; Founder of Dumbphone </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHEN IT’S SMART TO BE ‘DUMB’ </strong></p><p>The urge to switch off from social media and the internet is growing with two in five (43%) of UK adults voluntarily undergoing a digital detox with some managing to separate themselves from their smartphones for as many as 26 days at a time.</p><p>But it is younger phone users who are the most likely to go cold turkey with three in five (61%) of Gen Z - those born between 1996 and 2010 - regularly hanging up on their smartphones in favour of reconnecting with the communities around them amid concerns for their health.</p><p>However, with a consultation process launching today (Thursday 9th November) on the long-awaited Online Safety Act, which aims to protect young people, make social media companies accountable for child abuse on their platforms and empower parents in controlling what their kids see online, there are benefits of turning to so-called ‘dumb phones’ which shield you from smartphones’ negative aspects.</p><p>For a quarter (25%) of smartphone users the acts of doomscrolling, the act of spending loads of time scrolling through bad and negative content is having an adverse effect on their mental health, with the pressure of being in constant contact too much for 25% while the constant pinging of emails and messages makes more than a fifth (22%) feel anxious.</p><p>The average person spends 3 hours 46 minutes<a href="https://mail.google.com/mail/u/0/#m_-7038774610186509152_m_2767013210241359848__ftn1" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">[1]</a> on their phones every day and LarsSilberbauer, Chief Marketing Officer, HMD Global, believes the trend of taking a break from the digital world and its constant barrage of incoming messages and notifications, social media posts and alerts is becoming increasingly important to us as we look to dial down the stress and anxiety of being always on, having to constantly watch our smartphones for fear of missing out.</p><p>Silberbauer, who previously worked in senior marketing roles for the IOC (International Olympic Committee) and LEGO after he was Senior Vice President of MTV Digital Studios, believes people want greater simplicity, fewer interruptions, and more time face to face with family and friends in which to have conversations free from distraction and time to enjoy beautiful moments.</p><p>In addition to Lars Silberbauer, Danish entrepreneur Arne Bangsgaarrd Mathiasen, the owner of Dumbphone,an educator of digital wellbeing, knowsonly too well about helping children detox from their smartphones and can offer tips and advice to parents wanting to help younger audiences move away from the all-consuming devices and any inappropriate content and help build resilience without having to rely on navigation and search apps or a digital wallet.</p><p>Arne can offer tips on how to use a dumbphone for many tasks which we are accustomed to using our smartphone for, like ordering an Uber and using online banking. He is taking part in the online 10 day detox challenge taking place from 20 November 2023.</p><p><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:&nbsp;</strong><em>&nbsp;</em></p><p>Research of 2,000 Britons was commissioned by HMD Global, the home of Nokia phones and was conducted by Perspectus Global in April 2023.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Arne Bangsgaarrd Mathiasen, Educator &amp; Founder of Dumbphone </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHEN IT’S SMART TO BE ‘DUMB’ </strong></p><p>The urge to switch off from social media and the internet is growing with two in five (43%) of UK adults voluntarily undergoing a digital detox with some managing to separate themselves from their smartphones for as many as 26 days at a time.</p><p>But it is younger phone users who are the most likely to go cold turkey with three in five (61%) of Gen Z - those born between 1996 and 2010 - regularly hanging up on their smartphones in favour of reconnecting with the communities around them amid concerns for their health.</p><p>However, with a consultation process launching today (Thursday 9th November) on the long-awaited Online Safety Act, which aims to protect young people, make social media companies accountable for child abuse on their platforms and empower parents in controlling what their kids see online, there are benefits of turning to so-called ‘dumb phones’ which shield you from smartphones’ negative aspects.</p><p>For a quarter (25%) of smartphone users the acts of doomscrolling, the act of spending loads of time scrolling through bad and negative content is having an adverse effect on their mental health, with the pressure of being in constant contact too much for 25% while the constant pinging of emails and messages makes more than a fifth (22%) feel anxious.</p><p>The average person spends 3 hours 46 minutes<a href="https://mail.google.com/mail/u/0/#m_-7038774610186509152_m_2767013210241359848__ftn1" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">[1]</a> on their phones every day and LarsSilberbauer, Chief Marketing Officer, HMD Global, believes the trend of taking a break from the digital world and its constant barrage of incoming messages and notifications, social media posts and alerts is becoming increasingly important to us as we look to dial down the stress and anxiety of being always on, having to constantly watch our smartphones for fear of missing out.</p><p>Silberbauer, who previously worked in senior marketing roles for the IOC (International Olympic Committee) and LEGO after he was Senior Vice President of MTV Digital Studios, believes people want greater simplicity, fewer interruptions, and more time face to face with family and friends in which to have conversations free from distraction and time to enjoy beautiful moments.</p><p>In addition to Lars Silberbauer, Danish entrepreneur Arne Bangsgaarrd Mathiasen, the owner of Dumbphone,an educator of digital wellbeing, knowsonly too well about helping children detox from their smartphones and can offer tips and advice to parents wanting to help younger audiences move away from the all-consuming devices and any inappropriate content and help build resilience without having to rely on navigation and search apps or a digital wallet.</p><p>Arne can offer tips on how to use a dumbphone for many tasks which we are accustomed to using our smartphone for, like ordering an Uber and using online banking. He is taking part in the online 10 day detox challenge taking place from 20 November 2023.</p><p><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:&nbsp;</strong><em>&nbsp;</em></p><p>Research of 2,000 Britons was commissioned by HMD Global, the home of Nokia phones and was conducted by Perspectus Global in April 2023.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">7ad18f10-b750-4b8b-be12-4358a988dca8</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 10 Nov 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/2b9e5a0a-706a-4323-bd27-8710b08a7883/Podcast-Radio-Business-Arne-Bangsgaard-Mathiasen-09-11-23.mp3" length="40048848" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:41</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Get People, KeepPeople: A Dale Carnegie &amp; Directors Insight into Workplace Stress | Andy Collings</title><itunes:title>Get People, KeepPeople: A Dale Carnegie &amp; Directors Insight into Workplace Stress | Andy Collings</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Andy Collings, Chief Executive of Dale Carnegie </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Get People, KeepPeople: A Dale Carnegie &amp; Directors Insight into Workplace Stress</strong></p><p><strong>Free “Directors Lunch, including panel discussion and workshop focusing on Workplace Stress” in the Midlands</strong></p><p>Learning and development firm Dale Carnegie will be hosting a half day seminar, workshop and lunch for senior business leaders on Friday 17 November. </p><p>The complimentary session, called Get People, Keep People, will be held at The National Motorcycle Museum, Solihull, and will feature a diverse panel of senior experts from across various industries, including Leatham Green (Transformation Director at Oracle), Charlotte Johns (Global Talent lead at Eilda Unilever), in an event not to be missed.</p><p>Those in attendance will hear thought-leading insights on how to understand stress in our teams, manage and understand the signs of personal stress as a senior leader, and also take part in an engaging and inspiring session to help individuals leverage outstanding communications, learn how to manage different personalities and how to use time-tested human relations to reduce stress in the workplace. All this with the opportunity to collaborate with other leaders. Get People, Keep People, is a must attend session for leaders looking to better empathise with and understand their people, to achieve outstanding results.</p><p>“We’ve seen a huge increase in workplace stress, and it’s more important than ever, as leaders, to equip ourselves with the necessary skills to acknowledge our own challenges and find the tools to support our people.</p><p>In order to make our organisations successful, increase efficiency, productivity and engagement. It’s vital that we not only hire the right people, but we must keep them. Our sessions can help you do just that” says Andy Collings, Chief Executive of Dale Carnegie Central England. “Dale Carnegie wrote the book, How to Win Friends and Influence People over 100 years ago and since then we’ve been running sessions and courses just like this, we’re proud that all our attendees see positive change in their personal and professional lives. We all have it in us, but sometimes we just need a hand to remind ourselves of the skills we have and feel empowered to use them. This will be a great session, rich with ideas and tools as well as a great opportunity to network with peers facing the same challenges””.</p><p>The free to attend session will have an interactive format, allowing attendees to engage in discussion with a panel of top leaders as well as enjoy a 45-minute highly engaging session delivered by one of the Dale Carnegie training team, giving attendees a taste of the Dale Carnegie principles. Guests will leave the day inspired, armed with new tools and new contacts from across the industry. To top it off, there’ll also be the opportunity for a tour of the National Motorcycle Museum when the session ends.</p><p>Get People, Keep People: A Dale Carnegie &amp; Directors Insight into Workplace Stress is specifically designed as a forum to access the latest thinking on overcoming workplace stress.</p><p>To attend the event, please register for your complimentary ticket:</p><p><a href="https://www.eventbrite.co.uk/e/directors-lunch-get-people-keep-people-an-insight-into-workplace-stress-tickets-737874411227?aff=oddtdtcreator" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.eventbrite.co.uk/e/directors-lunch-get-people-keep-people-an-insight-into-workplace-stress-tickets-737874411227?aff=oddtdtcreator</a></p><p><strong>Editor’s notes:</strong></p><p><strong>Get People, Keep People: A Dale Carnegie &amp; Directors Insight into Workplace Stress</strong></p><p>Friday 17 November 2023</p><p>The National Motorcycle Museum, Coventry Road Hampton in Arden B92 0EJ</p><p>Agenda</p><p>11.00 Reception drinks meet and...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Andy Collings, Chief Executive of Dale Carnegie </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>Get People, KeepPeople: A Dale Carnegie &amp; Directors Insight into Workplace Stress</strong></p><p><strong>Free “Directors Lunch, including panel discussion and workshop focusing on Workplace Stress” in the Midlands</strong></p><p>Learning and development firm Dale Carnegie will be hosting a half day seminar, workshop and lunch for senior business leaders on Friday 17 November. </p><p>The complimentary session, called Get People, Keep People, will be held at The National Motorcycle Museum, Solihull, and will feature a diverse panel of senior experts from across various industries, including Leatham Green (Transformation Director at Oracle), Charlotte Johns (Global Talent lead at Eilda Unilever), in an event not to be missed.</p><p>Those in attendance will hear thought-leading insights on how to understand stress in our teams, manage and understand the signs of personal stress as a senior leader, and also take part in an engaging and inspiring session to help individuals leverage outstanding communications, learn how to manage different personalities and how to use time-tested human relations to reduce stress in the workplace. All this with the opportunity to collaborate with other leaders. Get People, Keep People, is a must attend session for leaders looking to better empathise with and understand their people, to achieve outstanding results.</p><p>“We’ve seen a huge increase in workplace stress, and it’s more important than ever, as leaders, to equip ourselves with the necessary skills to acknowledge our own challenges and find the tools to support our people.</p><p>In order to make our organisations successful, increase efficiency, productivity and engagement. It’s vital that we not only hire the right people, but we must keep them. Our sessions can help you do just that” says Andy Collings, Chief Executive of Dale Carnegie Central England. “Dale Carnegie wrote the book, How to Win Friends and Influence People over 100 years ago and since then we’ve been running sessions and courses just like this, we’re proud that all our attendees see positive change in their personal and professional lives. We all have it in us, but sometimes we just need a hand to remind ourselves of the skills we have and feel empowered to use them. This will be a great session, rich with ideas and tools as well as a great opportunity to network with peers facing the same challenges””.</p><p>The free to attend session will have an interactive format, allowing attendees to engage in discussion with a panel of top leaders as well as enjoy a 45-minute highly engaging session delivered by one of the Dale Carnegie training team, giving attendees a taste of the Dale Carnegie principles. Guests will leave the day inspired, armed with new tools and new contacts from across the industry. To top it off, there’ll also be the opportunity for a tour of the National Motorcycle Museum when the session ends.</p><p>Get People, Keep People: A Dale Carnegie &amp; Directors Insight into Workplace Stress is specifically designed as a forum to access the latest thinking on overcoming workplace stress.</p><p>To attend the event, please register for your complimentary ticket:</p><p><a href="https://www.eventbrite.co.uk/e/directors-lunch-get-people-keep-people-an-insight-into-workplace-stress-tickets-737874411227?aff=oddtdtcreator" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.eventbrite.co.uk/e/directors-lunch-get-people-keep-people-an-insight-into-workplace-stress-tickets-737874411227?aff=oddtdtcreator</a></p><p><strong>Editor’s notes:</strong></p><p><strong>Get People, Keep People: A Dale Carnegie &amp; Directors Insight into Workplace Stress</strong></p><p>Friday 17 November 2023</p><p>The National Motorcycle Museum, Coventry Road Hampton in Arden B92 0EJ</p><p>Agenda</p><p>11.00 Reception drinks meet and greet</p><p>11.30 Panel discussion (panellists TBC)</p><p>12.15 Dale Carnegie session</p><p>1.00 Lunch&nbsp;</p><p>2.00 Wrap up</p><p>2.30 Optional tour of museum</p><p><strong><u>About Dale Carnegie</u></strong></p><p>Dale Carnegie have over 100 years experience in business, guiding their clients to outpace their competition. Dale Carnegie has witnessed the world experiencing its most rapid cycles of change and advancement.</p><p>The way Dale Carnegie’s elite trainers and facilitator’s engage, the environment they create and the way they coach and give feedback following Dale Carnegie’s DNA, makes them different to other training organisations.</p><p>Their trainers undergo more than 250 hours of rigorous in-house development before they can become certified to deliver to their clients. Learning is ongoing throughout their Dale Carnegie career, with regular re-certification and updates to their skills and methodologies.</p><p><a href="https://www.dalecarnegie.co.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.dalecarnegie.co.uk/</a></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">f305fd8b-b332-4c67-8936-9b4ecaccf3c4</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 10 Nov 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/217bbc52-8ff3-4682-8f03-5de3dba5bcd2/The-Cashflow-Xtra-Podcast-Radio-Business-Andy-Collings-08-11-23.mp3" length="29161011" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>12:09</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>CAN RETAILERS RELY ON LOYALTY THIS FESTIVE SHOPPING SEASON? | Lucy Davies</title><itunes:title>CAN RETAILERS RELY ON LOYALTY THIS FESTIVE SHOPPING SEASON? | Lucy Davies</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Lucy Davies,  SAP Emarsys </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>CAN RETAILERS RELY ON LOYALTY THIS FESTIVE SHOPPING SEASON?</strong></p><p>Retail sales slumped in September, with data showing many avoided big-ticket purchases [1] – perhaps preparing for the upcoming sales season with its slashed prices and lucrative deals.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>As this golden quarter approaches, retailers are being warned not to rely on customer loyalty and continue to be competitive, as 60% of consumers report having switched from a favourite brand due to cost considerations.&nbsp; But being competitive is not just about offering deals.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>Looking ahead to Black Friday, 20% intend on spending more this year than they did the last, with more than a quarter (27%) seeking to purchase most of their Christmas presents.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>Interestingly, 39% remain loyal to retailers they spend with on the day, even after the sales end – rising to 47% among men and falling to 32% among women. But what causes a customer to remain with a brand or to shop around for a better deal elsewhere?&nbsp;</p><p>Confusingly, ‘incentivised’ loyalty, that is loyalty to discounts and deals has dropped from 71% in ‘22 to 51% in ’23, indicating people are tempted by low prices but without those deals, their custom will disappear into thin air.&nbsp;</p><p>So what do retailers need to do to make customers stay?&nbsp;</p><p>Winning brands are embracing the concept of a ‘value exchange’ with their customers. Not all shops want to get stuck in a downwards spiral of lower prices but there<em>is </em>an alternative…&nbsp;</p><p>That’s according to customer engagement experts SAP Emarsys, who have conducted new research to gain fresh insights into the evolving dynamics of customer loyalty in 2023. The SAP Emarsys Customer Loyalty Index 2023 dives into insights on the future of loyalty and is available now.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:&nbsp;</strong><em>&nbsp;</em></p><p><strong>About Emarsys, an SAP company:</strong>&nbsp;</p><p>Emarsys, an SAP company, is the omnichannel customer engagement platform that empowers</p><p> marketers to build, launch, and scale personalized, cross-channel campaigns that drive business outcomes.&nbsp;</p><p>We partner with more than 1,500 companies from global enterprises to fast-moving mid-market brands across industries.&nbsp;</p><p>For more information about Emarsys, please visit: <a href="http://www.emarsys.com" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.emarsys.com</a>.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:&nbsp;</strong><em>&nbsp;</em></p><ol><li>BRC and KMPG Retail Sales Monitor, here: <a href="https://brc.org.uk/insight/content/retail-sales/retail-sales-monitor/reports/202309_uk_rsm/%20" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://brc.org.uk/insight/content/retail-sales/retail-sales-monitor/reports/202309_uk_rsm/</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;</li></ol><br/><p>The research for Emarsys was carried out online by Opinion Matters among 2,001 general respondents in the UK from 17.08.2023 ‐ 23.08.2023. Opinion Matters abides by and employs members of the Market Research Society and follows the MRS code of conduct which is based on the ESOMAR principles.&nbsp;</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Lucy Davies,  SAP Emarsys </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>CAN RETAILERS RELY ON LOYALTY THIS FESTIVE SHOPPING SEASON?</strong></p><p>Retail sales slumped in September, with data showing many avoided big-ticket purchases [1] – perhaps preparing for the upcoming sales season with its slashed prices and lucrative deals.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>As this golden quarter approaches, retailers are being warned not to rely on customer loyalty and continue to be competitive, as 60% of consumers report having switched from a favourite brand due to cost considerations.&nbsp; But being competitive is not just about offering deals.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>Looking ahead to Black Friday, 20% intend on spending more this year than they did the last, with more than a quarter (27%) seeking to purchase most of their Christmas presents.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>Interestingly, 39% remain loyal to retailers they spend with on the day, even after the sales end – rising to 47% among men and falling to 32% among women. But what causes a customer to remain with a brand or to shop around for a better deal elsewhere?&nbsp;</p><p>Confusingly, ‘incentivised’ loyalty, that is loyalty to discounts and deals has dropped from 71% in ‘22 to 51% in ’23, indicating people are tempted by low prices but without those deals, their custom will disappear into thin air.&nbsp;</p><p>So what do retailers need to do to make customers stay?&nbsp;</p><p>Winning brands are embracing the concept of a ‘value exchange’ with their customers. Not all shops want to get stuck in a downwards spiral of lower prices but there<em>is </em>an alternative…&nbsp;</p><p>That’s according to customer engagement experts SAP Emarsys, who have conducted new research to gain fresh insights into the evolving dynamics of customer loyalty in 2023. The SAP Emarsys Customer Loyalty Index 2023 dives into insights on the future of loyalty and is available now.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:&nbsp;</strong><em>&nbsp;</em></p><p><strong>About Emarsys, an SAP company:</strong>&nbsp;</p><p>Emarsys, an SAP company, is the omnichannel customer engagement platform that empowers</p><p> marketers to build, launch, and scale personalized, cross-channel campaigns that drive business outcomes.&nbsp;</p><p>We partner with more than 1,500 companies from global enterprises to fast-moving mid-market brands across industries.&nbsp;</p><p>For more information about Emarsys, please visit: <a href="http://www.emarsys.com" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.emarsys.com</a>.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:&nbsp;</strong><em>&nbsp;</em></p><ol><li>BRC and KMPG Retail Sales Monitor, here: <a href="https://brc.org.uk/insight/content/retail-sales/retail-sales-monitor/reports/202309_uk_rsm/%20" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://brc.org.uk/insight/content/retail-sales/retail-sales-monitor/reports/202309_uk_rsm/</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;</li></ol><br/><p>The research for Emarsys was carried out online by Opinion Matters among 2,001 general respondents in the UK from 17.08.2023 ‐ 23.08.2023. Opinion Matters abides by and employs members of the Market Research Society and follows the MRS code of conduct which is based on the ESOMAR principles.&nbsp;</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">9417360d-fe29-4ba3-a9a4-075e6b954f0e</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 06 Nov 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/6be00cfa-6b3b-447c-a57d-63030c3abe2b/Podcast-Radio-Business-Lucy-Davies-18-10-23.mp3" length="34085615" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:12</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>WHY SMALL BUSINESSES ARE A GROWING TARGET FOR CYBER CRIMINALS | Eddie Lamb</title><itunes:title>WHY SMALL BUSINESSES ARE A GROWING TARGET FOR CYBER CRIMINALS | Eddie Lamb</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Eddie Lamb,  Director, Cyber Education and Advisory  from Hiscox </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHY SMALL BUSINESSES ARE A GROWING TARGET FOR CYBER CRIMINALS</strong></p><p>Businesses with less than 10 employees have been hit harder by cyber attacks over the last three years, and despite battling high inflation and the cost-of-living crisis, cyber attacks are a top business risk for companies in five of eight countries. </p><p>That’s according to the new Hiscox Cyber Readiness Report, which has revealed many small business owners with less than 250 employees do not feel confident on the cyber issue, with only 3 in 5 (61%) saying they could handle an attack, compared to 71% in larger firms.</p><p>This is worrying as the issue is only growing, with more cyber attacks reported by business leaders – both big and small – for a fourth consecutive year, as more than half (53%) admit they have been attacked at least once in the last year (up from 48% in 2022). </p><p>Business email compromise has been revealed as hackers’ favourite way to attack a business, targeting human employees before attempting to all corporate servers or the cloud. Therefore,awareness, employee training and security controls are paramount. </p><p>But there is reason to be hopeful, as we are spending more on cyber security (up 39% over the last three years) and becoming wise to popular attacks such as ransomware, with the number likely to pay dropping from 66% to 63%. </p><p>We take the threat seriously, fostering a more cautious and careful workforce, and containing the cost – with the average amount lost to cyber attacks falling from around $17,000 to just over $16,000. </p><p>But small businesses can learn something from their larger counterparts, and that is the positive action taken after an attack – such as implementing better processes and procedures,or taking out cyber insurance cover. </p><h4><strong>GUEST:</strong></h4><p><strong>Eddie Lamb, Director, Cyber Education and Advisory, Hiscox</strong></p><p>Eddie joined Hiscox in September 2019 and leads the cyber education and advisory services. Prior to joining, he spent 10 years in consultancy including tenures with Deloitte,KPMG, and CGI. </p><p>Eddie spent the first 12 years of his career with British Intelligence, and is a trusted advisor to executive decision makers in the EU, UK and US. He typically works with Financial Institutes, Government, Energy and Technology clients. </p><p>During his military intelligence career, he spent nine years involved in covert operations, and specialised in cryptography, offensive hacking, and social engineering– before spending three years at GCHQ designing and building national intelligence and security infrastructure. He played a significant role in defining the UK’s first national cyber strategy.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p><strong>About The Hiscox Group</strong></p><p>Hiscox is a global specialist insurer, headquartered in Bermuda and listed on the London Stock Exchange (LSE:HSX):</p><p>Our ambition is to be a respected specialist insurer with a diverse portfolio by product and geography. We believe that building balance between catastrophe-exposed business and less volatile local specialty business gives us opportunities for profitable growth throughout the insurance cycle.</p><p>The Hiscox Group employs over 3,000 people in 14 countries, and has customers worldwide. Through the retail businesses in the UK, Europe, Asia and the USA, we offer a range of specialist insurance products in commercial and personal lines. Internationally traded, bigger ticket business and reinsurance is underwritten through Hiscox London Market and Hiscox Re &amp; ILS.</p><p>Our values define our business, with a focus on people, courage, ownership and integrity. We pride ourselves on being true to our word and our award-winning claims service is testament to that. For more...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Eddie Lamb,  Director, Cyber Education and Advisory  from Hiscox </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WHY SMALL BUSINESSES ARE A GROWING TARGET FOR CYBER CRIMINALS</strong></p><p>Businesses with less than 10 employees have been hit harder by cyber attacks over the last three years, and despite battling high inflation and the cost-of-living crisis, cyber attacks are a top business risk for companies in five of eight countries. </p><p>That’s according to the new Hiscox Cyber Readiness Report, which has revealed many small business owners with less than 250 employees do not feel confident on the cyber issue, with only 3 in 5 (61%) saying they could handle an attack, compared to 71% in larger firms.</p><p>This is worrying as the issue is only growing, with more cyber attacks reported by business leaders – both big and small – for a fourth consecutive year, as more than half (53%) admit they have been attacked at least once in the last year (up from 48% in 2022). </p><p>Business email compromise has been revealed as hackers’ favourite way to attack a business, targeting human employees before attempting to all corporate servers or the cloud. Therefore,awareness, employee training and security controls are paramount. </p><p>But there is reason to be hopeful, as we are spending more on cyber security (up 39% over the last three years) and becoming wise to popular attacks such as ransomware, with the number likely to pay dropping from 66% to 63%. </p><p>We take the threat seriously, fostering a more cautious and careful workforce, and containing the cost – with the average amount lost to cyber attacks falling from around $17,000 to just over $16,000. </p><p>But small businesses can learn something from their larger counterparts, and that is the positive action taken after an attack – such as implementing better processes and procedures,or taking out cyber insurance cover. </p><h4><strong>GUEST:</strong></h4><p><strong>Eddie Lamb, Director, Cyber Education and Advisory, Hiscox</strong></p><p>Eddie joined Hiscox in September 2019 and leads the cyber education and advisory services. Prior to joining, he spent 10 years in consultancy including tenures with Deloitte,KPMG, and CGI. </p><p>Eddie spent the first 12 years of his career with British Intelligence, and is a trusted advisor to executive decision makers in the EU, UK and US. He typically works with Financial Institutes, Government, Energy and Technology clients. </p><p>During his military intelligence career, he spent nine years involved in covert operations, and specialised in cryptography, offensive hacking, and social engineering– before spending three years at GCHQ designing and building national intelligence and security infrastructure. He played a significant role in defining the UK’s first national cyber strategy.</p><h4><strong>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p><strong>About The Hiscox Group</strong></p><p>Hiscox is a global specialist insurer, headquartered in Bermuda and listed on the London Stock Exchange (LSE:HSX):</p><p>Our ambition is to be a respected specialist insurer with a diverse portfolio by product and geography. We believe that building balance between catastrophe-exposed business and less volatile local specialty business gives us opportunities for profitable growth throughout the insurance cycle.</p><p>The Hiscox Group employs over 3,000 people in 14 countries, and has customers worldwide. Through the retail businesses in the UK, Europe, Asia and the USA, we offer a range of specialist insurance products in commercial and personal lines. Internationally traded, bigger ticket business and reinsurance is underwritten through Hiscox London Market and Hiscox Re &amp; ILS.</p><p>Our values define our business, with a focus on people, courage, ownership and integrity. We pride ourselves on being true to our word and our award-winning claims service is testament to that. For more information, visit www.hiscoxgroup.com.</p><h4><strong>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>A total 5,005 professionals responsible for their company’s cyber security strategy were surveyed – including 900 each from the USA, UK, France, and Germany – 400 from Spain, and 200-plus from Belgium, The Netherlands, and the Republic of Ireland. Respondents completed the online survey between 09.01.2023 – 02.02.2023.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">367bc4bd-158d-49ce-a7ef-3ddaf2a627b1</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 09 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/87d54760-5c5d-49e4-9f2c-7e167835a3e5/Podcast-Radio-Business-Eddie-Lamb-10-10-23.mp3" length="68022856" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>28:21</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>WORKPLACE SEXUAL HARRASSMENT RUNNING RIFE | LORRAINE MENSAH</title><itunes:title>WORKPLACE SEXUAL HARRASSMENT RUNNING RIFE | LORRAINE MENSAH</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Lorraine Mensah from The Barrister Group </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WORKPLACE SEXUAL HARRASSMENT RUNNING RIFE.</strong></p><p>Shocking new research shows more than a quarter (29%) of employees in the UK have experienced sexually inappropriate behaviour from a colleague in the workplace, with the majority of those (69%) by someone more senior. </p><p>The report, by The Barrister Group, also highlights how staff are reluctant to report inappropriate behavior with almost half (48%) choosing to keep quiet.</p><p>The reasons given for not reporting a colleague included a reluctance ‘to cause drama’ (39%), a lack of faith in official channels holding them toaccount (16%) and a fear that they would be treated negatively if they reported an incident (12%).</p><p>The issue is impacting women more than men, with a third (31%) of women admitting to experiencing harassment in the workplace, compared to a quarter of men (26%).</p><p>Touching breasts, unwanted sexual advances and sexual slurs top the list of the most inappropriate workplace behaviours, with a wide disparity between what men and women found acceptable workplace conduct. </p><p>With high-profile celebrity scandals of sexually inappropriate behavior at work, continuing to dominate headlines, the report shows sexual charged behaviour is endemic through workplaces with most victims suffering silently. </p><p>34% believe that management accept or ignore inappropriate behaviour while 23% think that their business has a misogynistic and sexist culture.</p><p>One in ten report (12%) leaving their job due to sexually inappropriate behaviour from a colleague, with a similar amount moving to another role (10%).</p><p>The Barrister Group commissioned the report to gain a greater understandingof the public’s perception of inappropriate behaviour in the workplace, with the aim opening up the conversation about fostering a more inclusive and respectful professional environment.</p><p>We are offering employment law experts who can talk about the issues surrounding sexual harassment, why so many employees don’t feel they canspeak out and how employers should be doing more to support their staff. </p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>The research for The Barrister Group was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>25.09.2023 - 27.09.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in 2,019 UK workers.<strong> </strong>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Lorraine Mensah from The Barrister Group </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WORKPLACE SEXUAL HARRASSMENT RUNNING RIFE.</strong></p><p>Shocking new research shows more than a quarter (29%) of employees in the UK have experienced sexually inappropriate behaviour from a colleague in the workplace, with the majority of those (69%) by someone more senior. </p><p>The report, by The Barrister Group, also highlights how staff are reluctant to report inappropriate behavior with almost half (48%) choosing to keep quiet.</p><p>The reasons given for not reporting a colleague included a reluctance ‘to cause drama’ (39%), a lack of faith in official channels holding them toaccount (16%) and a fear that they would be treated negatively if they reported an incident (12%).</p><p>The issue is impacting women more than men, with a third (31%) of women admitting to experiencing harassment in the workplace, compared to a quarter of men (26%).</p><p>Touching breasts, unwanted sexual advances and sexual slurs top the list of the most inappropriate workplace behaviours, with a wide disparity between what men and women found acceptable workplace conduct. </p><p>With high-profile celebrity scandals of sexually inappropriate behavior at work, continuing to dominate headlines, the report shows sexual charged behaviour is endemic through workplaces with most victims suffering silently. </p><p>34% believe that management accept or ignore inappropriate behaviour while 23% think that their business has a misogynistic and sexist culture.</p><p>One in ten report (12%) leaving their job due to sexually inappropriate behaviour from a colleague, with a similar amount moving to another role (10%).</p><p>The Barrister Group commissioned the report to gain a greater understandingof the public’s perception of inappropriate behaviour in the workplace, with the aim opening up the conversation about fostering a more inclusive and respectful professional environment.</p><p>We are offering employment law experts who can talk about the issues surrounding sexual harassment, why so many employees don’t feel they canspeak out and how employers should be doing more to support their staff. </p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p>The research for The Barrister Group was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>25.09.2023 - 27.09.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in 2,019 UK workers.<strong> </strong>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">bea909e1-74c5-4b43-93fe-16bd6b3ca809</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/72271899-c045-4384-abe9-371aca841eb4/Podcast-Radio-Business-Lorraine-Mensah-06-10-23.mp3" length="40521142" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:53</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Saving Face: Almost a fifth of Brits dip into savings every week | Ellie Austin-Williams</title><itunes:title>Saving Face: Almost a fifth of Brits dip into savings every week | Ellie Austin-Williams</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Ellie Austin-Williams, Author of Money Talks &amp; founder of This Girl Talks Money</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why<strong> Almost a fifth of Brits dip into savings every week </strong></p><p>Almost a fifth (17%) of Britons are dipping into their savings on a weekly basis, with those accessing their rainy-day funds doing so to cover bills (38%), rent (9%), transport (9%) and even medication (8%).</p><p>What’s more, almost a quarter (23%) of Brits are unable to put anything away each month, while another 27% struggle to save a tenth of their income.</p><p>It is leaving half (46%) feeling that they should be saving double, if not triple, the amount each month.</p><p>The new study by online savings provider Ford Money, also found that over a third (34%) believe saving as much as possible, even up to 50% of their income, each month is the best strategy.</p><p>But evidence suggests that this approach may not be suitable for all, with a third (33%) of those in debt believing they are due to their own unrealistic savings goals that just cannot be maintained.</p><p>Even for those with savings, a lack of understanding on how to make the most of them is also having an impact on the amount of cash Britons have access to.</p><p>According to the research, over 70% of people have never considered switching bank accounts in search of a better interest rate for their savings, despite almost two-fifths (37%)agreeing that it is in fact better to move money around.</p><p>However, many well-intentioned savers could be missing out on opportunities that could make their money work harder.</p><p>Whether it be switching banks or upgrading accounts with existing providers, small changes could make a big difference over the course of a year.</p><p>This failure to maximise savings is particularly noteworthy considering the current high base interest rate of 5%.</p><p><strong>About the Research</strong></p><p>Ford Money commissioned research firm, Censuswide, to conduct the research. The study was conducted from June 30th to July 5th, 2023, and involved a comprehensive poll of a diverse sample size comprising 2015 individuals aged 16 and above.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Ellie Austin-Williams, Author of Money Talks &amp; founder of This Girl Talks Money</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why<strong> Almost a fifth of Brits dip into savings every week </strong></p><p>Almost a fifth (17%) of Britons are dipping into their savings on a weekly basis, with those accessing their rainy-day funds doing so to cover bills (38%), rent (9%), transport (9%) and even medication (8%).</p><p>What’s more, almost a quarter (23%) of Brits are unable to put anything away each month, while another 27% struggle to save a tenth of their income.</p><p>It is leaving half (46%) feeling that they should be saving double, if not triple, the amount each month.</p><p>The new study by online savings provider Ford Money, also found that over a third (34%) believe saving as much as possible, even up to 50% of their income, each month is the best strategy.</p><p>But evidence suggests that this approach may not be suitable for all, with a third (33%) of those in debt believing they are due to their own unrealistic savings goals that just cannot be maintained.</p><p>Even for those with savings, a lack of understanding on how to make the most of them is also having an impact on the amount of cash Britons have access to.</p><p>According to the research, over 70% of people have never considered switching bank accounts in search of a better interest rate for their savings, despite almost two-fifths (37%)agreeing that it is in fact better to move money around.</p><p>However, many well-intentioned savers could be missing out on opportunities that could make their money work harder.</p><p>Whether it be switching banks or upgrading accounts with existing providers, small changes could make a big difference over the course of a year.</p><p>This failure to maximise savings is particularly noteworthy considering the current high base interest rate of 5%.</p><p><strong>About the Research</strong></p><p>Ford Money commissioned research firm, Censuswide, to conduct the research. The study was conducted from June 30th to July 5th, 2023, and involved a comprehensive poll of a diverse sample size comprising 2015 individuals aged 16 and above.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">f23c630b-c2be-40f0-82a8-19d200647989</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/7ad6aefa-f0c6-4b91-af48-542a6e46d9ff/Podcast-Radio-Business-Ellie-Austin-Williams-25-09-23.mp3" length="35664456" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:52</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>FIGHTING THE RISE OF THE FINFLUENCER  | Paddy Osborn</title><itunes:title>FIGHTING THE RISE OF THE FINFLUENCER  | Paddy Osborn</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Paddy Osborn, Academic Dean &amp; Managing Director, London Academy of Trading (LAT) </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>FIGHTING THE RISE OF THE "<em>FINFLUENCER"</em>.</strong></p><p>Regulators are cracking-down on those who recklessly promote investment or trading opportunities on social media platforms – known as ‘finfluencers’ – but their presence online is only growing. &nbsp;</p><p>That’s according to new research from the London Academy of Trading (LAT) which has found two in five (40%) report seeing more people promoting such opportunities online, while 42% have seen an increase in content. &nbsp;</p><p>This rise may be fed by a hungry market, with more than half (56%) actively seeking ways to supplement their income, but only 8% dealing with                      independent financial advisors (IFAs)<strong class="ql-size-small">1</strong>. </p><p>Perhaps to limit costs, with more than half (55%) reporting the cost-of-living crisis has had a negative impact on them, more than one in five(21%) admit they turn to finfluencers when making financial decisions. &nbsp;</p><p>This figure rises to almost half (49%) of those aged 16-34 years old, suggesting they are seeking advice on a platform they are more familiar with, or from people around their age – with only 6% of qualified IFAs under the age of 30, <strong class="ql-size-small">2</strong>.</p><p>Meanwhile, over a quarter (26%) have even seen friends offer financial advice online. Doing so without knowledge on what they should and should not be promoting could cause harm to their followers, and even put them on the wrong side of the law.</p><p>The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) is tackling this issue, set to publish new guidelines for firms promoting financial products<strong class="ql-size-small">3</strong>.It has also partnered with the Advertising Standards Authority (ASA) to raise awareness of the risks involved in promoting such services and deter malpractice<strong class="ql-size-small">4</strong>.</p><p>But it remains that 47% want to earn money quickly, while 23% are concerned about their job security, and 24% going as far as being interested in ‘get rich quick’ schemes. &nbsp;</p><p>Triple-accredited provider of financial trading education, the London Academy of Trading (LAT) teaches individuals about financial markets and trading and provides the practical knowledge and skills which can be applied in real-world environments.</p><h4><strong><em>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</em></strong></h4><p>The research for the <strong>London Academy of Trading</strong> was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>11.08.2023 – 14.08.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in <strong>2,012 nationally representative UK respondents (16+).</strong></p><p>General Consumers responding.<strong> </strong>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).&nbsp;</p><p>1.<a href="https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/fca-publishes-evaluation-financial-advice-market" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/fca-publishes-evaluation-financial-advice-market</a>&nbsp;</p><p>2.<a href="https://www.ft.com/content/fd8230d8-0680-48d8-99aa-fc2ae95f8ef2" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.ft.com/content/fd8230d8-0680-48d8-99aa-fc2ae95f8ef2</a>&nbsp;</p><p>3.<a href="https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/social-media-guidance-set-revamp%20" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/social-media-guidance-set-revamp</a></p><p>4.<a href="https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/fca-asa-sharon-gaffka-warn-finfluencers-illegal-get-rich-quick-schemes" rel="noopener noreferrer"...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Paddy Osborn, Academic Dean &amp; Managing Director, London Academy of Trading (LAT) </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>FIGHTING THE RISE OF THE "<em>FINFLUENCER"</em>.</strong></p><p>Regulators are cracking-down on those who recklessly promote investment or trading opportunities on social media platforms – known as ‘finfluencers’ – but their presence online is only growing. &nbsp;</p><p>That’s according to new research from the London Academy of Trading (LAT) which has found two in five (40%) report seeing more people promoting such opportunities online, while 42% have seen an increase in content. &nbsp;</p><p>This rise may be fed by a hungry market, with more than half (56%) actively seeking ways to supplement their income, but only 8% dealing with                      independent financial advisors (IFAs)<strong class="ql-size-small">1</strong>. </p><p>Perhaps to limit costs, with more than half (55%) reporting the cost-of-living crisis has had a negative impact on them, more than one in five(21%) admit they turn to finfluencers when making financial decisions. &nbsp;</p><p>This figure rises to almost half (49%) of those aged 16-34 years old, suggesting they are seeking advice on a platform they are more familiar with, or from people around their age – with only 6% of qualified IFAs under the age of 30, <strong class="ql-size-small">2</strong>.</p><p>Meanwhile, over a quarter (26%) have even seen friends offer financial advice online. Doing so without knowledge on what they should and should not be promoting could cause harm to their followers, and even put them on the wrong side of the law.</p><p>The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) is tackling this issue, set to publish new guidelines for firms promoting financial products<strong class="ql-size-small">3</strong>.It has also partnered with the Advertising Standards Authority (ASA) to raise awareness of the risks involved in promoting such services and deter malpractice<strong class="ql-size-small">4</strong>.</p><p>But it remains that 47% want to earn money quickly, while 23% are concerned about their job security, and 24% going as far as being interested in ‘get rich quick’ schemes. &nbsp;</p><p>Triple-accredited provider of financial trading education, the London Academy of Trading (LAT) teaches individuals about financial markets and trading and provides the practical knowledge and skills which can be applied in real-world environments.</p><h4><strong><em>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</em></strong></h4><p>The research for the <strong>London Academy of Trading</strong> was carried out online by Opinion Matters&nbsp;throughout <strong>11.08.2023 – 14.08.2023 </strong>amongst a panel resulting in <strong>2,012 nationally representative UK respondents (16+).</strong></p><p>General Consumers responding.<strong> </strong>All research conducted adheres to the MRS Codes of Conduct (2010) in the UK and ICC/ESOMAR World Research Guidelines. Opinion Matters is registered with the Information Commissioner's Office and is fully compliant with the Data Protection Act (1998).&nbsp;</p><p>1.<a href="https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/fca-publishes-evaluation-financial-advice-market" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/fca-publishes-evaluation-financial-advice-market</a>&nbsp;</p><p>2.<a href="https://www.ft.com/content/fd8230d8-0680-48d8-99aa-fc2ae95f8ef2" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.ft.com/content/fd8230d8-0680-48d8-99aa-fc2ae95f8ef2</a>&nbsp;</p><p>3.<a href="https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/social-media-guidance-set-revamp%20" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/social-media-guidance-set-revamp</a></p><p>4.<a href="https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/fca-asa-sharon-gaffka-warn-finfluencers-illegal-get-rich-quick-schemes" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.fca.org.uk/news/press-releases/fca-asa-sharon-gaffka-warn-finfluencers-illegal-get-rich-quick-schemes</a>&nbsp;</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">a69f3f86-d9dc-463a-95c5-2455aa3568b8</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/02c91db6-bc32-4c89-bcfc-5745d09681ed/Podcast-Radio-Business-Paddy-Osborn-21-09-23.mp3" length="47022497" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>19:36</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>AI TO PROMOTE MORE JOB OPPORTUNITIES  | Mina Van Piggelen</title><itunes:title>AI TO PROMOTE MORE JOB OPPORTUNITIES  | Mina Van Piggelen</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Mina Van Pigellen of Experis </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss  <strong>USING AI TO PROMOTE MORE JOB OPPORTUNITIES.</strong></p><p>Contrary to recent headlines focussing on layoffs in some of the world’s biggest tech firms, research has outlined the positive impacts of AI and automation to the workforce and that it can indeedcreate more job opportunities.&nbsp;</p><p>IT and Tech organisations in the UK predict they will increase their headcount in the next 12 months, highlighting an encouraging landscape for jobseekers looking for opportunities within tech.</p><p>New data has shown there will be increased availability of roles, with employers in the IT sector looking for candidates who demonstrate skills in communication, collaboration and teamwork (36%), and critical thinking and analysis (30%).&nbsp;</p><p>The research will coincide with the<em>‘Disrupt the Tech Layoffs’</em> event by Experis,set to connect 15,000 skilled tech professionals with thousands of available tech and IT roles across the country. The event will bring together several teams based in five office locations across the country: Bristol, Solihull, Manchester, Edinburgh and London.&nbsp;</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Mina Van Pigellen of Experis </strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss  <strong>USING AI TO PROMOTE MORE JOB OPPORTUNITIES.</strong></p><p>Contrary to recent headlines focussing on layoffs in some of the world’s biggest tech firms, research has outlined the positive impacts of AI and automation to the workforce and that it can indeedcreate more job opportunities.&nbsp;</p><p>IT and Tech organisations in the UK predict they will increase their headcount in the next 12 months, highlighting an encouraging landscape for jobseekers looking for opportunities within tech.</p><p>New data has shown there will be increased availability of roles, with employers in the IT sector looking for candidates who demonstrate skills in communication, collaboration and teamwork (36%), and critical thinking and analysis (30%).&nbsp;</p><p>The research will coincide with the<em>‘Disrupt the Tech Layoffs’</em> event by Experis,set to connect 15,000 skilled tech professionals with thousands of available tech and IT roles across the country. The event will bring together several teams based in five office locations across the country: Bristol, Solihull, Manchester, Edinburgh and London.&nbsp;</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">ff788034-b7c5-46f4-a908-1aa9c1a39683</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/e8639f30-69d8-42ed-b34e-4d68dbef8f36/Podcast-Radio-Business-Mina-Van-Piggelen-13-09-23.mp3" length="23291819" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:42</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>HOW ENERGY BROKERS POCKETED SECRET COMMISSIONS | Olivia Selley, Harcus Parker</title><itunes:title>HOW ENERGY BROKERS POCKETED SECRET COMMISSIONS | Olivia Selley, Harcus Parker</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Olivia Selley of Harcus Parker Solicitors</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss how <strong>ENERGY BROKERS POCKETED SECRET COMMISSIONS AT EXPENSE OF CHARITIES AND SMALL BUSINESSES</strong></p><p>Bad practices have resulted in the most vulnerable – including care homes and churches – being targeted, and locked into deals that were not in customers’ interests, in return for financial incentives.</p><p>Energy companies have been incentivising brokers to lock small businesses into energy deals that were not in their best interests, but earned them lucrative commissions, a former energy broker-turned whistle blower has revealed.&nbsp;</p><p>Unscrupulous brokers have even been deliberately targeting specific types of organisations – such as churches and village halls, charities and care homes – which they viewed as less sophisticated; locking them into deals that would end up costing them more money, even though better deals were available. </p><p>The commissions were merely built into the bill.&nbsp;According to the whistleblower, who is working with Harcus Parker – the firm spearheading legal action, brokers knew they could get away with pocketing what could be thousands a month because they would not face any sanction from Ofgem.&nbsp;</p><p>They were routinely taking four-figured commissions at the expense ofcustomers, as they viewed the regulator as toothless, and uninterested in ever cracking down on the practice.</p><p>With energy companies confident little would be done, brokers taking advantage of loopholes, and customers unable to easily complain, the practice flourished, even as the pandemic and the cost-of-living crisis meant businesses were fighting to keep their heads above water.&nbsp;</p><p>Even if an organisations realised they had been misled about the best deals available for them, brokers did not fear any consequences, with complaints directed to the energy supplier, who would merely refer them back to the broker to resolve.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>In any case, the brokers would have to receive a large number of complaints before a supplier would take any action. A cooling off period and a proper complaints system are not available to organisations.&nbsp;</p><p>Leading litigation law firm Harcus Parker has written to several of the main gas and electricity suppliers in the first step in group litigation to reclaim commissions paid by suppliers to brokers without customers’ knowledge.</p><p>More information on the claim, of which 5,000 businesses have already signed up, can be found here:</p><p><a href="http://www.energylitigation.com" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.energylitigation.com</a></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Olivia Selley of Harcus Parker Solicitors</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss how <strong>ENERGY BROKERS POCKETED SECRET COMMISSIONS AT EXPENSE OF CHARITIES AND SMALL BUSINESSES</strong></p><p>Bad practices have resulted in the most vulnerable – including care homes and churches – being targeted, and locked into deals that were not in customers’ interests, in return for financial incentives.</p><p>Energy companies have been incentivising brokers to lock small businesses into energy deals that were not in their best interests, but earned them lucrative commissions, a former energy broker-turned whistle blower has revealed.&nbsp;</p><p>Unscrupulous brokers have even been deliberately targeting specific types of organisations – such as churches and village halls, charities and care homes – which they viewed as less sophisticated; locking them into deals that would end up costing them more money, even though better deals were available. </p><p>The commissions were merely built into the bill.&nbsp;According to the whistleblower, who is working with Harcus Parker – the firm spearheading legal action, brokers knew they could get away with pocketing what could be thousands a month because they would not face any sanction from Ofgem.&nbsp;</p><p>They were routinely taking four-figured commissions at the expense ofcustomers, as they viewed the regulator as toothless, and uninterested in ever cracking down on the practice.</p><p>With energy companies confident little would be done, brokers taking advantage of loopholes, and customers unable to easily complain, the practice flourished, even as the pandemic and the cost-of-living crisis meant businesses were fighting to keep their heads above water.&nbsp;</p><p>Even if an organisations realised they had been misled about the best deals available for them, brokers did not fear any consequences, with complaints directed to the energy supplier, who would merely refer them back to the broker to resolve.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>In any case, the brokers would have to receive a large number of complaints before a supplier would take any action. A cooling off period and a proper complaints system are not available to organisations.&nbsp;</p><p>Leading litigation law firm Harcus Parker has written to several of the main gas and electricity suppliers in the first step in group litigation to reclaim commissions paid by suppliers to brokers without customers’ knowledge.</p><p>More information on the claim, of which 5,000 businesses have already signed up, can be found here:</p><p><a href="http://www.energylitigation.com" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.energylitigation.com</a></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">2dbc820c-7a28-4be7-a798-715e1ea7029f</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/c4683102-2d44-4166-b639-898801e9a617/Podcast-Radio-Business-Olivia-Selley-16-08-23.mp3" length="21879117" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:07</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>HOW TO BE PART OF THE LIGHTS, CAMERA, ACTION! Holly Tarquini, Director of  Filmbath &amp; Founder of  F-RATED</title><itunes:title>HOW TO BE PART OF THE LIGHTS, CAMERA, ACTION! Holly Tarquini, Director of  Filmbath &amp; Founder of  F-RATED</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Holly Tarquini, Producer, Director of  Filmbath &amp; Founder of  F-RATED&nbsp;&nbsp;</strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss how <strong>A CAREER IN FILM AND TV BEING MORE THAN JUST LIGHTS, CAMERA, ACTION</strong></p><p>It’s been a spectacular summer for film fans. The power of the blockbuster has once again shown the love us Brits have for a trip to the cinema, with Barbie hitting the billion-dollar mark within just 17 days from release. </p><p>But while many of us celebrate familiar faces on-screen, it’s important thehard-working team behind-the-scenes are also celebrated, and their roles are recognised.</p><p>This is especially important as new research from the AAT (Association of Accounting Technicians) reveals most young people (53%) are interested in pursuing a career in TV and Film, but  only (18%) believe it’s realistic. </p><p>Top Director and Producer, Holly Tarquini is hoping a spellbindingly pink summer at the movies will inspire the next generation to work in the film and TV industry. With Barbie filmed in the Leavesdon Studios (UK) and other popular franchises such as Indiana Jones or Wonka filmed in locations such as Glasgow and Bath, working in the film and TV industry has never been so close to home!</p><p>With more than two-thirds (67%) believing the only roles in film and TV are acting and creative roles, she wants to tell them that couldn’t be further from the truth. From financing aproduction, to ensuring filming runs on schedule and on budget, to marketing, distribution and revenue streams: the business of film offers a whole host of career paths and skills.</p><p>In fact, only 4% of young people think finance skills are essential in the industry and only 5% think marketing and sales skills are.</p><p>Last year, a record £6.27 billion was spent on high-end film and television production in the UK, giving 122,000 people a job.</p><p>Many young Brits are already gaining skills and a passion for film, with more than half (51%) enjoying filming and creating their own content for social media and 47% with ambitions to make their own film or TV show. </p><p>With almost two-thirds (59%) interested in knowing more about behind-the-scenes roles within the industry, successful Director and Producer Holly Tarquini is available to give a window into the business of film, share her top tips on filmmaking and explain how to equip young people with the skills to make an award-winning production and blockbuster hit.</p><p>The new research also comes at a time when there is a growing attitude thatyoung people should prioritise alternate career routes instead of university. AAT’s research amongst UK adults shows 41% think school leavers should prioritise combining learning with earning most, up 9% YOY (32%), followed by further education (e.g., university degree, 21%), paid work (21%) and taking time out (8%).</p><p>As many students are set to receive their A-level results, Holly wants to highlight the variety of valuable skills and abundance of routes available to pursue a career in film and TV.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Holly Tarquini, Producer, Director of  Filmbath &amp; Founder of  F-RATED&nbsp;&nbsp;</strong>speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss how <strong>A CAREER IN FILM AND TV BEING MORE THAN JUST LIGHTS, CAMERA, ACTION</strong></p><p>It’s been a spectacular summer for film fans. The power of the blockbuster has once again shown the love us Brits have for a trip to the cinema, with Barbie hitting the billion-dollar mark within just 17 days from release. </p><p>But while many of us celebrate familiar faces on-screen, it’s important thehard-working team behind-the-scenes are also celebrated, and their roles are recognised.</p><p>This is especially important as new research from the AAT (Association of Accounting Technicians) reveals most young people (53%) are interested in pursuing a career in TV and Film, but  only (18%) believe it’s realistic. </p><p>Top Director and Producer, Holly Tarquini is hoping a spellbindingly pink summer at the movies will inspire the next generation to work in the film and TV industry. With Barbie filmed in the Leavesdon Studios (UK) and other popular franchises such as Indiana Jones or Wonka filmed in locations such as Glasgow and Bath, working in the film and TV industry has never been so close to home!</p><p>With more than two-thirds (67%) believing the only roles in film and TV are acting and creative roles, she wants to tell them that couldn’t be further from the truth. From financing aproduction, to ensuring filming runs on schedule and on budget, to marketing, distribution and revenue streams: the business of film offers a whole host of career paths and skills.</p><p>In fact, only 4% of young people think finance skills are essential in the industry and only 5% think marketing and sales skills are.</p><p>Last year, a record £6.27 billion was spent on high-end film and television production in the UK, giving 122,000 people a job.</p><p>Many young Brits are already gaining skills and a passion for film, with more than half (51%) enjoying filming and creating their own content for social media and 47% with ambitions to make their own film or TV show. </p><p>With almost two-thirds (59%) interested in knowing more about behind-the-scenes roles within the industry, successful Director and Producer Holly Tarquini is available to give a window into the business of film, share her top tips on filmmaking and explain how to equip young people with the skills to make an award-winning production and blockbuster hit.</p><p>The new research also comes at a time when there is a growing attitude thatyoung people should prioritise alternate career routes instead of university. AAT’s research amongst UK adults shows 41% think school leavers should prioritise combining learning with earning most, up 9% YOY (32%), followed by further education (e.g., university degree, 21%), paid work (21%) and taking time out (8%).</p><p>As many students are set to receive their A-level results, Holly wants to highlight the variety of valuable skills and abundance of routes available to pursue a career in film and TV.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">c6442517-8714-494b-b81b-436a0a40a72e</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/9f35f20f-50fc-4121-b203-f5849031f611/Podcast-Radio-Business-Holly-Tarquini-16-08-23.mp3" length="49927313" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>20:48</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>TIME TO TACKLE WEIGHT DISCRIMINATION IN THE WORKPLACE | Professor Binna Kandola OBE</title><itunes:title>TIME TO TACKLE WEIGHT DISCRIMINATION IN THE WORKPLACE | Professor Binna Kandola OBE</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Professor Binna Kandola OBE,</strong> diversity and inclusion specialist from <strong>Pearn Kandola,</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>TIME TO TACKLE WEIGHT DISCRIMINATION IN THE WORKPLACE.</strong></p><p>Discrimination against overweight people is rife across the UK’s workplaces, according to a major new report looking at a deeply entrenched prejudice.</p><p>Research released today reveals more than two-thirds of employees (69%) believe weight discrimination exists in their workplace, with nearly half of respondents (47%) considering it to be a problem.&nbsp;</p><p>Concerningly, more than three in 10 workers said they had witnessed discrimination against someone else because of their weight and over a third of people (35%) who reported weight discrimination in their place of work saw no action taken as part of their complaint.&nbsp;</p><p>In fact, 4 in 10 of UK employees (40%) didn’t report wight discrimination totheir workplace HR department as they did not consider it serious enough to report.&nbsp;</p><p>The <em>Weight Discrimination at Work (2023) Report</em>, highlights how prejudice based on weight was entrenched in many workplaces and often goes unchallenged.&nbsp;</p><p>While the Discrimination Act makes it illegal to discriminate based on age, disability, gender reassignment, marriage and civil partnership, pregnancy and maternity, race, religion or belief, sex, and sexual orientation – weight isn’t a classed characteristic, with no legal protection to those who experience it.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>According to the data from Pearn Kandola, weight discrimination can start even before an individual joins a company. More than 1 in 10 (11%) would decide against hiring someone who is overweight, believing they are unhealthy (31%), lazy (21%) and unmotivated (17%).&nbsp;</p><p>The impact of weight stigma can have a widespread impact on the workforce, as 1 in 5 (20%) men and 13% of women believe that their weight has had a detrimental impact on their career prospects.&nbsp;</p><p>To discuss the findings of their research, is Professor Binna Kandola OBE, diversity and inclusion specialist from Pearn Kandola, who can discuss why weight discrimination is still an issue and can explain what is needed to be done to address it in the workplace.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>About Pearn Kandola</strong></p><p>Pearn Kandola LLP is a Business Psychology consultancy based in Oxford with expertise in the areas of Diversity &amp; Inclusion, Inclusive Recruitment and Inclusive Development. It develops and delivers tailored, innovative, pragmatic and cost-effective solutions to develop the potential and performance for businesses and their people.</p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION: </strong></h4><p class="ql-align-justify">The <em>Weight Discrimination at Work (2023) Report</em> was carried out by Pearn Kandola. The research is a study identifying people’s attitudes, perceptions and experiences of weight discrimination at work. Additionally, it gauges the action taken by organisations and the perceived impact this has by employees and concludes by presenting implications and recommendations for organisations. This report presents our findings from respondents living and working in the UK in 2023.</p><p>UsingProlific (an online research recruitment platform), an online survey collected data from 1,427 respondents in the UK. The criteria to be included in the analysis were: respondents had to be currently employed and living in the UK.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Professor Binna Kandola OBE,</strong> diversity and inclusion specialist from <strong>Pearn Kandola,</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>TIME TO TACKLE WEIGHT DISCRIMINATION IN THE WORKPLACE.</strong></p><p>Discrimination against overweight people is rife across the UK’s workplaces, according to a major new report looking at a deeply entrenched prejudice.</p><p>Research released today reveals more than two-thirds of employees (69%) believe weight discrimination exists in their workplace, with nearly half of respondents (47%) considering it to be a problem.&nbsp;</p><p>Concerningly, more than three in 10 workers said they had witnessed discrimination against someone else because of their weight and over a third of people (35%) who reported weight discrimination in their place of work saw no action taken as part of their complaint.&nbsp;</p><p>In fact, 4 in 10 of UK employees (40%) didn’t report wight discrimination totheir workplace HR department as they did not consider it serious enough to report.&nbsp;</p><p>The <em>Weight Discrimination at Work (2023) Report</em>, highlights how prejudice based on weight was entrenched in many workplaces and often goes unchallenged.&nbsp;</p><p>While the Discrimination Act makes it illegal to discriminate based on age, disability, gender reassignment, marriage and civil partnership, pregnancy and maternity, race, religion or belief, sex, and sexual orientation – weight isn’t a classed characteristic, with no legal protection to those who experience it.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>According to the data from Pearn Kandola, weight discrimination can start even before an individual joins a company. More than 1 in 10 (11%) would decide against hiring someone who is overweight, believing they are unhealthy (31%), lazy (21%) and unmotivated (17%).&nbsp;</p><p>The impact of weight stigma can have a widespread impact on the workforce, as 1 in 5 (20%) men and 13% of women believe that their weight has had a detrimental impact on their career prospects.&nbsp;</p><p>To discuss the findings of their research, is Professor Binna Kandola OBE, diversity and inclusion specialist from Pearn Kandola, who can discuss why weight discrimination is still an issue and can explain what is needed to be done to address it in the workplace.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>About Pearn Kandola</strong></p><p>Pearn Kandola LLP is a Business Psychology consultancy based in Oxford with expertise in the areas of Diversity &amp; Inclusion, Inclusive Recruitment and Inclusive Development. It develops and delivers tailored, innovative, pragmatic and cost-effective solutions to develop the potential and performance for businesses and their people.</p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION: </strong></h4><p class="ql-align-justify">The <em>Weight Discrimination at Work (2023) Report</em> was carried out by Pearn Kandola. The research is a study identifying people’s attitudes, perceptions and experiences of weight discrimination at work. Additionally, it gauges the action taken by organisations and the perceived impact this has by employees and concludes by presenting implications and recommendations for organisations. This report presents our findings from respondents living and working in the UK in 2023.</p><p>UsingProlific (an online research recruitment platform), an online survey collected data from 1,427 respondents in the UK. The criteria to be included in the analysis were: respondents had to be currently employed and living in the UK.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">03bee9b5-7ab0-4a8c-8b4a-e1b506a9d602</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/e59e698f-71cf-423f-b491-d359415c61ee/Podcast-Radio-Business-Professor-Kandola-03-08-23.mp3" length="31459786" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:06</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>WAIT 2 DAYS AND 21 HOURS TO AVOID BUYER’S REGRET | Fiona Anderson, Managing Director of Cards at Vanquis</title><itunes:title>WAIT 2 DAYS AND 21 HOURS TO AVOID BUYER’S REGRET | Fiona Anderson, Managing Director of Cards at Vanquis</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Fiona Anderson, Managing Director of Cards at Vanquis</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WAIT 2 DAYS AND 21 HOURS TO AVOID BUYER’S REGRET.</strong></p><p>With the ease of online shopping 24-hours-day, it’s easier than ever to spend money and buy something almost instantly. But how often do you regret it? Well, regret no more as there’s some Maths worth listening to. </p><p>It’s been revealed that the ideal time to wait before making a purchase is <strong>2 days and 21 hours.</strong> That’s the answer Mathematician Bobby Seagull has come up with when he ran the numbers. His advice – wait…wait…and wait some more.</p><p>This comes as new research from Vanquis has found the average UK adult makes no less than seven impulse purchases, worth £150 or more, each year. That’s at least £1,050 of hard earned cash we may end up regretting spending.</p><p>Generation Z are the most likely to buy without deliberation, with an average 14 impulse buys worth £2,100.</p><p>As a nation, the items we most regret buying are bikes (19%), games consoles and gadgets (17%) and clothes (16%) – with the least being experiences (6%) such as holidays and weekends away, and household items such as freezers (13%) and fridges (11%). </p><p>Interestingly, household items have the best cost-per-use figure, according to Bobby’s mathematical formula. He found that hoovers have the lowest average cost per use, followed closely by freezers and fridges.</p><p>When looking at the <em>why</em>, 50% say they simply enjoy treating themselves, with almost a third (31%) admitting to using an impulse purchase in an attempt to make themselves feel better.</p><h4><strong><u>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</u></strong></h4><p><strong>About Vanquis </strong>Vanquis offers credit cards and loans for people who want to improve their credit profile. With online servicing via their award-winning app (Moneyfacts Consumer Awards 2023), Vanquis empowers customers to take control of their finances, helping them on their journey to an improved financial future. To date, Vanquis has accepted over 5 million customers who want to improve their credit score. Established in 2002, Vanquis is a subsidiary of Vanquis Banking Group. <a href="http://www.vanquis.co.uk" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.vanquis.co.uk</a></p><h4><strong><u>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</u></strong></h4><p>Mathematician and National Numeracy Ambassador Bobby Seagull modelled data supplied by Censuswide to create two Mindful Spending formulas. The first formula found people should wait 69.7 hours between finding an item and deciding to purchase it, to avoid regretting their purchase. The second formula calculated the individual cost-per-use across 21 different purchasing categories.</p><p>Unless otherwise stated, Vanquis commissioned Censuswide to survey 4,000 UK adults in July 2023 among a sample of 4,000 18+ Nationally representative consumers. Censuswide abides by and employs members of the Market Research Society and follows the MRS code of conduct which is based on the ESOMAR principles.</p><p>&nbsp;</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Fiona Anderson, Managing Director of Cards at Vanquis</strong> speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>WAIT 2 DAYS AND 21 HOURS TO AVOID BUYER’S REGRET.</strong></p><p>With the ease of online shopping 24-hours-day, it’s easier than ever to spend money and buy something almost instantly. But how often do you regret it? Well, regret no more as there’s some Maths worth listening to. </p><p>It’s been revealed that the ideal time to wait before making a purchase is <strong>2 days and 21 hours.</strong> That’s the answer Mathematician Bobby Seagull has come up with when he ran the numbers. His advice – wait…wait…and wait some more.</p><p>This comes as new research from Vanquis has found the average UK adult makes no less than seven impulse purchases, worth £150 or more, each year. That’s at least £1,050 of hard earned cash we may end up regretting spending.</p><p>Generation Z are the most likely to buy without deliberation, with an average 14 impulse buys worth £2,100.</p><p>As a nation, the items we most regret buying are bikes (19%), games consoles and gadgets (17%) and clothes (16%) – with the least being experiences (6%) such as holidays and weekends away, and household items such as freezers (13%) and fridges (11%). </p><p>Interestingly, household items have the best cost-per-use figure, according to Bobby’s mathematical formula. He found that hoovers have the lowest average cost per use, followed closely by freezers and fridges.</p><p>When looking at the <em>why</em>, 50% say they simply enjoy treating themselves, with almost a third (31%) admitting to using an impulse purchase in an attempt to make themselves feel better.</p><h4><strong><u>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</u></strong></h4><p><strong>About Vanquis </strong>Vanquis offers credit cards and loans for people who want to improve their credit profile. With online servicing via their award-winning app (Moneyfacts Consumer Awards 2023), Vanquis empowers customers to take control of their finances, helping them on their journey to an improved financial future. To date, Vanquis has accepted over 5 million customers who want to improve their credit score. Established in 2002, Vanquis is a subsidiary of Vanquis Banking Group. <a href="http://www.vanquis.co.uk" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.vanquis.co.uk</a></p><h4><strong><u>RESEARCH INFORMATION:</u></strong></h4><p>Mathematician and National Numeracy Ambassador Bobby Seagull modelled data supplied by Censuswide to create two Mindful Spending formulas. The first formula found people should wait 69.7 hours between finding an item and deciding to purchase it, to avoid regretting their purchase. The second formula calculated the individual cost-per-use across 21 different purchasing categories.</p><p>Unless otherwise stated, Vanquis commissioned Censuswide to survey 4,000 UK adults in July 2023 among a sample of 4,000 18+ Nationally representative consumers. Censuswide abides by and employs members of the Market Research Society and follows the MRS code of conduct which is based on the ESOMAR principles.</p><p>&nbsp;</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">e64214a0-cd61-4cae-9b87-b0441465bf7a</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 10 Aug 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/44727bc4-0037-4bd4-821a-44426f096fd2/Podcast-Radio-Business-Fiona-Anderson-09-08-23.mp3" length="37119999" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:28</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>TIME TO TACKLE WEIGHT DISCRIMINATION IN THE WORKPLACE | Professor Binna Kandola OBE</title><itunes:title>TIME TO TACKLE WEIGHT DISCRIMINATION IN THE WORKPLACE | Professor Binna Kandola OBE</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Professor Binna Kandola OBE, diversity and inclusion specialist from Pearn Kandola, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss<strong> TIME TO TACKLE WEIGHT DISCRIMINATION IN THE WORKPLACE.</strong></p><p>Discrimination against overweight people is rife in workplaces across the country with 69% of employees believing weight discrimination exists in their workplace, 47% considering it to be a problem and 32% saying they have witnessed discrimination against someone else because of their weight.</p><p>But, 35% of those reporting weight discrimination in their place of work saw no action taken from their complaint, according to Pearn Kandola research which highlights two in five of employees did not report workplace weight discrimination because they did not consider it serious enough to report.</p><p>Prejudice based on weight is entrenched in many workplaces and often goes unchallenged with no legal protection afforded by the Discrimination Actas weight is not a classed characteristic. It can begin before employment with one in nine (11%) saying they would decide against hiring someone who is overweight, believing they are unhealthy (31%), lazy (21%) and unmotivated (17%) - a fifth of men and one in eight (13%) of women believe their weight has had a detrimental impact on their career prospects. </p><h4><strong><u>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</u></strong></h4><p><strong>About Pearn Kandola</strong></p><p><strong><span class="ql-cursor">﻿</span></strong>Pearn Kandola LLP is a Business Psychology consultancy based in Oxford with expertise in the areas of Diversity &amp; Inclusion, Inclusive Recruitment and Inclusive Development. It develops and delivers tailored, innovative, pragmatic and cost-effective solutions to develop the potential and performance for businesses and their people.</p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p class="ql-align-justify">The <em>Weight Discrimination at Work (2023) Report </em>was carried out by Pearn Kandola. The research is a study identifying people’s attitudes, perceptions and experiences of weight discrimination at work. Additionally, it gauges the action taken by organisations and the perceived impact this has by employees and concludes by presenting implications and recommendations for organisations.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">This report presents our findings from respondents living and working in the UK in 2023. Using Prolific (an online research recruitment platform), an online survey collected data from 1,427 respondents in the UK. The criteria to be included in the analysis were: respondents had to be currently employed and living in the UK.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Professor Binna Kandola OBE, diversity and inclusion specialist from Pearn Kandola, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss<strong> TIME TO TACKLE WEIGHT DISCRIMINATION IN THE WORKPLACE.</strong></p><p>Discrimination against overweight people is rife in workplaces across the country with 69% of employees believing weight discrimination exists in their workplace, 47% considering it to be a problem and 32% saying they have witnessed discrimination against someone else because of their weight.</p><p>But, 35% of those reporting weight discrimination in their place of work saw no action taken from their complaint, according to Pearn Kandola research which highlights two in five of employees did not report workplace weight discrimination because they did not consider it serious enough to report.</p><p>Prejudice based on weight is entrenched in many workplaces and often goes unchallenged with no legal protection afforded by the Discrimination Actas weight is not a classed characteristic. It can begin before employment with one in nine (11%) saying they would decide against hiring someone who is overweight, believing they are unhealthy (31%), lazy (21%) and unmotivated (17%) - a fifth of men and one in eight (13%) of women believe their weight has had a detrimental impact on their career prospects. </p><h4><strong><u>ADDITIONAL INFORMATION</u></strong></h4><p><strong>About Pearn Kandola</strong></p><p><strong><span class="ql-cursor">﻿</span></strong>Pearn Kandola LLP is a Business Psychology consultancy based in Oxford with expertise in the areas of Diversity &amp; Inclusion, Inclusive Recruitment and Inclusive Development. It develops and delivers tailored, innovative, pragmatic and cost-effective solutions to develop the potential and performance for businesses and their people.</p><h4><strong>BACKGROUND AND REGIONAL INFORMATION:</strong></h4><p class="ql-align-justify">The <em>Weight Discrimination at Work (2023) Report </em>was carried out by Pearn Kandola. The research is a study identifying people’s attitudes, perceptions and experiences of weight discrimination at work. Additionally, it gauges the action taken by organisations and the perceived impact this has by employees and concludes by presenting implications and recommendations for organisations.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">This report presents our findings from respondents living and working in the UK in 2023. Using Prolific (an online research recruitment platform), an online survey collected data from 1,427 respondents in the UK. The criteria to be included in the analysis were: respondents had to be currently employed and living in the UK.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">196ceaee-a3b8-4c68-beaa-5c394f0a67ac</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 08 Aug 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/0c482253-d342-437c-b532-912e82ca8e6f/Podcast-Radio-Business-Professor-Kandola-03-08-23.mp3" length="31459786" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:06</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>MUSIC TOURISM HITS RIGHT NOTES FOR UK ECONOMY | J D Donovan</title><itunes:title>MUSIC TOURISM HITS RIGHT NOTES FOR UK ECONOMY | J D Donovan</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>JD Donovan, Creative Industries Liaison at LCCM talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>Music Tourism Hits The Right Notes#</strong></p><p>UK Music has today published <em>Here, There and Everywhere </em>– a new report that reveals the huge contribution of music tourism to the UK economy, celebrates music’s regional contribution and sets out a plan for local authorities to enhance local music sectors. </p><p>The numbers show in certain terms what many felt in 2022: the excitement for live music to come back for the first full year since the COVID-19 pandemic. With 14.4 million music tourists helping to generate £6.6 billion in spending across the year and supporting 56,000 full-time jobs, it was quite the return.</p><p>With this comes the growing recognition of the need to support and boost music at the regional level to ensure the UK’s music scene can thrive. Local authorities are now actively exploring innovative strategies and initiatives to leverage music tourism as a driver of economic and cultural growth. This is where the report’s toolkit to transform cities, towns and regions into music powerhouses can help.</p><p>As the report demonstrates, music has been a key ingredient in the success stories of countless towns and cities. By harnessing the power of music, regions across the UK can generate thousands more jobs, boost economic growth and attract even more visitors. Music offers huge potential for transformative placemaking – whether you are a policymaker, an industry professional or someone who cares about your local area, this report will have relevance. The final version of can be found <a href="https://www.ukmusic.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Here-There-and-Everywhere-2023-UK-Music.pdf" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">here</a>.</p><ul><li><strong class="ql-size-small">JD Donovan, Creative Industries Liaison at LCCM</strong></li></ul><br/><p><em class="ql-size-small">Bio: JD Donovan is a platinum-selling, multi-million-streaming young music executive. JD has worked with some of the biggest global names in music after getting his break at 22 under US ‘super-producer’ Dallas Austin as a staff writer and producer. He struck out on his own in 2017 founding his own specialist agency focused on developing new industry talents in an ethical way and consulting for industry companies on artist relations and marketing. At LCCM (London College of Contemporary Music) JD works in-house to fuel the growth of emerging artists, songwriters, producers and executives including industry partnerships. JD’s recent roll-call of clients and collaborators includes Mabel, Desiinger, Clean Bandit, SyCo, XFactor and AEG Festivals.JD can provide expert insight and comment on: Music education,Widening Access and Participation, artist development, music legal cases/disputes, Music/Celebrity developments &amp; insight.</em></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>JD Donovan, Creative Industries Liaison at LCCM talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why <strong>Music Tourism Hits The Right Notes#</strong></p><p>UK Music has today published <em>Here, There and Everywhere </em>– a new report that reveals the huge contribution of music tourism to the UK economy, celebrates music’s regional contribution and sets out a plan for local authorities to enhance local music sectors. </p><p>The numbers show in certain terms what many felt in 2022: the excitement for live music to come back for the first full year since the COVID-19 pandemic. With 14.4 million music tourists helping to generate £6.6 billion in spending across the year and supporting 56,000 full-time jobs, it was quite the return.</p><p>With this comes the growing recognition of the need to support and boost music at the regional level to ensure the UK’s music scene can thrive. Local authorities are now actively exploring innovative strategies and initiatives to leverage music tourism as a driver of economic and cultural growth. This is where the report’s toolkit to transform cities, towns and regions into music powerhouses can help.</p><p>As the report demonstrates, music has been a key ingredient in the success stories of countless towns and cities. By harnessing the power of music, regions across the UK can generate thousands more jobs, boost economic growth and attract even more visitors. Music offers huge potential for transformative placemaking – whether you are a policymaker, an industry professional or someone who cares about your local area, this report will have relevance. The final version of can be found <a href="https://www.ukmusic.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Here-There-and-Everywhere-2023-UK-Music.pdf" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">here</a>.</p><ul><li><strong class="ql-size-small">JD Donovan, Creative Industries Liaison at LCCM</strong></li></ul><br/><p><em class="ql-size-small">Bio: JD Donovan is a platinum-selling, multi-million-streaming young music executive. JD has worked with some of the biggest global names in music after getting his break at 22 under US ‘super-producer’ Dallas Austin as a staff writer and producer. He struck out on his own in 2017 founding his own specialist agency focused on developing new industry talents in an ethical way and consulting for industry companies on artist relations and marketing. At LCCM (London College of Contemporary Music) JD works in-house to fuel the growth of emerging artists, songwriters, producers and executives including industry partnerships. JD’s recent roll-call of clients and collaborators includes Mabel, Desiinger, Clean Bandit, SyCo, XFactor and AEG Festivals.JD can provide expert insight and comment on: Music education,Widening Access and Participation, artist development, music legal cases/disputes, Music/Celebrity developments &amp; insight.</em></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">41fb5879-cdc6-4d85-a6a4-8411703adfac</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 20 Jul 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/a37e811b-ab2d-4304-b850-2404e823a729/Podcast-Radio-Business-J-D-Donovan-19-07-23.mp3" length="39440717" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:26</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>CAN INFRASTRUCTURE KEEP UP WITH INNOVATION AND OUR DIGITAL DEMAND? | Chintan Patel</title><itunes:title>CAN INFRASTRUCTURE KEEP UP WITH INNOVATION AND OUR DIGITAL DEMAND? | Chintan Patel</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chintan Patel, Chief Technology Officer for Cisco UK &amp; Ireland</strong>  speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>CAN INFRASTRUCTURE KEEP UP WITH INNOVATION AND OUR DIGITAL DEMAND?</strong></p><p>From AI to quantum, every new technology milestone requires more from networks that were built for a world of web browsing and email, and at a time when consumer expectations are growing – not just for speed, but security and sustainability too – the internet is cementing its role as critical national infrastructure (79% agree).</p><p>In fact, new data from the broadband survey highlights how networks must scale to support the growing Internet of Things (IoT), with new research finding that more than half of consumers (54%) have indicated feeling positive about new ways to connect their homes and lives to the internet.</p><p><strong>In tech:</strong> AI is the biggest technological advancement since the Internet. Promising to vastly improve productivity, creating opportunities to innovate and transform entire sectors. Every AI query, every AI model programmed requires networks to support it – with increasing demands on capacity. In parallel, developments in Quantum computing mean that we may well soon see a need for ‘Quantum networking’. The ability to secure communications at rates never seen before.</p><p><strong>From consumers:</strong> In parallel, we’re still in the infancy of what’s possible when we start to connect ‘things’ and processes, with new research finding a majority already have made the switch, or expect to have, with their cars (67%), lights (74%), appliances (71%), energy (76%) and water (64%) connected to the internet.</p><p>Despite our reliance on and acceptance of moving more of our lives online, security remains a concern with traditional passwords (53%) still the way we protect ourselves online, but surprisingly, only 1 in 4 of us have switched on our router’s firewall despite 57% worrying about cybercriminals hacking our devices. While we want connectivity that will deliver speed as a priority (40%),that will be secure (38%), 65% are now concerned about its carbon footprint.</p><ol><li><a href="https://www.uktech.news/guest-posts/generative-ai-bottlenecks-uk-20230529" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.uktech.news/guest-posts/generative-ai-bottlenecks-uk-20230529</a></li><li><a href="https://blog.google/around-the-globe/google-europe/unlocking-the-ai-powered-opportunity-in-the-uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://blog.google/around-the-globe/google-europe/unlocking-the-ai-powered-opportunity-in-the-uk/</a></li></ol><br/><p><strong>About the Cisco Broadband Survey</strong>&nbsp;</p><p>The Cisco Broadband Survey is based on a survey of 21,629 workers across 12 countries: UK, Germany, Italy, France, Switzerland, Poland, Spain, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Sweden, UAE and the Netherlands. It was completed during January and February 2023. The sample included respondents based in every region of each country, who either work full-time remotely; full-time in an office; hybrid, between home and the office; or on the frontline. The poll was conducted by independent research consultancy Censuswide, who abide by and employ members of the Market Research Society - which is based on the ESOMAR principles.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>About Cisco</strong>&nbsp;</p><p>Cisco (NASDAQ: CSCO) is the worldwide technology leader that securely connects everything to make anything possible. Our purpose is to power an inclusive future for all by helping our customers reimagine their applications, power hybrid work, secure their enterprise, transform their infrastructure, and meet their sustainability goals</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chintan Patel, Chief Technology Officer for Cisco UK &amp; Ireland</strong>  speaks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss <strong>CAN INFRASTRUCTURE KEEP UP WITH INNOVATION AND OUR DIGITAL DEMAND?</strong></p><p>From AI to quantum, every new technology milestone requires more from networks that were built for a world of web browsing and email, and at a time when consumer expectations are growing – not just for speed, but security and sustainability too – the internet is cementing its role as critical national infrastructure (79% agree).</p><p>In fact, new data from the broadband survey highlights how networks must scale to support the growing Internet of Things (IoT), with new research finding that more than half of consumers (54%) have indicated feeling positive about new ways to connect their homes and lives to the internet.</p><p><strong>In tech:</strong> AI is the biggest technological advancement since the Internet. Promising to vastly improve productivity, creating opportunities to innovate and transform entire sectors. Every AI query, every AI model programmed requires networks to support it – with increasing demands on capacity. In parallel, developments in Quantum computing mean that we may well soon see a need for ‘Quantum networking’. The ability to secure communications at rates never seen before.</p><p><strong>From consumers:</strong> In parallel, we’re still in the infancy of what’s possible when we start to connect ‘things’ and processes, with new research finding a majority already have made the switch, or expect to have, with their cars (67%), lights (74%), appliances (71%), energy (76%) and water (64%) connected to the internet.</p><p>Despite our reliance on and acceptance of moving more of our lives online, security remains a concern with traditional passwords (53%) still the way we protect ourselves online, but surprisingly, only 1 in 4 of us have switched on our router’s firewall despite 57% worrying about cybercriminals hacking our devices. While we want connectivity that will deliver speed as a priority (40%),that will be secure (38%), 65% are now concerned about its carbon footprint.</p><ol><li><a href="https://www.uktech.news/guest-posts/generative-ai-bottlenecks-uk-20230529" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.uktech.news/guest-posts/generative-ai-bottlenecks-uk-20230529</a></li><li><a href="https://blog.google/around-the-globe/google-europe/unlocking-the-ai-powered-opportunity-in-the-uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://blog.google/around-the-globe/google-europe/unlocking-the-ai-powered-opportunity-in-the-uk/</a></li></ol><br/><p><strong>About the Cisco Broadband Survey</strong>&nbsp;</p><p>The Cisco Broadband Survey is based on a survey of 21,629 workers across 12 countries: UK, Germany, Italy, France, Switzerland, Poland, Spain, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Sweden, UAE and the Netherlands. It was completed during January and February 2023. The sample included respondents based in every region of each country, who either work full-time remotely; full-time in an office; hybrid, between home and the office; or on the frontline. The poll was conducted by independent research consultancy Censuswide, who abide by and employ members of the Market Research Society - which is based on the ESOMAR principles.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>About Cisco</strong>&nbsp;</p><p>Cisco (NASDAQ: CSCO) is the worldwide technology leader that securely connects everything to make anything possible. Our purpose is to power an inclusive future for all by helping our customers reimagine their applications, power hybrid work, secure their enterprise, transform their infrastructure, and meet their sustainability goals</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">3cb1243e-dd4b-4a29-910a-692eb33fc5b8</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 20 Jul 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/6a7901fd-a176-4e9d-806a-f6ac33c8999d/Podcast-Radio-Business-Chintan-Patel-14-07-23.mp3" length="32766954" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:39</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>BUSINESSES STRUGGLING TO RETAIN DIVERSE TECH TALENT | Priya Lakhani</title><itunes:title>BUSINESSES STRUGGLING TO RETAIN DIVERSE TECH TALENT | Priya Lakhani</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Priya Lakhani, CEO &amp; Founder of Century Tech, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss<strong>BUSINESSES STRUGGLING TO RETAIN DIVERSE TECH TALENT.</strong></p><p>The tech sector continues to be a driving force behind the global economy, forecasted only to grow. But, it has yet to wholly address an ongoing  problem – a marked lack of workforce diversity. </p><p>By embracing diversity and creating inclusive workplaces, businesses can improve commercial performance1. However, 64% struggle to retain diverse tech talent, with a digital skills shortage widely publicised. </p><p>Significant progress has been made, but 40% accept they still lack gender diversity, 41% ethnic diversity, 31% neurodiversity, and 34% socio-economic diversity, according to a new report from talent and reskilling specialist, Wiley Edge.&nbsp; </p><p>More must be done. The <em>Diversity in Tech 2023 </em>report from Wiley Edge investigates why this diversity dilemma remains, and makes recommendations as to how it can be addressed.</p><p><strong>Declining Degrees</strong></p><p>Only 4% businesses consider all types of higher education qualifications when hiring for tech roles. Almost three in ten (27%) exclusively hire from top universities, and 44% admit they are more likely to do so. </p><p>However, this is in decline, with 53% considering dropping the degree requirement from certain roles within the next year to open the door to more candidates and widen their talent pool. </p><p>This could be because 45% find candidates often lack core technical skills despite holding a relevant degree (26% from top universities) while this is only true for 13% who explore a wider talent pool. </p><p>If greater diversity is to be achieved, the belief that candidates need a degree from a top uni to succeed in technology must be addressed, and candidates must be provided more explicit and pragmatic guidelines for accessing the sector.</p><p>Meanwhile, businesses must continue to heed the evidence that a diverse workforce offers much more than placated stakeholders, and value can be leveraged by widening talent searches beyond leading universities.</p><p><strong>The Big Tech Preference</strong></p><p>The tech sector is not limited to Big Tech, but 53% Gen Z tech specialists want to work for Big Tech over any other sectors – with financial services lagging far behind in second place (16%). </p><p>This gravitational pull comes at a time when Big Tech firms are slowing or freezing recruitment, and making redundancies. In the last year alone, Google, Meta, Amazon, and other Big Tech laid off more than 100,000 employees2.</p><p>Fierce competition for these firms is contributing to an environment where Gen Z professionals are struggling to secure roles. Education here is paramount, and the demographic needs to be made aware of the rewarding, well-paid, but often overlooked tech roles elsewhere in the sector.</p><p><strong>Improving Retention with Inclusion</strong></p><p>Despite great strides, three in five (60%) Gen Z tech workers feel uncomfortable in their role due to their gender (33% women), ethnicity (16%), socio-economicbackground (14%), and neurodevelopmental condition/disability (25%).</p><p>Stigma must be tackled, with 18% blaming company culture, 25% bias from managers, and 23% microaggressions or aggressions from colleagues. Structural deficiencies must also be addressed, with 24% lacking mentoring, 20% lacking support for additional needs, 20% lacking career advancement opportunities, and 18% citing poor benefits packages.</p><p><strong>Reskilling to Increase Diversity</strong></p><p>Upskilling and reskilling initiatives have been proven to help improve recruitment drives (59%), retention (56%), and have enhanced workforce engagement (37%). </p><p>A significant majority do back this, with 48% offering one or the other to existing tech employees, and 49% to all. If used more widely, this vital toolwill...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Priya Lakhani, CEO &amp; Founder of Century Tech, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss<strong>BUSINESSES STRUGGLING TO RETAIN DIVERSE TECH TALENT.</strong></p><p>The tech sector continues to be a driving force behind the global economy, forecasted only to grow. But, it has yet to wholly address an ongoing  problem – a marked lack of workforce diversity. </p><p>By embracing diversity and creating inclusive workplaces, businesses can improve commercial performance1. However, 64% struggle to retain diverse tech talent, with a digital skills shortage widely publicised. </p><p>Significant progress has been made, but 40% accept they still lack gender diversity, 41% ethnic diversity, 31% neurodiversity, and 34% socio-economic diversity, according to a new report from talent and reskilling specialist, Wiley Edge.&nbsp; </p><p>More must be done. The <em>Diversity in Tech 2023 </em>report from Wiley Edge investigates why this diversity dilemma remains, and makes recommendations as to how it can be addressed.</p><p><strong>Declining Degrees</strong></p><p>Only 4% businesses consider all types of higher education qualifications when hiring for tech roles. Almost three in ten (27%) exclusively hire from top universities, and 44% admit they are more likely to do so. </p><p>However, this is in decline, with 53% considering dropping the degree requirement from certain roles within the next year to open the door to more candidates and widen their talent pool. </p><p>This could be because 45% find candidates often lack core technical skills despite holding a relevant degree (26% from top universities) while this is only true for 13% who explore a wider talent pool. </p><p>If greater diversity is to be achieved, the belief that candidates need a degree from a top uni to succeed in technology must be addressed, and candidates must be provided more explicit and pragmatic guidelines for accessing the sector.</p><p>Meanwhile, businesses must continue to heed the evidence that a diverse workforce offers much more than placated stakeholders, and value can be leveraged by widening talent searches beyond leading universities.</p><p><strong>The Big Tech Preference</strong></p><p>The tech sector is not limited to Big Tech, but 53% Gen Z tech specialists want to work for Big Tech over any other sectors – with financial services lagging far behind in second place (16%). </p><p>This gravitational pull comes at a time when Big Tech firms are slowing or freezing recruitment, and making redundancies. In the last year alone, Google, Meta, Amazon, and other Big Tech laid off more than 100,000 employees2.</p><p>Fierce competition for these firms is contributing to an environment where Gen Z professionals are struggling to secure roles. Education here is paramount, and the demographic needs to be made aware of the rewarding, well-paid, but often overlooked tech roles elsewhere in the sector.</p><p><strong>Improving Retention with Inclusion</strong></p><p>Despite great strides, three in five (60%) Gen Z tech workers feel uncomfortable in their role due to their gender (33% women), ethnicity (16%), socio-economicbackground (14%), and neurodevelopmental condition/disability (25%).</p><p>Stigma must be tackled, with 18% blaming company culture, 25% bias from managers, and 23% microaggressions or aggressions from colleagues. Structural deficiencies must also be addressed, with 24% lacking mentoring, 20% lacking support for additional needs, 20% lacking career advancement opportunities, and 18% citing poor benefits packages.</p><p><strong>Reskilling to Increase Diversity</strong></p><p>Upskilling and reskilling initiatives have been proven to help improve recruitment drives (59%), retention (56%), and have enhanced workforce engagement (37%). </p><p>A significant majority do back this, with 48% offering one or the other to existing tech employees, and 49% to all. If used more widely, this vital toolwill become vital in cultivating more diverse entry-level talent pipelines. </p><p><strong>Priya Lakhani OBE, Founder &amp; CEO, CENTURY Tech</strong></p><p>Priya Lakhani OBE is the Founder CEO of CENTURY Tech, an artificial intelligence education technology company that develops AI-powered learning tools for schools, colleges, universities and employers across the world.&nbsp;</p><p>Barrister and entrepreneur, Priya founded CENTURY in 2013 after being struck by underachievement rates in schools. A frequent keynote speaker and media commentator, Priya is also a co-founder of The Institute for Ethical AI in Education.</p><p>Priya has been a member of the Secretary of State for Business, Innovation and Skills’ Entrepreneurs’ Forum and an advisory board member to several educational/skills organisations. Priya was awarded Business Entrepreneur of the Year in 2009, The Mayor of London Fund’s Special Recognition Award 2016 and Officer of the Order of the British Empire in 2014.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">8d49c8b1-227c-4216-9879-e677691b9a91</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 13 Jul 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/cd30422b-dd28-4a1f-aae2-63bfc953a386/Podcast-Radio-Business-Priya-Lakhani-12-07-23.mp3" length="47817664" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>19:55</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>TIME TO RAISE THE PROFILES OF WOMEN AND CLOSE THE GENDER BREAK | Lisa Johnson</title><itunes:title>TIME TO RAISE THE PROFILES OF WOMEN AND CLOSE THE GENDER BREAK | Lisa Johnson</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Lisa Johnson, Business Strategist &amp; Entreprenur  talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why it's <strong>TIME TO RAISE THE PROFILES OF WOMEN AND CLOSE THE GENDER BREAK.</strong></p><p>Women created a record number <a href="https://www.natwestgroup.com/news-and-insights/latest-stories/enterprise/2023/feb/the-alison-rose-review-of-female-entrepreneurship.html" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">of 151,603 new companies last year</a> , yet there’s still a stark gender inequality when it comes to raising early-stage finance.</p><p>New figures reveal male-owned startups receive, on average, <a href="https://startups.co.uk/news/next-gen-female-entrepreneurs/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">6.2X as much funding as those founded by women</a>. The research also shows, on average, half of female-led companies are self-funded compared to just 32% of male organisations.</p><p>It comes as no surprise that female entrepreneurs come up against additional barriers when starting a business, compared to their male counterparts, including unconscious bias from those in the business world, being responsible for domestic household duties and childcare. </p><p><em>“Who runs the world? Girls!”</em> –  are  memorable  Beyonce lyrics from 2011…however there still seems to be an ‘ego gap’ when it comes to women receiving the recognition they deserve for their success in the business world.</p><p>Business Strategist and female business owner Lisa Johnson believes this knocks the confidence of women who have a desire to start their own business and/or applying for the recognition they deserve. Lisa is of the view that women get stick and ridiculed for bragging about their abilities and achievements whereas men are seen as strong for doing the same.</p><p>Lisa, a successful entrepreneur herself has avoided recognition by way of awards until this year, where she is the only female finalist in the Great British Entrepreneur Awards. </p><p>She is now encouraging other female entrepreneurs to do the same and raise the profile of women in business and show why record numbers of women are finding success in running their own business.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Lisa Johnson, Business Strategist &amp; Entreprenur  talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss why it's <strong>TIME TO RAISE THE PROFILES OF WOMEN AND CLOSE THE GENDER BREAK.</strong></p><p>Women created a record number <a href="https://www.natwestgroup.com/news-and-insights/latest-stories/enterprise/2023/feb/the-alison-rose-review-of-female-entrepreneurship.html" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">of 151,603 new companies last year</a> , yet there’s still a stark gender inequality when it comes to raising early-stage finance.</p><p>New figures reveal male-owned startups receive, on average, <a href="https://startups.co.uk/news/next-gen-female-entrepreneurs/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">6.2X as much funding as those founded by women</a>. The research also shows, on average, half of female-led companies are self-funded compared to just 32% of male organisations.</p><p>It comes as no surprise that female entrepreneurs come up against additional barriers when starting a business, compared to their male counterparts, including unconscious bias from those in the business world, being responsible for domestic household duties and childcare. </p><p><em>“Who runs the world? Girls!”</em> –  are  memorable  Beyonce lyrics from 2011…however there still seems to be an ‘ego gap’ when it comes to women receiving the recognition they deserve for their success in the business world.</p><p>Business Strategist and female business owner Lisa Johnson believes this knocks the confidence of women who have a desire to start their own business and/or applying for the recognition they deserve. Lisa is of the view that women get stick and ridiculed for bragging about their abilities and achievements whereas men are seen as strong for doing the same.</p><p>Lisa, a successful entrepreneur herself has avoided recognition by way of awards until this year, where she is the only female finalist in the Great British Entrepreneur Awards. </p><p>She is now encouraging other female entrepreneurs to do the same and raise the profile of women in business and show why record numbers of women are finding success in running their own business.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">6e245e55-c348-458e-a211-43535dd62728</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 13 Jul 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/9dc48060-ea70-4d4c-8494-dea209b55e50/Podcast-Radio-Business-Lisa-Johnson-10-07-23.mp3" length="37029093" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:26</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>BRITS HEADING DOWN UNDER: AUSTRALIA EXTENDS WORKING HOLIDAY VISA AGE TO 35</title><itunes:title>BRITS HEADING DOWN UNDER: AUSTRALIA EXTENDS WORKING HOLIDAY VISA AGE TO 35</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sally Cope</strong>, Tourism Australia’s Regional General Manager for UK &amp; Northern Europe<strong> </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about Australia as it extends the Working Holiday Via Age to 35.</p><p>For many, working abroad is nothing more than a pipe dream. But that could soon change from tomorrow (1st July 2023) with Australia’s long-awaited amendment to their Working Holiday Visa maximum age limit coming into place.</p><p>There is now a five-year increase to the maximum age limit taking it to 35 from the original 30 years of age, meaning more Brits between the ages of 18-35 have the chance to work “down under”.</p><p>The first change to the visa since it was introduced in 1975, it comes as the UK-Australia Free Trade Agreement (UKFTA) enters into force from tomorrow (1st July 2023), with further changes to Australia’s Working Holiday Visa expected exactly a year later (1st July 2024), where Brits will be able to apply for up to three years to live and work in Australia without any specified work requirements.</p><p>The life-changing opportunity could be grabbed by many UK workers, with new research from Tourism Australia revealing 45% of 25-to-34-year-olds wished they had taken a gap year when they had the chance, and close to 1 in 10 who believe they are too old to start again.</p><p>Close to half of 25- to 34-year-olds (43%) are considering working abroad to advance their careers, so this five-year age range increase presents a world of openings to these young professionals.</p><p>The higher minimum wage than the UK, coupled with an unemployment rate that remains near its lowest since the mid-1970s, also makes Australia an attractive option. The 2,800 hours of sunshine annually contributes to why weather (30%), lifestyle (27%) and new experiences (23%) are among the top reasons Brits choose to live and work abroad.</p><p>Sally Cope, Tourism Australia’s Regional General Manager for UK &amp; Northern Europe, believes the five-year age range increase presents a world of openings to young professionals and also offers an incredible lifestyle with Australia ready to welcome them.</p><p>For more information on living and working in Australia, visit <a href="http://www.australia.com/workingholiday" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.australia.com/workingholiday</a></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sally Cope</strong>, Tourism Australia’s Regional General Manager for UK &amp; Northern Europe<strong> </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about Australia as it extends the Working Holiday Via Age to 35.</p><p>For many, working abroad is nothing more than a pipe dream. But that could soon change from tomorrow (1st July 2023) with Australia’s long-awaited amendment to their Working Holiday Visa maximum age limit coming into place.</p><p>There is now a five-year increase to the maximum age limit taking it to 35 from the original 30 years of age, meaning more Brits between the ages of 18-35 have the chance to work “down under”.</p><p>The first change to the visa since it was introduced in 1975, it comes as the UK-Australia Free Trade Agreement (UKFTA) enters into force from tomorrow (1st July 2023), with further changes to Australia’s Working Holiday Visa expected exactly a year later (1st July 2024), where Brits will be able to apply for up to three years to live and work in Australia without any specified work requirements.</p><p>The life-changing opportunity could be grabbed by many UK workers, with new research from Tourism Australia revealing 45% of 25-to-34-year-olds wished they had taken a gap year when they had the chance, and close to 1 in 10 who believe they are too old to start again.</p><p>Close to half of 25- to 34-year-olds (43%) are considering working abroad to advance their careers, so this five-year age range increase presents a world of openings to these young professionals.</p><p>The higher minimum wage than the UK, coupled with an unemployment rate that remains near its lowest since the mid-1970s, also makes Australia an attractive option. The 2,800 hours of sunshine annually contributes to why weather (30%), lifestyle (27%) and new experiences (23%) are among the top reasons Brits choose to live and work abroad.</p><p>Sally Cope, Tourism Australia’s Regional General Manager for UK &amp; Northern Europe, believes the five-year age range increase presents a world of openings to young professionals and also offers an incredible lifestyle with Australia ready to welcome them.</p><p>For more information on living and working in Australia, visit <a href="http://www.australia.com/workingholiday" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.australia.com/workingholiday</a></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">5f120f5b-9024-44aa-b51c-f7a1c258eef4</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 03 Jul 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/879a0d50-7bed-49cd-95c3-e824e736035a/Podcast-Radio-Business-Sally-Cope-30-06-23.mp3" length="20124733" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>08:23</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>OVERLOOKING HIDDEN TALENT POOL AS UK SKILLS GAP REMAINS HIGH | Jane Gratton</title><itunes:title>OVERLOOKING HIDDEN TALENT POOL AS UK SKILLS GAP REMAINS HIGH | Jane Gratton</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jane Gratton, Head of Policy, British Chamber of Commerce </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about how the UK is overlooking hidden talent as the skills gap remains high. </p><p>Almost three in four (73%) UK organisations are experiencing skills shortages,remaining a top challenge facing employers, according to new data in the latest Business Barometer from The Open University and the British Chambers of Commerce. </p><p>The annual report, which provides a temperature check on the UK skills landscape, highlights that despite the ongoing skills shortage, more than half (54%) do not have initiatives, skills programmes, or workplace adjustments in place for specific talent pools – including underrepresented groups, such as people with disabilities or workers from diverse ethnicities.</p><p>The report suggests that employers are missing out on a “hidden talent pool” and an opportunity to “grow your own” talent, at a time where two in four (42%) organisations say they have been prevented from filling roles due to lack of applicants.</p><p>The skills shortage also has a knock-on effect on existing staff morale and wellbeing, with three in four (72%) reporting increased workload on existing staff.</p><p>Organisations also reported an impact on reduced activity or output (42%) and reduced long-term growth plans (40%), meaning the additional pressure is impacting the future of organisations which could lead to further challenges for the economy as well as meeting NetZero and equality, diversity and inclusion goals.</p><p>Another concern is the threat of an ageing workforce retiring without employers having the skills to replace experienced employees, with almost a third (31%) reporting an increase in the number of employees over the age of 50 in the last three years. </p><p>Despite this, 85% do not have a specific initiative in place for workersover 50, while 77% do not have any written annual plans to prepare for people exiting the business.</p><p>While there is a collective effort to address the skills shortage as most organisations (79%) intend to use some form of training for their staff over the next twelve months, the reportreveals that organisations – especially SMEs – lack the necessary expertise and resources to strategically address the skills gaps and challenges effectively. As a result, many firms are trapped in a cycle of continual recruitment and retention challenges.</p><p><strong>About British Chambers of Commerce</strong></p><p>TheBritish Chambers of Commerce (BCC) sits at the heart of a powerful network of 53 Accredited Chambers of Commerce across the UK, representing tens of thousands of businesses of all sizes and within all sectors. Its Global Business Network connects exporters with more than 75 markets around the world.</p><p><a href="http://www.britishchambers.org.uk" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">http://www.britishchambers.org.uk</a></p><p><br></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jane Gratton, Head of Policy, British Chamber of Commerce </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about how the UK is overlooking hidden talent as the skills gap remains high. </p><p>Almost three in four (73%) UK organisations are experiencing skills shortages,remaining a top challenge facing employers, according to new data in the latest Business Barometer from The Open University and the British Chambers of Commerce. </p><p>The annual report, which provides a temperature check on the UK skills landscape, highlights that despite the ongoing skills shortage, more than half (54%) do not have initiatives, skills programmes, or workplace adjustments in place for specific talent pools – including underrepresented groups, such as people with disabilities or workers from diverse ethnicities.</p><p>The report suggests that employers are missing out on a “hidden talent pool” and an opportunity to “grow your own” talent, at a time where two in four (42%) organisations say they have been prevented from filling roles due to lack of applicants.</p><p>The skills shortage also has a knock-on effect on existing staff morale and wellbeing, with three in four (72%) reporting increased workload on existing staff.</p><p>Organisations also reported an impact on reduced activity or output (42%) and reduced long-term growth plans (40%), meaning the additional pressure is impacting the future of organisations which could lead to further challenges for the economy as well as meeting NetZero and equality, diversity and inclusion goals.</p><p>Another concern is the threat of an ageing workforce retiring without employers having the skills to replace experienced employees, with almost a third (31%) reporting an increase in the number of employees over the age of 50 in the last three years. </p><p>Despite this, 85% do not have a specific initiative in place for workersover 50, while 77% do not have any written annual plans to prepare for people exiting the business.</p><p>While there is a collective effort to address the skills shortage as most organisations (79%) intend to use some form of training for their staff over the next twelve months, the reportreveals that organisations – especially SMEs – lack the necessary expertise and resources to strategically address the skills gaps and challenges effectively. As a result, many firms are trapped in a cycle of continual recruitment and retention challenges.</p><p><strong>About British Chambers of Commerce</strong></p><p>TheBritish Chambers of Commerce (BCC) sits at the heart of a powerful network of 53 Accredited Chambers of Commerce across the UK, representing tens of thousands of businesses of all sizes and within all sectors. Its Global Business Network connects exporters with more than 75 markets around the world.</p><p><a href="http://www.britishchambers.org.uk" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">http://www.britishchambers.org.uk</a></p><p><br></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">41757ea7-6a80-461e-abd9-7879d45365fa</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 29 Jun 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/50bf52cc-44f7-45d7-bbd0-164cd9eb2b96/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jane-Gratton-29-06-23.mp3" length="33227754" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:51</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>REFUGEE ENTREPRENEURS SHINE IN UK | Chris Gale</title><itunes:title>REFUGEE ENTREPRENEURS SHINE IN UK | Chris Gale</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chris Gale, Head of Social Impact at eBay</strong>&nbsp;<strong> </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about <strong>CHANGING PERCEPTIONS AND HELPING REFUGEE ENTREPRENEURS TO SHINE.</strong></p><p>The homes for Ukraine scheme and almost 6,000 people who were granted resettlement from Afghanistan, are just a few examples of why the UK is known for being one of the most welcoming countries when people are fleeing conflict.</p><p>Last year the UK government offered protection to<a href="https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/immigration-system-statistics-year-ending-december-2022/how-many-people-do-we-grant-protection-to#:~:text=2.-,Asylum%20applications,number%20for%20almost%202%20decades." rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">23,841 people</a> (including dependants), but the long-term ambition is to enable people seeking asylum to start a new life here in the UK.</p><p><strong>Chris Gale, Head of Social Impact at eBay</strong>, explains how the online marketplace is supporting TERN to help refugees start up their own business and make a life for themselves in the UK.</p><p>Thanks to eBay’s partnership with The Entrepreneurial Refugee Network (TERN), a social enterprise focused on providing mentorship, networking opportunities and access to funding for UK refugee entrepreneurs,&nbsp; those ambitions are already becoming a reality for hundreds of refugees in the UK.</p><p>This World Refugee Day (Tuesday 20thJune 2023), the two organisations have made a joint commitment to support 60-100 refugee entrepreneurs who will be offered startup support, help developing their business acumen and peer-to-peer learning. </p><p>A pilot for the TERN x eBay Seller Programme has already&nbsp; changed the life of Ehsan, who came to the UK from Iran with a degree in electronic engineering. He recently graduated from the Seller Programme, starting his own business the Tech Cell Group. </p><p>Ehsan, who has always been fascinated by technology and used his skills to start his own business, developed an online eBay store restoring electricals which has gone from strength to strength. He’s now sold more than 42,000 refurbished phones and has even recruited two interns, who he is now training to repair electricals too.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chris Gale, Head of Social Impact at eBay</strong>&nbsp;<strong> </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about <strong>CHANGING PERCEPTIONS AND HELPING REFUGEE ENTREPRENEURS TO SHINE.</strong></p><p>The homes for Ukraine scheme and almost 6,000 people who were granted resettlement from Afghanistan, are just a few examples of why the UK is known for being one of the most welcoming countries when people are fleeing conflict.</p><p>Last year the UK government offered protection to<a href="https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/immigration-system-statistics-year-ending-december-2022/how-many-people-do-we-grant-protection-to#:~:text=2.-,Asylum%20applications,number%20for%20almost%202%20decades." rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">23,841 people</a> (including dependants), but the long-term ambition is to enable people seeking asylum to start a new life here in the UK.</p><p><strong>Chris Gale, Head of Social Impact at eBay</strong>, explains how the online marketplace is supporting TERN to help refugees start up their own business and make a life for themselves in the UK.</p><p>Thanks to eBay’s partnership with The Entrepreneurial Refugee Network (TERN), a social enterprise focused on providing mentorship, networking opportunities and access to funding for UK refugee entrepreneurs,&nbsp; those ambitions are already becoming a reality for hundreds of refugees in the UK.</p><p>This World Refugee Day (Tuesday 20thJune 2023), the two organisations have made a joint commitment to support 60-100 refugee entrepreneurs who will be offered startup support, help developing their business acumen and peer-to-peer learning. </p><p>A pilot for the TERN x eBay Seller Programme has already&nbsp; changed the life of Ehsan, who came to the UK from Iran with a degree in electronic engineering. He recently graduated from the Seller Programme, starting his own business the Tech Cell Group. </p><p>Ehsan, who has always been fascinated by technology and used his skills to start his own business, developed an online eBay store restoring electricals which has gone from strength to strength. He’s now sold more than 42,000 refurbished phones and has even recruited two interns, who he is now training to repair electricals too.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">2f1c1470-70d8-452a-a26a-f08d3fd40fba</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 23 Jun 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/702fdb17-b0a6-4e99-a897-3d26b2445853/Podcast-Radio-Business-Chris-Gale-20-06-23.mp3" length="25620897" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:40</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>THE MAPPING TECH THAT COULD RESTORE TRUST IN CARBON CREDIT INDUSTRY | Donna Lyndsay</title><itunes:title>THE MAPPING TECH THAT COULD RESTORE TRUST IN CARBON CREDIT INDUSTRY | Donna Lyndsay</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Donna Lyndsay, Strategic Market Lead – Environment and Sustainability at Ordnance Survey </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about how the <strong>MAPPING TECH THAT COULD RESTORE TRUST IN CARBON CREDIT INDUSTRY WORTH BILLIONS</strong></p><p>A<strong> </strong>pilot scheme, that combines pioneering geospatial technology, Earth observation from space and AI, could provide the blueprint to help accuratelymonitor the booming global industry in carbon offsetting that is worth billions.</p><p>Carbonoffsetting allows countries, companies or even individuals to compensate for their own carbon emissions by purchasing carbon credits.</p><p>These credits are essentially financial investments in schemes that restore large tracts of degraded ecosystems such as woodlands, rainforests or peatlands. These restored ecosystems help to remove largeamounts of carbon from the atmosphere.</p><p>But the industry has attracted controversy over the lack of proper monitoring and accountability. Just how effective is that investment? And how rapidly and effectively is each ecosystem restoration project being repaired?</p><p>Britain’s national mapping service, Ordnance Survey (OS) is piloting a scheme on a peat moor in Yorkshire that could be a game changer for theindustry by providing highly accurate monitoring of such restoration projects.</p><p>OS say that using the innovative technology would embed trust back into the system and would enable investors to understand what they are investing in, the quality of that offset and to accurately measure it for the duration of the fund.</p><p>The pilot scheme involves OS working with the government agency Natural England and scientists from Durham University to analyse the current condition of Thorne and Hatfield Moors, part of Humberhead Peatlands National Nature Reserve near Doncaster.</p><p>The vegetation is separated into different species and then each individualplant is located and identified. Then a digital signature is created for each plant type which will allow satellite imagery and AI to track the change in the different plant types through continual monitoring and recognise how well the peatland is being restored.</p><p>Peatlands,are the largest natural carbon store on land, storing more carbon than is currently in the global atmosphere and have a net cooling effect on climate change but it is estimated that eighty percent of the UK’s peatlands are now degraded as a direct result of drainage for agriculture, burning and peat extraction for horticulture.</p><p>If successful, the technique could be rolled out nationwide to increase investment for large-scale peatland restoration projects from carbon offsetting or carbon credits as the government believes restoration of the nation’s dwindling peatlands can help the UK reach its target of net zero emissions by 2050.</p><p>And if it proves scaleable then OS and partners have the tools to test millions of hectares of sites around the globe.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Donna Lyndsay, Strategic Market Lead – Environment and Sustainability at Ordnance Survey </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about how the <strong>MAPPING TECH THAT COULD RESTORE TRUST IN CARBON CREDIT INDUSTRY WORTH BILLIONS</strong></p><p>A<strong> </strong>pilot scheme, that combines pioneering geospatial technology, Earth observation from space and AI, could provide the blueprint to help accuratelymonitor the booming global industry in carbon offsetting that is worth billions.</p><p>Carbonoffsetting allows countries, companies or even individuals to compensate for their own carbon emissions by purchasing carbon credits.</p><p>These credits are essentially financial investments in schemes that restore large tracts of degraded ecosystems such as woodlands, rainforests or peatlands. These restored ecosystems help to remove largeamounts of carbon from the atmosphere.</p><p>But the industry has attracted controversy over the lack of proper monitoring and accountability. Just how effective is that investment? And how rapidly and effectively is each ecosystem restoration project being repaired?</p><p>Britain’s national mapping service, Ordnance Survey (OS) is piloting a scheme on a peat moor in Yorkshire that could be a game changer for theindustry by providing highly accurate monitoring of such restoration projects.</p><p>OS say that using the innovative technology would embed trust back into the system and would enable investors to understand what they are investing in, the quality of that offset and to accurately measure it for the duration of the fund.</p><p>The pilot scheme involves OS working with the government agency Natural England and scientists from Durham University to analyse the current condition of Thorne and Hatfield Moors, part of Humberhead Peatlands National Nature Reserve near Doncaster.</p><p>The vegetation is separated into different species and then each individualplant is located and identified. Then a digital signature is created for each plant type which will allow satellite imagery and AI to track the change in the different plant types through continual monitoring and recognise how well the peatland is being restored.</p><p>Peatlands,are the largest natural carbon store on land, storing more carbon than is currently in the global atmosphere and have a net cooling effect on climate change but it is estimated that eighty percent of the UK’s peatlands are now degraded as a direct result of drainage for agriculture, burning and peat extraction for horticulture.</p><p>If successful, the technique could be rolled out nationwide to increase investment for large-scale peatland restoration projects from carbon offsetting or carbon credits as the government believes restoration of the nation’s dwindling peatlands can help the UK reach its target of net zero emissions by 2050.</p><p>And if it proves scaleable then OS and partners have the tools to test millions of hectares of sites around the globe.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">0c1f0710-8f4c-452c-aeba-1cc1d4e7ddc8</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 11 Jun 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/8b591d05-2c97-4b83-b4f5-3af598a8bb90/Podcast-Radio-Business-Donna-Lyndsay-12-06-23.mp3" length="32790986" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:40</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>THE RISE OF THE SECOND JOBBER | JASMINE BIRTLES &amp; ANDREW LINDSAY</title><itunes:title>THE RISE OF THE SECOND JOBBER | JASMINE BIRTLES &amp; ANDREW LINDSAY</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>JASMINE BIRTLES – </strong>FINANCIAL JOURNALIST AND TV PRESENTER + <strong>ANDREW LINDSAY – </strong>CO-CEO, UTILITY WAREHOUSE <strong> </strong>talk to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about The Rise of the Second Jobber!</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Whether it’s to meet a financial need, test driving a new career or to fulfil a lifelong passion, the way we work is evolving and more people are finding new and innovative ways than ever before to generate extra income – according to a landmark report.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>In collaboration with the Centre for Economics and Business Research (Cebr), an in-depth study by Utility Warehouse (UW) indicates one in three Britons have multiple income streams – including taken on a second job, side hustle and even renting out spare rooms – with the equivalent of over 20 million now defined as Multi-income individuals (‘Miis’).&nbsp; Furthermore, almost half of the UK’s workforce (47%) are predicted to earn extra income by 2025 – up from 10% in 2017.</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">As we move away from the traditional 9 to 5, the side hustle has grown in popularity.&nbsp; Indeed, hard-working Brits can earn almost £10,000 a year through a side-hustle or second job to supplement their main salary, earning on average around £780 each month from their&nbsp;secondary&nbsp;income.<strong> </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Conducted with over 10,000 UK adults with a second source of income, the research explores the main motivations as to why Britons are taking on a second job. Reasons for earning an additional source of income vary, but the cost-of-living crisis and rising household bills are the main factors, 35% and 34% respectively, while 18% of people cited the Covid-19 pandemic, 15% fear of a recession and 8% Brexit.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">When asked about the main benefits of their source of secondary income, 40.6% of Miis responded they have been able to make money in their free time. 30.1% stated that they have more money to spend themselves or their families and 23.6% responded they have been able to make money from their hobby or passion.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Growing your savings is important for protecting against unexpected costs and an increase in the cost of living. A second income can also provide you with job security in the event you decide to change careers </p><p class="ql-align-justify">or work less hours.&nbsp; However, the report finds that almost a quarter (23%) say they don’t talk about their additional income with family or friends in case they assume they are struggling with money.</p><p>Despite this, Miis are helping to power the UK economy and last year spent £55 billion of their extra income on UK businesses – supporting more than 364,000 jobs to deliver a £30 billion boost to the nation’s coffers.</p><p>*</p><p><strong>JASMINE BIRTLES – </strong>FINANCIAL JOURNALIST AND TV PRESENTER</p><p class="ql-align-justify">TV and radio presenter, ‘Miss Moneysaver’ columnist for the Daily Mail, director  of three companies, author of 38 books, money expert, techlash exponent and stand-up comedian (yes really), Jasmine has run things her way for the whole of her career.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">She is best known as a Money Expert and TV and radio personality who puts the ‘funny’ into ‘money’. Her fun, lively style and common-sense manner means that she can explain any complicated concept in a way that normal people like you and I can understand. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">Jasmine is also the founder and editor of the country’s best-known money-making website MoneyMagpie.com which is the go-to site for information and help on making, as well as saving, money day-to-day.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><br></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>ANDREW LINDSAY – </strong>CO-CEO, UTILITY WAREHOUSE</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Born in&nbsp;<a...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>JASMINE BIRTLES – </strong>FINANCIAL JOURNALIST AND TV PRESENTER + <strong>ANDREW LINDSAY – </strong>CO-CEO, UTILITY WAREHOUSE <strong> </strong>talk to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about The Rise of the Second Jobber!</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Whether it’s to meet a financial need, test driving a new career or to fulfil a lifelong passion, the way we work is evolving and more people are finding new and innovative ways than ever before to generate extra income – according to a landmark report.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>In collaboration with the Centre for Economics and Business Research (Cebr), an in-depth study by Utility Warehouse (UW) indicates one in three Britons have multiple income streams – including taken on a second job, side hustle and even renting out spare rooms – with the equivalent of over 20 million now defined as Multi-income individuals (‘Miis’).&nbsp; Furthermore, almost half of the UK’s workforce (47%) are predicted to earn extra income by 2025 – up from 10% in 2017.</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">As we move away from the traditional 9 to 5, the side hustle has grown in popularity.&nbsp; Indeed, hard-working Brits can earn almost £10,000 a year through a side-hustle or second job to supplement their main salary, earning on average around £780 each month from their&nbsp;secondary&nbsp;income.<strong> </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Conducted with over 10,000 UK adults with a second source of income, the research explores the main motivations as to why Britons are taking on a second job. Reasons for earning an additional source of income vary, but the cost-of-living crisis and rising household bills are the main factors, 35% and 34% respectively, while 18% of people cited the Covid-19 pandemic, 15% fear of a recession and 8% Brexit.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">When asked about the main benefits of their source of secondary income, 40.6% of Miis responded they have been able to make money in their free time. 30.1% stated that they have more money to spend themselves or their families and 23.6% responded they have been able to make money from their hobby or passion.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Growing your savings is important for protecting against unexpected costs and an increase in the cost of living. A second income can also provide you with job security in the event you decide to change careers </p><p class="ql-align-justify">or work less hours.&nbsp; However, the report finds that almost a quarter (23%) say they don’t talk about their additional income with family or friends in case they assume they are struggling with money.</p><p>Despite this, Miis are helping to power the UK economy and last year spent £55 billion of their extra income on UK businesses – supporting more than 364,000 jobs to deliver a £30 billion boost to the nation’s coffers.</p><p>*</p><p><strong>JASMINE BIRTLES – </strong>FINANCIAL JOURNALIST AND TV PRESENTER</p><p class="ql-align-justify">TV and radio presenter, ‘Miss Moneysaver’ columnist for the Daily Mail, director  of three companies, author of 38 books, money expert, techlash exponent and stand-up comedian (yes really), Jasmine has run things her way for the whole of her career.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">She is best known as a Money Expert and TV and radio personality who puts the ‘funny’ into ‘money’. Her fun, lively style and common-sense manner means that she can explain any complicated concept in a way that normal people like you and I can understand. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">Jasmine is also the founder and editor of the country’s best-known money-making website MoneyMagpie.com which is the go-to site for information and help on making, as well as saving, money day-to-day.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><br></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>ANDREW LINDSAY – </strong>CO-CEO, UTILITY WAREHOUSE</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Born in&nbsp;<a href="https://www.scottish-places.info/towns/townfirst560.html" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Portree</a>&nbsp;(<a href="https://www.scottish-places.info/features/featurefirst1620.html" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Isle of Skye</a>), &nbsp;Andrew &nbsp;Lindsay MBE won an historic gold medal rowing as one of the coxed eights team at the 2000 Sydney Olympics.Lindsay walked away from the sport to pursue a career in business and is the Co-CEO of The Utility Warehouse.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">380c6e74-1918-485e-8465-4d5727b26e1e</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 11 Jun 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/183e73b6-fcd4-43da-aadc-3dbaf1ff8b4f/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jasmine-Birtles-Andrew-Lindsay-07-06-23.mp3" length="43446856" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>18:06</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>RISING COSTS PUSHING BACK RETIREMENT FOR 83% OF US | James Watts-Lay</title><itunes:title>RISING COSTS PUSHING BACK RETIREMENT FOR 83% OF US | James Watts-Lay</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jonathan Watts-Lay from WEALTH at work, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss the impact of the cost-of-living crisis on our retirement savings as a third of us say we will never be able to afford to retire because of increasing costs, and with food prices soaring, interest rates rising and energy costs remaining high, 83% are concerned we will have to work longer and postpone our retirement.</p><p>Indeed, about one in eight (13%) say rising costs mean they have either stopped or reduced the amount they pay into their pension, which could have serious implications for the future, while 29% admit with bills rising they may consider stopping payments in the future - this will be of particular concern especially when lower fixed rate mortgage deals end and if inflation fails to fall as quickly as initially thought.</p><p>Furthermore, one in ten of those eligible to access their pensions have withdrawn their savings earlier than previously intended to supplement their income with 31% either intending or considering to do so in the future.</p><p>Jonathan Watts-Lay, from financial wellbeing and retirement specialists, WEALTH at work,  explains what this could mean for a generation of workers who may stop contributing and give thoughts on how to balance your finances to make retirement a realistic possibility. </p><p>WEALTH at Work provides financial education programmes, guidance on savings and pension schemes,regulated financial advice, and schemes such as salary advancement and salary sacrifice, to organisations in both the public and private sector. </p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jonathan Watts-Lay from WEALTH at work, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to discuss the impact of the cost-of-living crisis on our retirement savings as a third of us say we will never be able to afford to retire because of increasing costs, and with food prices soaring, interest rates rising and energy costs remaining high, 83% are concerned we will have to work longer and postpone our retirement.</p><p>Indeed, about one in eight (13%) say rising costs mean they have either stopped or reduced the amount they pay into their pension, which could have serious implications for the future, while 29% admit with bills rising they may consider stopping payments in the future - this will be of particular concern especially when lower fixed rate mortgage deals end and if inflation fails to fall as quickly as initially thought.</p><p>Furthermore, one in ten of those eligible to access their pensions have withdrawn their savings earlier than previously intended to supplement their income with 31% either intending or considering to do so in the future.</p><p>Jonathan Watts-Lay, from financial wellbeing and retirement specialists, WEALTH at work,  explains what this could mean for a generation of workers who may stop contributing and give thoughts on how to balance your finances to make retirement a realistic possibility. </p><p>WEALTH at Work provides financial education programmes, guidance on savings and pension schemes,regulated financial advice, and schemes such as salary advancement and salary sacrifice, to organisations in both the public and private sector. </p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">ddc43260-e112-4621-812d-868d48ea7367</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 29 May 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/8ad4c220-8965-494f-a30f-9ad11713b793/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jonathan-Watts-Lay-31-05-23.mp3" length="37077158" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:27</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>GOVERNMENT URGED TO AVERT MIDLIFE CRISIS | Cath Sermon</title><itunes:title>GOVERNMENT URGED TO AVERT MIDLIFE CRISIS | Cath Sermon</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Catherine Sermon</strong> from leading thinktank<strong> Phoenix Insights</strong>&nbsp;<strong> </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about how the Government is being urged to avert a midlife crisis.</p><p>Older workers, those aged between 45 and 54, risk being lost to the work economy and left behind with the latest ONS figures released this week showing economic inactivity among 50-64 year olds at a six-month high - job dissatisfaction, caring responsibilities, illness and early retirement are all factors, leaving a massive void and skills gap for employers to fill, but only 5% of this demographic choose to retire with the others forced out of the workplace by circumstance.</p><p>Therefore,the government is being urged to help these people build new skills andencourage new workplace opportunities or else face increased economic inactivity as it is feared many people in this age group could be underprepared and not equipped to make beneficial career moves which keep them more fulfilled in the workforce for longer, risking thousands more retiring prematurely and exacerbating economic inactivity among those aged 50+.</p><p>While a third of 45-54 year-olds expect to change career before they retire, research shows this group is 60% more likely than 35-44-year-olds to have not taken actions related to their career in last six months (48% vs 30%) with only 15% receiving careers advice in the last three years.</p><p>In addition, 42% of workers aged 45-54 have been in their existing main occupation for 11 years or more with 30% of this age group not having a clear plan for how they will work until retirement, while a lack of confidence can prevent these workers from seeking new opportunities. </p><p>Among those working aged 45 – 54, the most common reasons for holding back from job changes include feeling too old or too young (21%) or that it's too late to change job or career now (16%).</p><p><strong>Catherine Sermon from leading thinktank Phoenix Insights</strong> is determined to change the way people think about their careers in mid-life, and with 3.5 million over 50s economically inactive, according to ONS, now is time to act before the “great retirement” trend becomes a permanent feature of the UK’s economic forecast. </p><p>She is encouraged to see more younger workers returning to work, but worries the over 50s are being left behind with economic inactivity among 50-64 year olds at a six-month high, adding that“we found over half of over 50s feel they are being left behind in employment, and just one in seven think there is sufficient support to encourage them to remain in or return to work."</p><p>Record long-term sickness raises concerns for long-term finances, with Catherine adding: “Supporting this group back to work, if they are able, will help them continue to save and significantly improve the prospects of their future retirement income.”</p><p><strong>About Phoenix Group</strong></p><p>Phoenix Group is the UK’s largest long-term savings and retirement business with £259 billion of assets under administration.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Catherine Sermon</strong> from leading thinktank<strong> Phoenix Insights</strong>&nbsp;<strong> </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about how the Government is being urged to avert a midlife crisis.</p><p>Older workers, those aged between 45 and 54, risk being lost to the work economy and left behind with the latest ONS figures released this week showing economic inactivity among 50-64 year olds at a six-month high - job dissatisfaction, caring responsibilities, illness and early retirement are all factors, leaving a massive void and skills gap for employers to fill, but only 5% of this demographic choose to retire with the others forced out of the workplace by circumstance.</p><p>Therefore,the government is being urged to help these people build new skills andencourage new workplace opportunities or else face increased economic inactivity as it is feared many people in this age group could be underprepared and not equipped to make beneficial career moves which keep them more fulfilled in the workforce for longer, risking thousands more retiring prematurely and exacerbating economic inactivity among those aged 50+.</p><p>While a third of 45-54 year-olds expect to change career before they retire, research shows this group is 60% more likely than 35-44-year-olds to have not taken actions related to their career in last six months (48% vs 30%) with only 15% receiving careers advice in the last three years.</p><p>In addition, 42% of workers aged 45-54 have been in their existing main occupation for 11 years or more with 30% of this age group not having a clear plan for how they will work until retirement, while a lack of confidence can prevent these workers from seeking new opportunities. </p><p>Among those working aged 45 – 54, the most common reasons for holding back from job changes include feeling too old or too young (21%) or that it's too late to change job or career now (16%).</p><p><strong>Catherine Sermon from leading thinktank Phoenix Insights</strong> is determined to change the way people think about their careers in mid-life, and with 3.5 million over 50s economically inactive, according to ONS, now is time to act before the “great retirement” trend becomes a permanent feature of the UK’s economic forecast. </p><p>She is encouraged to see more younger workers returning to work, but worries the over 50s are being left behind with economic inactivity among 50-64 year olds at a six-month high, adding that“we found over half of over 50s feel they are being left behind in employment, and just one in seven think there is sufficient support to encourage them to remain in or return to work."</p><p>Record long-term sickness raises concerns for long-term finances, with Catherine adding: “Supporting this group back to work, if they are able, will help them continue to save and significantly improve the prospects of their future retirement income.”</p><p><strong>About Phoenix Group</strong></p><p>Phoenix Group is the UK’s largest long-term savings and retirement business with £259 billion of assets under administration.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">5e9cf659-5364-4d60-a7f9-586c31a98d7c</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 21 May 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/601d8b18-6184-4a72-a0f4-cdab7e67f3ac/Podcast-Radio-Business-Catherine-Sermon-Phoenix-Insights-19-05-.mp3" length="36868178" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:22</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>KIDS’ FINANCE TRENDS AS POCKET MONEY GROWTH OUTPACES CPI INFLATION | Will Carmichael</title><itunes:title>KIDS’ FINANCE TRENDS AS POCKET MONEY GROWTH OUTPACES CPI INFLATION | Will Carmichael</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Will Carmichael, CEO and Co-Founder of NatWest Rooster Money </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about Kids' finance trends as pocket money growth outpaces inflation.</p><p>The nation's kids are cleaning up with their pocket money on average up by 11% during 2022/23, outpacing CPI inflation which stands at 10.4% for the same period. The average child receives £6.42 a week, or £338.84 a year, according to a report looking at kids' finances.</p><p>While six-year-olds saw the biggest increase in pocket money up to a whopping 34% year-on-year growth to reach £3.94 a week, 16-year-olds enjoyed the highest weekly allowance of £12.75, according to NatWest Rooster Money’s annual Pocket Money Index.</p><p>Parents are feeling the pinch with fewer kids (57% down from 65% the previous year) receiving a regular allowance - perhaps to compensate one-off payments are on the up, comprising 39% of kids’ earnings (up from 34%) as parents use special occasions and good behaviour as opportunities to reward their offspring eg birthdays (£47.01), good school results (£15.98) doing homework (£6.76) or even a visit from the tooth fairy (£3.24) with maths the school subject for which they are most likely to get a ‘bonus’ for (£8.12). Plus, the top five most lucrative chores per job are Cleaning the car (£2.46), Helping with the shopping (£1.11), Vacuuming (£0.96), Doing the laundry (£0.67) and Helping in the garden (£0.64).</p><p>Kids are incredibly entrepreneurial, with those with ‘side hustles’ - such as babysitting, selling and upcycling and tutoring etc enjoying a 16% increase in associated earnings - amassing an additional £50.84 in income over the year and with the UK becoming more of a cashless society, the traditional piggy bank and saving for a rainy day has been replaced by new modern methods to engage with children with the number of targets set by kids for gaming currencies like Minecoins and Robux shoot up 220% year on year.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Data was collected from user activity on the NatWest Rooster Money pocket money app and prepaid debit card between 1st March 2022 and 28th February 2023. The sample comprised 126,122 kids.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>About NatWest Rooster Money</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">NatWest Rooster Money is a kids’ prepaid debit card and pocket money app that gets kids confident with money, preparing them for brighter futures. Founded in 2015, RoosterMoney relaunched as NatWest Rooster Money in May 2022. The app features a range of flexible features designed forkids from ages three to 17, including a Star Chart and a Virtual Pocket Money Tracker to kick start money management, through to the Rooster Card (a prepaid debit card for kids from agessix to 17). Rooster Money was voted Best Children’s Pocket Money App in the Moneynet Awards 2021 and Best Kids’ Spending App in the Finder Banking Innovation Awards of 2020.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">A Rooster Card subscription is £1.99/month or £19.99/year. NatWest, Royal Bank or Ulster Bank customers can get up to three Rooster Card subscriptions free for as long as they retain their account with the bank. To be eligible for the offer you must be 18+, have mobile or online banking and with child(ren) aged six to 17.&nbsp; Other fees may apply. T&amp;Cs apply.</p><p>The Rooster Card is issued by National Westminster Bank Plc pursuant to a licence from Visa Europe. National Westminster Bank Plc. Registered in England No. 929027.Registered Office:&nbsp; 250 Bishopsgate, London EC2M 4AA. Financial Services Firm Reference Number: 121878. National Westminster Bank Plc is authorised by the Prudential Regulation Authority, and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority and the Prudential Regulation Authority. The Rooster Card utilises the e-money permission held by National Westminster Bank Plc.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Will Carmichael, CEO and Co-Founder of NatWest Rooster Money </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about Kids' finance trends as pocket money growth outpaces inflation.</p><p>The nation's kids are cleaning up with their pocket money on average up by 11% during 2022/23, outpacing CPI inflation which stands at 10.4% for the same period. The average child receives £6.42 a week, or £338.84 a year, according to a report looking at kids' finances.</p><p>While six-year-olds saw the biggest increase in pocket money up to a whopping 34% year-on-year growth to reach £3.94 a week, 16-year-olds enjoyed the highest weekly allowance of £12.75, according to NatWest Rooster Money’s annual Pocket Money Index.</p><p>Parents are feeling the pinch with fewer kids (57% down from 65% the previous year) receiving a regular allowance - perhaps to compensate one-off payments are on the up, comprising 39% of kids’ earnings (up from 34%) as parents use special occasions and good behaviour as opportunities to reward their offspring eg birthdays (£47.01), good school results (£15.98) doing homework (£6.76) or even a visit from the tooth fairy (£3.24) with maths the school subject for which they are most likely to get a ‘bonus’ for (£8.12). Plus, the top five most lucrative chores per job are Cleaning the car (£2.46), Helping with the shopping (£1.11), Vacuuming (£0.96), Doing the laundry (£0.67) and Helping in the garden (£0.64).</p><p>Kids are incredibly entrepreneurial, with those with ‘side hustles’ - such as babysitting, selling and upcycling and tutoring etc enjoying a 16% increase in associated earnings - amassing an additional £50.84 in income over the year and with the UK becoming more of a cashless society, the traditional piggy bank and saving for a rainy day has been replaced by new modern methods to engage with children with the number of targets set by kids for gaming currencies like Minecoins and Robux shoot up 220% year on year.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Data was collected from user activity on the NatWest Rooster Money pocket money app and prepaid debit card between 1st March 2022 and 28th February 2023. The sample comprised 126,122 kids.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>About NatWest Rooster Money</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">NatWest Rooster Money is a kids’ prepaid debit card and pocket money app that gets kids confident with money, preparing them for brighter futures. Founded in 2015, RoosterMoney relaunched as NatWest Rooster Money in May 2022. The app features a range of flexible features designed forkids from ages three to 17, including a Star Chart and a Virtual Pocket Money Tracker to kick start money management, through to the Rooster Card (a prepaid debit card for kids from agessix to 17). Rooster Money was voted Best Children’s Pocket Money App in the Moneynet Awards 2021 and Best Kids’ Spending App in the Finder Banking Innovation Awards of 2020.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">A Rooster Card subscription is £1.99/month or £19.99/year. NatWest, Royal Bank or Ulster Bank customers can get up to three Rooster Card subscriptions free for as long as they retain their account with the bank. To be eligible for the offer you must be 18+, have mobile or online banking and with child(ren) aged six to 17.&nbsp; Other fees may apply. T&amp;Cs apply.</p><p>The Rooster Card is issued by National Westminster Bank Plc pursuant to a licence from Visa Europe. National Westminster Bank Plc. Registered in England No. 929027.Registered Office:&nbsp; 250 Bishopsgate, London EC2M 4AA. Financial Services Firm Reference Number: 121878. National Westminster Bank Plc is authorised by the Prudential Regulation Authority, and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority and the Prudential Regulation Authority. The Rooster Card utilises the e-money permission held by National Westminster Bank Plc.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">d9d8288f-b61a-429d-9f43-2ac57a96ab6d</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 21 May 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/7257cf9d-6847-4c8c-9ff6-6ac2e98af9c2/Podcast-Radio-Business-Will-Carmichael-NatWest-Rooster-Money-19.mp3" length="38327901" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:58</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>MORTGAGE PRISONERS HEADING TO COURT  | Olivia Selley of Harcus Parker</title><itunes:title>MORTGAGE PRISONERS HEADING TO COURT  | Olivia Selley of Harcus Parker</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Olivia Selley, Associate Solicitor, Harcus Parker</strong>&nbsp;<strong> </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about ‘Mortgage Prisoners’ heading to court. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">Many of us have faced increased mortgage rates recently but there are thousands of homeowners who have been trapped with high rates for more than a decade after their lender collapsed.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">These ‘mortgage prisoners’ are stuck on exorbitant mortgage deals, and in the past year, near-monthly rate rises have seen some prisoner’s rates leap from 4.5% to as much as 8.29% - pushing homeowners to the brink. &nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">A new report has revealed that the worry of not being able to escape their unaffordable mortgages has had a devastating impactwith many of them suffering financially, mentally, and physically with no end in sight.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">But victims and their lawyers – Harcus Parker – will be taking their case to the High Court for the very first time as they push for anend to their unfair charges and compensation for what they have been through. &nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Indeed,the law firm has just won an important concession in its ongoing compensation battle to help TSB’s Whistletree mortgage customerswho were trapped on excessively high interest rates with TSB agreeing to a High Court trial in early 2024, to let a judge rule whether its Whistletree mortgage customers were financially exploited - the hearing may set a precedent for other similar mortgage prisoner claims.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">While the government has made more than £2 billion from the sale of these loans hundred and thousands of mortgage prisoners have been overcharged billions while the FCA and the Government has done little to support them. &nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Most have been unable to switch to a different provider because they don't pass current strict affordability tests.<strong>&nbsp;&nbsp;</strong>&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">In response to the report, a spokesperson for HM Treasury said: "We are open to practical and proportionate solutions to help mortgage prisoners, working with the Financial Conduct Authority and industry to carefully consider all proposals put forward."&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>As a result Harcus Parker is taking action against the companies that bought the loans from the Government – arguing that they deliberately stopped the mortgage prisoners from accessing cheaper, more affordable rates because they knew they would be unable to switch providers. &nbsp;</p><p>Impacted mortgage prisoners should sign up to find out whether they could be eligible to join the claim by visiting <a href="http://www.whistletreeclaims.com" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.whistletreeclaims.com</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&amp; <a href="https://harcusparker.co.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://harcusparker.co.uk/</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Olivia Selley, Associate Solicitor, Harcus Parker</strong>&nbsp;<strong> </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about ‘Mortgage Prisoners’ heading to court. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">Many of us have faced increased mortgage rates recently but there are thousands of homeowners who have been trapped with high rates for more than a decade after their lender collapsed.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">These ‘mortgage prisoners’ are stuck on exorbitant mortgage deals, and in the past year, near-monthly rate rises have seen some prisoner’s rates leap from 4.5% to as much as 8.29% - pushing homeowners to the brink. &nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">A new report has revealed that the worry of not being able to escape their unaffordable mortgages has had a devastating impactwith many of them suffering financially, mentally, and physically with no end in sight.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">But victims and their lawyers – Harcus Parker – will be taking their case to the High Court for the very first time as they push for anend to their unfair charges and compensation for what they have been through. &nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Indeed,the law firm has just won an important concession in its ongoing compensation battle to help TSB’s Whistletree mortgage customerswho were trapped on excessively high interest rates with TSB agreeing to a High Court trial in early 2024, to let a judge rule whether its Whistletree mortgage customers were financially exploited - the hearing may set a precedent for other similar mortgage prisoner claims.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">While the government has made more than £2 billion from the sale of these loans hundred and thousands of mortgage prisoners have been overcharged billions while the FCA and the Government has done little to support them. &nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Most have been unable to switch to a different provider because they don't pass current strict affordability tests.<strong>&nbsp;&nbsp;</strong>&nbsp;</p><p class="ql-align-justify">In response to the report, a spokesperson for HM Treasury said: "We are open to practical and proportionate solutions to help mortgage prisoners, working with the Financial Conduct Authority and industry to carefully consider all proposals put forward."&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>As a result Harcus Parker is taking action against the companies that bought the loans from the Government – arguing that they deliberately stopped the mortgage prisoners from accessing cheaper, more affordable rates because they knew they would be unable to switch providers. &nbsp;</p><p>Impacted mortgage prisoners should sign up to find out whether they could be eligible to join the claim by visiting <a href="http://www.whistletreeclaims.com" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">www.whistletreeclaims.com</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&amp; <a href="https://harcusparker.co.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://harcusparker.co.uk/</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">ec7f4ca4-bc7a-4b5d-abf9-8427f414c678</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 14 May 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/2fc578b5-48df-4fad-8fe4-e228b7089502/Podcast-Radio-Business-Olivia-Selley-12-05-23.mp3" length="22871770" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:32</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Launch of latest British cruise ship - Ambition | Christian Verhounig, CEO</title><itunes:title>Launch of latest British cruise ship - Ambition | Christian Verhounig, CEO</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Christian Verhounig, Ambassador Cruise Line CEO </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about the first British cruise line to successfully launch in the UK in over a decade.</p><p>Last year Ambassador Cruise Line was the first British cruise line to successfully launch in the UK in over a decade</p><p>On Friday 12th May 2023  the line’s second ship, Ambition, setting sail on her maiden voyage from Port of Tyne at 18.00 after a day of celebrations.</p><p>In all, Ambition will sail from eight different departure points around the UK – Newcastle, London Tilbury, Dundee, Edinburgh Leith, Falmouth, Liverpool, Bristol and Belfast.</p><p>Like its sister ship, Ambience, Ambition is a traditional cruise ship, but its small to mid-size allows it to access many of the UK’s smaller ports.</p><p>Picking up guests from their closest port means they will no longer need to make journeys, often several hundred miles long, to get to a single departure point.</p><p>Ambition’s launch is creating many new jobs, while bringing more tourists to and boosting the economies of all the locations it will sail to and from.</p><p>Both Ambition and Ambience have been upgraded to operate at IMO Tier III, placing them in the top 10% of cruise ships to achieve this level of environmental operation. They also operateat environmental standards that only come in effect in 2025, enabling them to even sail in the most environmentally protected areas such as the World Heritage Fjords, where only 10-15% of the world’s cruise ships can access.</p><p>To comply with the latest requirements, companies like Ambassador must reduce NOx emissions by around 70%. Ambassador reduced Ambience’s emissions by 95% from her first sailing in April 2022. The main upgrade modifications have resulted in an overall 7% fuel reduction, 80% less sulphur oxide (SOx) emissions, and an annual CO2 emission reduction of 5.358 tons – significantly relieving the impact we leave on our oceans.</p><p>The ships are outfitted with Selective Catalytic Reduction Reactors – reducing nitrogen oxide emissions by approximately 95%. Ambassador has ensured extensive investment into technicalupgrades, to improve the environmental performance of the ships, including: </p><ul><li>SCR </li><li>installation, including a 0-hour maintenance overhaul of the main engine</li><li> and installation of new turbo chargers, economisers and silencers.</li><li>New Advance Waste Water Treatment Plant.</li><li>New Ballast Water Treatment Plant able to operate in the most environmentally protected areas around the world.</li><li>Replacing of the Food Pulper system with New Biodigester.</li></ul><br/><p><a href="https://www.ambassadorcruiseline.com/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.ambassadorcruiseline.com/</a></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Christian Verhounig, Ambassador Cruise Line CEO </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about the first British cruise line to successfully launch in the UK in over a decade.</p><p>Last year Ambassador Cruise Line was the first British cruise line to successfully launch in the UK in over a decade</p><p>On Friday 12th May 2023  the line’s second ship, Ambition, setting sail on her maiden voyage from Port of Tyne at 18.00 after a day of celebrations.</p><p>In all, Ambition will sail from eight different departure points around the UK – Newcastle, London Tilbury, Dundee, Edinburgh Leith, Falmouth, Liverpool, Bristol and Belfast.</p><p>Like its sister ship, Ambience, Ambition is a traditional cruise ship, but its small to mid-size allows it to access many of the UK’s smaller ports.</p><p>Picking up guests from their closest port means they will no longer need to make journeys, often several hundred miles long, to get to a single departure point.</p><p>Ambition’s launch is creating many new jobs, while bringing more tourists to and boosting the economies of all the locations it will sail to and from.</p><p>Both Ambition and Ambience have been upgraded to operate at IMO Tier III, placing them in the top 10% of cruise ships to achieve this level of environmental operation. They also operateat environmental standards that only come in effect in 2025, enabling them to even sail in the most environmentally protected areas such as the World Heritage Fjords, where only 10-15% of the world’s cruise ships can access.</p><p>To comply with the latest requirements, companies like Ambassador must reduce NOx emissions by around 70%. Ambassador reduced Ambience’s emissions by 95% from her first sailing in April 2022. The main upgrade modifications have resulted in an overall 7% fuel reduction, 80% less sulphur oxide (SOx) emissions, and an annual CO2 emission reduction of 5.358 tons – significantly relieving the impact we leave on our oceans.</p><p>The ships are outfitted with Selective Catalytic Reduction Reactors – reducing nitrogen oxide emissions by approximately 95%. Ambassador has ensured extensive investment into technicalupgrades, to improve the environmental performance of the ships, including: </p><ul><li>SCR </li><li>installation, including a 0-hour maintenance overhaul of the main engine</li><li> and installation of new turbo chargers, economisers and silencers.</li><li>New Advance Waste Water Treatment Plant.</li><li>New Ballast Water Treatment Plant able to operate in the most environmentally protected areas around the world.</li><li>Replacing of the Food Pulper system with New Biodigester.</li></ul><br/><p><a href="https://www.ambassadorcruiseline.com/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.ambassadorcruiseline.com/</a></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">c656ae41-3af5-4fb6-8cbb-d2541de75a70</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 14 May 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/4bcf0067-844a-4a7a-9ea4-0758f532be61/Podcast-Radio-Business-Christian-Verhounig-12-05-23.mp3" length="30251884" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>12:36</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>BOSSES NEED TO LAY FOUNDATIONS TO MAKE CONSTRUCTION SITES SAFER | Nicholas  Hagi Savva</title><itunes:title>BOSSES NEED TO LAY FOUNDATIONS TO MAKE CONSTRUCTION SITES SAFER | Nicholas  Hagi Savva</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Nicholas Hagi Savva, a senior associate solicitor in the personal injury team at Slater and Gordon, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about why<strong> 78% OF PEOPLE IN PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION JOBS HAVE BEEN INJURED AT WORK.</strong></p><p>Despite all the advances that have been made in recent years, construction sites remain among Britain's most dangerous places to work with almost four in five people (78%) in physical jobs in the industry reporting being injured while at work.</p><p>Accidents and injuries occur all the time, and many of them are down to other people not following the safety rules. The most common construction site injuries are slips, trips, and falls (45%) followed by cuts/lacerations (43%) and muscle strain (42%), according to research from Slater and Gordon.</p><p>Shockingly, more than a third (35%) of people who have worked in physical construction jobs say they have been asked to do work in an area in which they are not qualified to do, and 40% admit they sometimes feel unsafe at work.</p><p>As many other industries adopt a hybrid working model, this is not something those working in construction can do with 2 in 5 (41%) saying they have felt rushed back to work by their employer after an injury.</p><p>Not being able to work can have a big financial impact with a third of people (34%) who have been injured while working not taking time off for their injuries stating it was because of them not being able to afford to do so, with a quarter (26%) saying the job needed completing.</p><p>The average time people take off for severe injuries is 28 days with them losing up to £5,262 in income.</p><p>When on-site, 42% say their workplace often downplays injuries with more than half (57%) saying they have worked while sick.</p><p>Furthermore, nearly half (49%) feel their boss could be doing more to make construction sites safer.</p><p>Nicholas Hagi Savva, a senior associate solicitor in the personal injury team at Slater and Gordon  <a href="https://www.slatergordon.co.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.slatergordon.co.uk/</a></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Nicholas Hagi Savva, a senior associate solicitor in the personal injury team at Slater and Gordon, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about why<strong> 78% OF PEOPLE IN PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION JOBS HAVE BEEN INJURED AT WORK.</strong></p><p>Despite all the advances that have been made in recent years, construction sites remain among Britain's most dangerous places to work with almost four in five people (78%) in physical jobs in the industry reporting being injured while at work.</p><p>Accidents and injuries occur all the time, and many of them are down to other people not following the safety rules. The most common construction site injuries are slips, trips, and falls (45%) followed by cuts/lacerations (43%) and muscle strain (42%), according to research from Slater and Gordon.</p><p>Shockingly, more than a third (35%) of people who have worked in physical construction jobs say they have been asked to do work in an area in which they are not qualified to do, and 40% admit they sometimes feel unsafe at work.</p><p>As many other industries adopt a hybrid working model, this is not something those working in construction can do with 2 in 5 (41%) saying they have felt rushed back to work by their employer after an injury.</p><p>Not being able to work can have a big financial impact with a third of people (34%) who have been injured while working not taking time off for their injuries stating it was because of them not being able to afford to do so, with a quarter (26%) saying the job needed completing.</p><p>The average time people take off for severe injuries is 28 days with them losing up to £5,262 in income.</p><p>When on-site, 42% say their workplace often downplays injuries with more than half (57%) saying they have worked while sick.</p><p>Furthermore, nearly half (49%) feel their boss could be doing more to make construction sites safer.</p><p>Nicholas Hagi Savva, a senior associate solicitor in the personal injury team at Slater and Gordon  <a href="https://www.slatergordon.co.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">https://www.slatergordon.co.uk/</a></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">e30f7263-6d5f-4985-a303-dabec4a36662</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 08 May 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/5705f266-0a29-4a33-ac77-8d9393d6cd0c/Podcast-Radio-Business-Nicholas-Hagi-Savva-Salter-Gordon-03-05-.mp3" length="40812668" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>17:00</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>GROUNDBREAKING BRITISH TRIAL COULD REVOLUTIONISE WASTE INDUSTRY | David Lorenz</title><itunes:title>GROUNDBREAKING BRITISH TRIAL COULD REVOLUTIONISE WASTE INDUSTRY | David Lorenz</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p>David Lorenz, Founder &amp; CEO, Lunaz<strong>, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about<strong> Lunaz </strong>and their collaboration with Waste management company Biffa is embarking on a ground-breaking trial that could revolutionize the waste industry, save millions of pounds for taxpayers and remove huge amounts of carbon from the atmosphere.&nbsp;</p><p>In what is believed to be a world first, they have signed a contract with Silverstone-based Lunaz – the UK’s fastest growing vehicle electrification company – to convert the first ten of their 2,900 fleet of diesel lorries to electric.&nbsp;</p><p>The two British companies are combining expertise to give Biffa trucks a new lease of life. This ensures older vehicles are upcycled instead of being replaced with new ones in the run-up to the 2030 ban on the sale of fossil-fuelled vehicles. &nbsp;</p><p>This is the first step of the two companies working together to electrify Biffa’s fleet of vehicles. This multi-year production programme is expected to see growing numbers of vehicles delivered to Biffa over themid-term as the FTSE-listed company has committed to reduce emissions by 50% and minimize the purchase of fossil-fuelled trucks by 2030. &nbsp;</p><p>Each upcycled electric vehicle emits zero tailpipe emissions, saves 21 tonnes of embedded carbon, is £50,000 cheaper than buying an electric vehicle from new and over the total life-span of the vehicle is significantlycheaper than running the diesel equivalent. &nbsp;</p><p>In all there are around 25,000 bin lorries operating in the UK. As well as commercial waste management companies like Biffa, on average each local authority has around 60 vehicles. &nbsp;</p><p>Lunaz estimates that converting the nation’s local authority fleet of bin lorries from diesel to would save the taxpayer around one million pounds for every 20 lorries converted. And converting all 29,000 lorries would save around half a million tons of embedded carbon.&nbsp;</p><p>The company is already bidding for work to convert fleets for multiple local authorities across the UK.&nbsp;</p><p>Lunaz’ home in Silverstone, England has a capacity to up-cycle more than 1,110 industrial vehicles every year. &nbsp;</p><p>Lunaz investor David Beckham welcomed the Biffa deal, saying;</p><p><em>“This deal is a strong endorsement of Lunaz’ innovative approach to </em></p><p><em>finding sustainable solutions and I’m delighted to be an investor in </em></p><p><em>this fast growing and exciting British company”.&nbsp;</em></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>David Lorenz, Founder &amp; CEO, Lunaz<strong>, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about<strong> Lunaz </strong>and their collaboration with Waste management company Biffa is embarking on a ground-breaking trial that could revolutionize the waste industry, save millions of pounds for taxpayers and remove huge amounts of carbon from the atmosphere.&nbsp;</p><p>In what is believed to be a world first, they have signed a contract with Silverstone-based Lunaz – the UK’s fastest growing vehicle electrification company – to convert the first ten of their 2,900 fleet of diesel lorries to electric.&nbsp;</p><p>The two British companies are combining expertise to give Biffa trucks a new lease of life. This ensures older vehicles are upcycled instead of being replaced with new ones in the run-up to the 2030 ban on the sale of fossil-fuelled vehicles. &nbsp;</p><p>This is the first step of the two companies working together to electrify Biffa’s fleet of vehicles. This multi-year production programme is expected to see growing numbers of vehicles delivered to Biffa over themid-term as the FTSE-listed company has committed to reduce emissions by 50% and minimize the purchase of fossil-fuelled trucks by 2030. &nbsp;</p><p>Each upcycled electric vehicle emits zero tailpipe emissions, saves 21 tonnes of embedded carbon, is £50,000 cheaper than buying an electric vehicle from new and over the total life-span of the vehicle is significantlycheaper than running the diesel equivalent. &nbsp;</p><p>In all there are around 25,000 bin lorries operating in the UK. As well as commercial waste management companies like Biffa, on average each local authority has around 60 vehicles. &nbsp;</p><p>Lunaz estimates that converting the nation’s local authority fleet of bin lorries from diesel to would save the taxpayer around one million pounds for every 20 lorries converted. And converting all 29,000 lorries would save around half a million tons of embedded carbon.&nbsp;</p><p>The company is already bidding for work to convert fleets for multiple local authorities across the UK.&nbsp;</p><p>Lunaz’ home in Silverstone, England has a capacity to up-cycle more than 1,110 industrial vehicles every year. &nbsp;</p><p>Lunaz investor David Beckham welcomed the Biffa deal, saying;</p><p><em>“This deal is a strong endorsement of Lunaz’ innovative approach to </em></p><p><em>finding sustainable solutions and I’m delighted to be an investor in </em></p><p><em>this fast growing and exciting British company”.&nbsp;</em></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">3c1f7565-ca1a-4ebb-b6f4-dc22a04396e5</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 08 May 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/01a6ae7b-f030-4397-880e-b01f31d0779f/Podcast-Radio-Business-David-Lorenz-27-04-23.mp3" length="24247901" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:06</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>UNEMPLOYMENT RISES AND WAGES GO UP: WHAT THIS MEANS  | Jack Kennedy</title><itunes:title>UNEMPLOYMENT RISES AND WAGES GO UP: WHAT THIS MEANS  | Jack Kennedy</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jack Kennedy, UK &amp; Ireland Economist at Indeed, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about<strong> </strong>how<strong> </strong>optimism has been rising that the UK economy will avoid recession this year, we continue to see the labour market coming off the boil. </p><p>Vacancies fell for the ninth consecutive month to 1,105,000, though remain well above pre-pandemic levels.&nbsp;&nbsp;“Regular wage growth remains high at 6.6% y/y but eased back from 6.7% and, after accounting for high inflation, real wages continued to be squeezed at one of the sharpest rates on record at -2.3% y/y. The gap between private (6.9%) and public (5.3%) sector regular wage growth continued to narrow, with the latter picking up to the strongest since 2005.&nbsp;</p><p>“We saw a further 0.4 percentage point drop in inactivity in the latest figures to 21.1%, the biggest drop in nine months, mainly driven by 16-24 year olds as more students returned to the labour force. But inactivity due to long-term sickness continued to increase, hitting a new record high. Overall inactivity remains over 420,000 above pre-pandemic levels. The Chancellor made inactivity a focus in last month’s Budget, though the OBR estimates that his package of reforms may only lower inactivity by about 100,000 and will take several years to take full effect.&nbsp;</p><p>“One measure of labour market tightness, the ratio of unemployed people to vacancies, remains close to historic lows at just 1.2. But that may not give the whole picture if employers aren’t as determined to fill those vacancies as they were before.&nbsp;</p><p>“At Indeed, we’re seeing some signs that employers have started to scale back their recruiting intensity. For example, employers’ use of signing bonuses, which soared during acute worker shortages,has reduced as competition for new hires abates. Today, the share of job postings offering a joining bonus has dipped below 0.9%, from a peakof 1.1% in November.”</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jack Kennedy, UK &amp; Ireland Economist at Indeed, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about<strong> </strong>how<strong> </strong>optimism has been rising that the UK economy will avoid recession this year, we continue to see the labour market coming off the boil. </p><p>Vacancies fell for the ninth consecutive month to 1,105,000, though remain well above pre-pandemic levels.&nbsp;&nbsp;“Regular wage growth remains high at 6.6% y/y but eased back from 6.7% and, after accounting for high inflation, real wages continued to be squeezed at one of the sharpest rates on record at -2.3% y/y. The gap between private (6.9%) and public (5.3%) sector regular wage growth continued to narrow, with the latter picking up to the strongest since 2005.&nbsp;</p><p>“We saw a further 0.4 percentage point drop in inactivity in the latest figures to 21.1%, the biggest drop in nine months, mainly driven by 16-24 year olds as more students returned to the labour force. But inactivity due to long-term sickness continued to increase, hitting a new record high. Overall inactivity remains over 420,000 above pre-pandemic levels. The Chancellor made inactivity a focus in last month’s Budget, though the OBR estimates that his package of reforms may only lower inactivity by about 100,000 and will take several years to take full effect.&nbsp;</p><p>“One measure of labour market tightness, the ratio of unemployed people to vacancies, remains close to historic lows at just 1.2. But that may not give the whole picture if employers aren’t as determined to fill those vacancies as they were before.&nbsp;</p><p>“At Indeed, we’re seeing some signs that employers have started to scale back their recruiting intensity. For example, employers’ use of signing bonuses, which soared during acute worker shortages,has reduced as competition for new hires abates. Today, the share of job postings offering a joining bonus has dipped below 0.9%, from a peakof 1.1% in November.”</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">e34e639e-3c0a-4cf4-baeb-85472fa79943</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 20 Apr 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/e38bad3e-8dc3-4d30-a617-4511e289a9d5/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jack-Kennedy-18-04-23.mp3" length="14748733" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>06:09</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>Is your business ready for the Green Revolution – The future is now | Yvonne Sampson</title><itunes:title>Is your business ready for the Green Revolution – The future is now | Yvonne Sampson</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p>Yvonne Sampson,Head of Enterprise for GC, Business Growth Hub<strong>, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about<strong> </strong>"EnterprisingYou and Green Economy, part of the Growth Company family, who will holding an event titled <em>"Is your business ready for the Green Revolution – The future is now" </em>on 25 April 2023 in the recently opened  “Green Skill Academy” at Trafford.</p><p>Following the recent government Climate and Energy strategy, more emphasis is being put on moving towards a net zero future. This includes investing in green technologies and solutions for our homes. In addition, Greater Manchester also has an ambitious target for the city region to achieve net zero by 2038, which is way ahead of the UK’s target in 2050.</p><p>The event will allow people to hear about the opportunities brought up by the gov't target of net zero and see them in action. Local businesses and sole traders have also been invited to join the event, providing guidance on upskilling the workforce and taking advantage of the increased demand for green technologies like solar, EV and heat pumps. </p><p>This presents a great opportunity for self-employed traders to get in on the action on all the new green tech and see how they can make these changes without the massive cost.</p><p>EnterprisingYou is a fully funded programme that supports the self-employed. Delivered by the Growth Company and People Plus, it gives access to 1:1 business support, personal financial advice, personal development courses, employment support and more.</p><p>Yvonne Sampson is an expert in this area and has helped many businesses. As Head of Enterprise at the Business Growth Hub, Yvonne can discuss how the moves to net zero and green technology will impact small businesses and what options are available to help with that move. </p><p>Yvonne has over 25 years of working in the Business Support arena and specialised in working with Women entrepreneurs, Ethnic minority groups and people with disabilities. Yvonne set up her own sports franchise business over 10 years ago and has a bank of 14 associates. </p><p>She believes that if you have the passion, energy, self-belief, and confidence, you're 80% there to build a good business."</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Yvonne Sampson,Head of Enterprise for GC, Business Growth Hub<strong>, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about<strong> </strong>"EnterprisingYou and Green Economy, part of the Growth Company family, who will holding an event titled <em>"Is your business ready for the Green Revolution – The future is now" </em>on 25 April 2023 in the recently opened  “Green Skill Academy” at Trafford.</p><p>Following the recent government Climate and Energy strategy, more emphasis is being put on moving towards a net zero future. This includes investing in green technologies and solutions for our homes. In addition, Greater Manchester also has an ambitious target for the city region to achieve net zero by 2038, which is way ahead of the UK’s target in 2050.</p><p>The event will allow people to hear about the opportunities brought up by the gov't target of net zero and see them in action. Local businesses and sole traders have also been invited to join the event, providing guidance on upskilling the workforce and taking advantage of the increased demand for green technologies like solar, EV and heat pumps. </p><p>This presents a great opportunity for self-employed traders to get in on the action on all the new green tech and see how they can make these changes without the massive cost.</p><p>EnterprisingYou is a fully funded programme that supports the self-employed. Delivered by the Growth Company and People Plus, it gives access to 1:1 business support, personal financial advice, personal development courses, employment support and more.</p><p>Yvonne Sampson is an expert in this area and has helped many businesses. As Head of Enterprise at the Business Growth Hub, Yvonne can discuss how the moves to net zero and green technology will impact small businesses and what options are available to help with that move. </p><p>Yvonne has over 25 years of working in the Business Support arena and specialised in working with Women entrepreneurs, Ethnic minority groups and people with disabilities. Yvonne set up her own sports franchise business over 10 years ago and has a bank of 14 associates. </p><p>She believes that if you have the passion, energy, self-belief, and confidence, you're 80% there to build a good business."</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">4c28b4b6-1502-4139-9ecf-73df1063e0ee</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 20 Apr 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/ba1d37f0-cb05-4f2a-8c1e-0b7924e1309f/Podcast-Radio-Business-Yvonne-Sampson-Growth-Co-17-04-23.mp3" length="33388668" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:55</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>PROTECTING REPUTATION OVER TRAINING STAFF | Nick Gold</title><itunes:title>PROTECTING REPUTATION OVER TRAINING STAFF | Nick Gold</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Nick Gold, Founder &amp; Managing Director, Speakers Corner, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about<strong> </strong> how businesses can shape their reputation, as 86% of businesses owners say reputation management is more of a priority than training staff with 87% viewing it as more of a priority than diversity across their business.&nbsp;</p><p>In world in which a tweet can tank share prices, ‘cancel-culture’ can dethrone a CEO, and poor brand management can cause public outcry, consumer perception is more important than ever, affecting the trust of your customers, recruiting the right talent and securing investment. </p><p>While social media can enhance a brand through increased visibility, it can also be a pitfall with 35% of business owners finding the speed at which news travels via these networks as the main challenge to reputation control.</p><p>Disclosures around diversity and inclusion/equal pay and addressing pay gaps (28%), a financial scandal (28%) and revelations around working conditions (27%) are the biggest nightmare when it comes to a business’sreputation being tarnished with owners saying the consequences that poor reputation have had on their business in the past include a third receiving negative media coverage and 32% experiencing either investmentwithdrawal or a negative impact on profits.</p><p>Social media is a platform that businesses can use to enhance their brand via increased visibility, but it can also be the pitfall to their reputation, as it opens the door to other areas of reputation management from negative media coverage to employment development needed. 35% of business owners find the speed at which news travels now on social media as the main challenge to reputation control.</p><p>To show the heightened attention businesses are placing on protecting and preserving their reputation, data shows that the vast majority (86%) of business owners agree that reputation management is more of a priority than training staff, and 87% view it as more of a priority than diversity across their business.</p><p>Brand’s biggest nightmare when it comes to ways their reputation could be tarnished are disclosures around diversity and inclusion / equal pay and addressing pay gaps (28%), a financial scandal (28%) and revelations around working conditions (27%).</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Nick Gold, Founder &amp; Managing Director, Speakers Corner, talks</strong> to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> about<strong> </strong> how businesses can shape their reputation, as 86% of businesses owners say reputation management is more of a priority than training staff with 87% viewing it as more of a priority than diversity across their business.&nbsp;</p><p>In world in which a tweet can tank share prices, ‘cancel-culture’ can dethrone a CEO, and poor brand management can cause public outcry, consumer perception is more important than ever, affecting the trust of your customers, recruiting the right talent and securing investment. </p><p>While social media can enhance a brand through increased visibility, it can also be a pitfall with 35% of business owners finding the speed at which news travels via these networks as the main challenge to reputation control.</p><p>Disclosures around diversity and inclusion/equal pay and addressing pay gaps (28%), a financial scandal (28%) and revelations around working conditions (27%) are the biggest nightmare when it comes to a business’sreputation being tarnished with owners saying the consequences that poor reputation have had on their business in the past include a third receiving negative media coverage and 32% experiencing either investmentwithdrawal or a negative impact on profits.</p><p>Social media is a platform that businesses can use to enhance their brand via increased visibility, but it can also be the pitfall to their reputation, as it opens the door to other areas of reputation management from negative media coverage to employment development needed. 35% of business owners find the speed at which news travels now on social media as the main challenge to reputation control.</p><p>To show the heightened attention businesses are placing on protecting and preserving their reputation, data shows that the vast majority (86%) of business owners agree that reputation management is more of a priority than training staff, and 87% view it as more of a priority than diversity across their business.</p><p>Brand’s biggest nightmare when it comes to ways their reputation could be tarnished are disclosures around diversity and inclusion / equal pay and addressing pay gaps (28%), a financial scandal (28%) and revelations around working conditions (27%).</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">6526e33f-0f01-4e6c-9f56-f7ca9c4a0773</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 11 Apr 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/4cb32c82-7217-4b24-9ade-8be062d1d644/Podcast-Radio-Business-Nick-Gold-Speakers-Corner-13-04-23.mp3" length="33772146" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:04</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>HOW TO AVOID MISTAKES GOING INTO THE NEW FINANCIAL YEAR | Jack Withrington</title><itunes:title>HOW TO AVOID MISTAKES GOING INTO THE NEW FINANCIAL YEAR | Jack Withrington</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jack Withrington, Head of Public Affairs &amp; Public Policy at AAT,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business  about </strong>research that has revealed 42% of those who have employed an accountant or tax advisor have lost money because of their poor work. Meanwhile, although one in three accountants are unregulated, this group are responsible for two-thirds of complaints received by HMRC.</p><p>With high costs biting, 41% admit to choosing the more affordable option, while only 24% prioritise qualifications over price. The AAT(Association of Accounting Technicians) is urging us to make sure we all do our homework before handing over any information, as it reveals the top five mistakes from the financial year just ending:</p><p><strong>Top five mistakes</strong></p><ul><li>Using unregulated accountants</li><li>Not knowing your deadlines</li><li>Waiting to enlist help</li><li>Not having your paperwork in order</li><li>Not putting money aside to pay for your tax bill</li></ul><br/><p>To help businesses and individuals prepare for the new financial year, AAT also releasing its top five tips to help you avoid making a mistake –and even losing money - especially at a time when the cost-of-living crisis is putting finances under increasing pressure:</p><p><strong>Top five tips to avoid making a mistake</strong></p><ul><li> Write a business plan</li><li> Get organised now</li><li> Get your data sorted</li><li> Sharpen your business skills</li><li> Consider using a regulated accountant.</li></ul><br/><p><strong>So how about the risks? </strong>Well, 39% of self-employed people and those with a side hustle (49%) have also lost money.</p><p>A quarter have overpaid on tax (25%) with 17% also missing a tax deadline. Worryingly, 51% have had to hire a qualified accountant to correct the mistakes of a previous unqualified accountant’s work.</p><p>With so many of us trusting our accountants, it’s crucial we get the right one. Almost half (46%) admit they trust their accountant or tax advisor more than their partner (46%) with their finances with 69% admitting their accountant know more about their finances than anyone else – even their partners, with 35% not wanting to share their bank information with their other half.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jack Withrington, Head of Public Affairs &amp; Public Policy at AAT,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business  about </strong>research that has revealed 42% of those who have employed an accountant or tax advisor have lost money because of their poor work. Meanwhile, although one in three accountants are unregulated, this group are responsible for two-thirds of complaints received by HMRC.</p><p>With high costs biting, 41% admit to choosing the more affordable option, while only 24% prioritise qualifications over price. The AAT(Association of Accounting Technicians) is urging us to make sure we all do our homework before handing over any information, as it reveals the top five mistakes from the financial year just ending:</p><p><strong>Top five mistakes</strong></p><ul><li>Using unregulated accountants</li><li>Not knowing your deadlines</li><li>Waiting to enlist help</li><li>Not having your paperwork in order</li><li>Not putting money aside to pay for your tax bill</li></ul><br/><p>To help businesses and individuals prepare for the new financial year, AAT also releasing its top five tips to help you avoid making a mistake –and even losing money - especially at a time when the cost-of-living crisis is putting finances under increasing pressure:</p><p><strong>Top five tips to avoid making a mistake</strong></p><ul><li> Write a business plan</li><li> Get organised now</li><li> Get your data sorted</li><li> Sharpen your business skills</li><li> Consider using a regulated accountant.</li></ul><br/><p><strong>So how about the risks? </strong>Well, 39% of self-employed people and those with a side hustle (49%) have also lost money.</p><p>A quarter have overpaid on tax (25%) with 17% also missing a tax deadline. Worryingly, 51% have had to hire a qualified accountant to correct the mistakes of a previous unqualified accountant’s work.</p><p>With so many of us trusting our accountants, it’s crucial we get the right one. Almost half (46%) admit they trust their accountant or tax advisor more than their partner (46%) with their finances with 69% admitting their accountant know more about their finances than anyone else – even their partners, with 35% not wanting to share their bank information with their other half.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">d13ab059-edb2-4c61-b230-62d15255c0b1</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 11 Apr 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/d4b5a1c3-3e5a-4dd5-861e-0378f0d3be03/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jack-Withrington-05-04-23.mp3" length="31583084" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:10</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>50 YEARS OF THE BARCODE: CHANGING THE COURSE OF GLOBAL COMMERCE | Sarah Atkins</title><itunes:title>50 YEARS OF THE BARCODE: CHANGING THE COURSE OF GLOBAL COMMERCE | Sarah Atkins</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sarah Atkins, Director, GS1 UK</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about 50 years since the birth of the barcode. </p><p>Despite being used by millions daily,nobody really knows how they work, or who created them.</p><p>The thin and fat lines were dreamed up by Norman Joseph Woodland, who drew the prototype barcode in the sand on a Florida beach in 1948 after being inspired by his Boy Scout training where he learnt that Morse Code sent electronic information through dots and dashes.&nbsp;</p><p>Heset out to create a two-dimensional linear morse code – pulling downward dots and dashes in the sand with his fingers, with thin lines from the dots, and thicker lines from the dashes.&nbsp; </p><p>Fast-forward 25 years to 3rd April 1973, and this vision became reality when an industry-wide agreement was made to adopt the barcode.</p><p>This changed the course of global commerce forever.</p><p>A year later in 1974 in a supermarket in Ohio, a pack of Wrigley’s chewing gum became the first product in the world to be scanned with a barcode.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>Four years later in 1979 – in true British fashion – a box of Melrose Tea Bags became the first live product to be scanned in the UK at a Keymarkets supermarket in Spalding. This supermarket is now a Morrisons.</strong></p><p>GS1 are the world’s only authorised provider of Global Trade Item Numbers (GTINs), the unique number that each barcode represents.</p><p>Anne Godfrey GS1 UK CEO said:<em>“The invention of the Barcode is one of the great, untold stories in the history of our modern economy.Todaythe barcode is more widely used than Google. It has revolutionised our day-to-day in ways most do not realise – keeping our shelves stocked with products and ingredients from around the world, helping us find and buy products online, ensuring what we consume is genuine and safe, helping the NHS save time,money and lives – and much more.”</em></p><p>Yet, despite their wide use – and the average Brit interacting with them an average 20 times a day – GS1’s new research found surprisingly few knew the extent of their purpose or who the inventor was. </p><p>According to the study and despite his global legacy, just three per cent of Brits recognised Norman amongst a list of inventors and researchers of similar stature. BillGates topped the list (80 per cent) followed by Marie Curie (75 per cent) and James Dyson (69 per cent).</p><p>Meanwhile, just 10% knew barcodes are used in recycling schemes and just 6% were aware of their role in construction.</p><p>However, perhaps most surprisingly, only 13% knew the barcode’s role in healthcare, despite the fact they save the NHS millions of pounds and thousands of lives, every year. </p><p>Retail was the sector where most people recognised their use – but still a third did not know the potentially lifesaving role they can play in consumer transparency, especially those suffering allergies. </p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sarah Atkins, Director, GS1 UK</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>about 50 years since the birth of the barcode. </p><p>Despite being used by millions daily,nobody really knows how they work, or who created them.</p><p>The thin and fat lines were dreamed up by Norman Joseph Woodland, who drew the prototype barcode in the sand on a Florida beach in 1948 after being inspired by his Boy Scout training where he learnt that Morse Code sent electronic information through dots and dashes.&nbsp;</p><p>Heset out to create a two-dimensional linear morse code – pulling downward dots and dashes in the sand with his fingers, with thin lines from the dots, and thicker lines from the dashes.&nbsp; </p><p>Fast-forward 25 years to 3rd April 1973, and this vision became reality when an industry-wide agreement was made to adopt the barcode.</p><p>This changed the course of global commerce forever.</p><p>A year later in 1974 in a supermarket in Ohio, a pack of Wrigley’s chewing gum became the first product in the world to be scanned with a barcode.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>Four years later in 1979 – in true British fashion – a box of Melrose Tea Bags became the first live product to be scanned in the UK at a Keymarkets supermarket in Spalding. This supermarket is now a Morrisons.</strong></p><p>GS1 are the world’s only authorised provider of Global Trade Item Numbers (GTINs), the unique number that each barcode represents.</p><p>Anne Godfrey GS1 UK CEO said:<em>“The invention of the Barcode is one of the great, untold stories in the history of our modern economy.Todaythe barcode is more widely used than Google. It has revolutionised our day-to-day in ways most do not realise – keeping our shelves stocked with products and ingredients from around the world, helping us find and buy products online, ensuring what we consume is genuine and safe, helping the NHS save time,money and lives – and much more.”</em></p><p>Yet, despite their wide use – and the average Brit interacting with them an average 20 times a day – GS1’s new research found surprisingly few knew the extent of their purpose or who the inventor was. </p><p>According to the study and despite his global legacy, just three per cent of Brits recognised Norman amongst a list of inventors and researchers of similar stature. BillGates topped the list (80 per cent) followed by Marie Curie (75 per cent) and James Dyson (69 per cent).</p><p>Meanwhile, just 10% knew barcodes are used in recycling schemes and just 6% were aware of their role in construction.</p><p>However, perhaps most surprisingly, only 13% knew the barcode’s role in healthcare, despite the fact they save the NHS millions of pounds and thousands of lives, every year. </p><p>Retail was the sector where most people recognised their use – but still a third did not know the potentially lifesaving role they can play in consumer transparency, especially those suffering allergies. </p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">73598de7-dd4c-4e29-91da-c7d741961714</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 11 Apr 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/7b59a89b-3ae7-4778-81e2-48b5b99f89ee/Podcast-Radio-Business-Sarah-Atkins-GS1-03-04-23.mp3" length="38731231" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>16:08</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>ARE BUSINESSES READY FOR THE ‘GATHERING CYBER STORM’ ? | Martin Lee</title><itunes:title>ARE BUSINESSES READY FOR THE ‘GATHERING CYBER STORM’ ? | Martin Lee</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Martin Lee, Technical Lead of Security Research of Talos,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business  </strong>about the impending “cyber storm” that is currently brewing, according to leading cybersecurity experts, with emerging technologies, the hybrid approach to company organisation, and the blurring of business boundaries posing new risks to organisations around the world, both large and small.</p><p>Indeed, 82% of businesses are expecting a cybersecurity incident to disrupt their operations in the next two years, while 60% experienced an incident within the last 12 months – costing 41% at least $500,000.</p><p>However, only 15% globally have a cybersecurity posture ‘mature’ enough to defend against these developing threats, according to the Cisco Cybersecurity Readiness Index: Resilience in a Hybrid World released on TUESDAY 21st MARCH 2023 which classifies organisationsinto four categories: Beginner, Formative, Progressive, and Mature. </p><p>While only 15% are Mature, more than half fall into the Beginner (8%) or Formative (47%) stages, meaning they are performing below average on cybersecurity readiness.</p><p>Closing this ‘readiness gap’ should become a global imperative and top priority for business leaders, according to Cisco, who is urging businesses to be proactive and act sooner, rather than later. To attain resilience, firms require telemetry across ecosystems, active monitoring and filtering, actionable intelligence and expertise,risk-based contextual analysis and trust assessment, an open platform across users/devices/networks/applications, and optimised efficacy to spring back faster.&nbsp;</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Martin Lee, Technical Lead of Security Research of Talos,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business  </strong>about the impending “cyber storm” that is currently brewing, according to leading cybersecurity experts, with emerging technologies, the hybrid approach to company organisation, and the blurring of business boundaries posing new risks to organisations around the world, both large and small.</p><p>Indeed, 82% of businesses are expecting a cybersecurity incident to disrupt their operations in the next two years, while 60% experienced an incident within the last 12 months – costing 41% at least $500,000.</p><p>However, only 15% globally have a cybersecurity posture ‘mature’ enough to defend against these developing threats, according to the Cisco Cybersecurity Readiness Index: Resilience in a Hybrid World released on TUESDAY 21st MARCH 2023 which classifies organisationsinto four categories: Beginner, Formative, Progressive, and Mature. </p><p>While only 15% are Mature, more than half fall into the Beginner (8%) or Formative (47%) stages, meaning they are performing below average on cybersecurity readiness.</p><p>Closing this ‘readiness gap’ should become a global imperative and top priority for business leaders, according to Cisco, who is urging businesses to be proactive and act sooner, rather than later. To attain resilience, firms require telemetry across ecosystems, active monitoring and filtering, actionable intelligence and expertise,risk-based contextual analysis and trust assessment, an open platform across users/devices/networks/applications, and optimised efficacy to spring back faster.&nbsp;</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">43858bd4-2a48-4fe7-9b8d-44d215b1e5b9</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 11 Apr 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/82fe0628-34c6-46e0-b76c-ad8f1d06f0ca/Podcast-Radio-Business-Martin-Lee-Talos-22-03-23.mp3" length="41581713" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>17:20</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>BOOSTING YOUTH EMPLOYABILITY: GIVING UNDER 30&apos;S WORK OPPORTUNITIES | Michael Kienle</title><itunes:title>BOOSTING YOUTH EMPLOYABILITY: GIVING UNDER 30&apos;S WORK OPPORTUNITIES | Michael Kienle</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Michael Kienle, Global Vice President of Talent Acquisition, L’Oréal,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the BOOST initiative and the importance of preparing young people for the world of work.</p><p>As the global economy edges towards recession, some large employers, notably in the technology sector, are announcing hiring freezes or job cuts.</p><p>Yet, the world’s biggest cosmetics company is ramping up employment of young people based on a strong sense of responsibility to the next generation.</p><p>L’Oréal For Youth provides work opportunities for people under 30, including jobs, paid internships, and apprenticeships at the group behind brands such as L’Oréal Paris, Maybelline, and Garnier.</p><p>The global programme offered 18,342 places last year and L’Oréal is on track to reach 25,000 enrolments in 2022. It has also upskilled 70,000 learners, career-coached 18,000 young people and mentored 13,000.</p><p>L’Oréal believes the role of the private sector in training today’s youth will become increasingly important – and their research shows 47% of Gen Z are waiting for companies to help them develop their skills, while just 39% feel prepared for the future.</p><p>The number one way in which students expect employers to support them is by providing courses and training.</p><p>To that end, L’Oréal is announcing a new programme to increase the employability of young people, especially those from under-represented backgrounds having difficulties accessing the labour market.</p><p>BOOST will offer 20,000 students each year access to a selection of online courses curated by L’Oréal experts on the skills of the future: digital sustainability, and people skills.</p><p>The students and new job entrants, from North Asia to South America, are selected on a discretionary and individual basis by worldwide L’Oréal recruiters who spot potential.</p><p>100,000 beneficiaries will also be offered guided projects aimed at building job-relevant skills in less than two hours with hands-on tutorials.</p><p>In doing so, BOOST will open the doors to vital education that bridges the gap between school and work, giving young people access to certifications from prestigious universities.</p><p>L’Oréal is also encouraging young people to join Masterclass Week 19-23 September 2022, when five L’Oréal leaders will share their knowledge, experiences, and insights during 1-hour, livevirtual sessions.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Michael Kienle, Global Vice President of Talent Acquisition, L’Oréal,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the BOOST initiative and the importance of preparing young people for the world of work.</p><p>As the global economy edges towards recession, some large employers, notably in the technology sector, are announcing hiring freezes or job cuts.</p><p>Yet, the world’s biggest cosmetics company is ramping up employment of young people based on a strong sense of responsibility to the next generation.</p><p>L’Oréal For Youth provides work opportunities for people under 30, including jobs, paid internships, and apprenticeships at the group behind brands such as L’Oréal Paris, Maybelline, and Garnier.</p><p>The global programme offered 18,342 places last year and L’Oréal is on track to reach 25,000 enrolments in 2022. It has also upskilled 70,000 learners, career-coached 18,000 young people and mentored 13,000.</p><p>L’Oréal believes the role of the private sector in training today’s youth will become increasingly important – and their research shows 47% of Gen Z are waiting for companies to help them develop their skills, while just 39% feel prepared for the future.</p><p>The number one way in which students expect employers to support them is by providing courses and training.</p><p>To that end, L’Oréal is announcing a new programme to increase the employability of young people, especially those from under-represented backgrounds having difficulties accessing the labour market.</p><p>BOOST will offer 20,000 students each year access to a selection of online courses curated by L’Oréal experts on the skills of the future: digital sustainability, and people skills.</p><p>The students and new job entrants, from North Asia to South America, are selected on a discretionary and individual basis by worldwide L’Oréal recruiters who spot potential.</p><p>100,000 beneficiaries will also be offered guided projects aimed at building job-relevant skills in less than two hours with hands-on tutorials.</p><p>In doing so, BOOST will open the doors to vital education that bridges the gap between school and work, giving young people access to certifications from prestigious universities.</p><p>L’Oréal is also encouraging young people to join Masterclass Week 19-23 September 2022, when five L’Oréal leaders will share their knowledge, experiences, and insights during 1-hour, livevirtual sessions.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">a826542a-cb77-4246-aee7-f2da2a38f52d</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/a0cc190c-b0b4-44b4-98a0-ea38a43db8ef/Podcast-Radio-Business-Michael-Kienle-Loreal-29-09-22.mp3" length="30672978" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>12:47</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>UNLOCKING WELLBEING AND CREATIVITY IN THE WORKPLACE | Dan Scanlon &amp; Raul Aparici</title><itunes:title>UNLOCKING WELLBEING AND CREATIVITY IN THE WORKPLACE | Dan Scanlon &amp; Raul Aparici</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dan Scanlon, Executive Vice President of Brookfield Properties &amp; Raul Aparici, Head of Faculty at the School of Life,</strong>talk to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how we can  increase productivity of the nation’s workforce in this challenging climate? discuss the new trends emerging within the relationship between the workforce and the places in which they work and  how we can enhance workplace happiness.</p><p>With a challenging economic climate, underlined by growing inflation and a weakening pound, productivity of the nation’s workforce is now more important than ever before. Research shows that installation of art in offices can boost productivity by between 15% and 17% and if you go further and engage workers, the growth in efficiency can rise up to a third (32%).</p><p>A new study of over 3,000 office workers in the UK found that a staggering 63% of 18–29-year-olds prefer going to the office to work over working from home, with the number increasing to three-quarters (75%) of those who work in offices with a lot of art.<em> </em></p><p>Aside from creativity, well-being and an understanding of employee mental health is seen as a crucial factor for workers in their relationship with work. Nearly 7 in 10 (69%) of people agreed that office wellness events help their wellbeing, with two-thirds(69%) of office employees stated that they would benefit from a wellbeing app to connect them to cultural events in the workplace.&nbsp;</p><p>Research by Brookfield Properties in partnership with The School of Lifeas part of their comprehensive Art of the Workplace’ study, found that 77% of respondents affirmed that having interesting social, cultural or wellbeing events available contributes to their wellbeing.</p><p>The release of the report is launched ahead of WHO World Mental Health Day 10 October 2022 and coincides with a new partnership, that will see Brookfield Properties partner with The School of Life, the global organisation helping people lead more fulfilling lives,with a shared commitment to propel happier workplaces and workers.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dan Scanlon, Executive Vice President of Brookfield Properties &amp; Raul Aparici, Head of Faculty at the School of Life,</strong>talk to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how we can  increase productivity of the nation’s workforce in this challenging climate? discuss the new trends emerging within the relationship between the workforce and the places in which they work and  how we can enhance workplace happiness.</p><p>With a challenging economic climate, underlined by growing inflation and a weakening pound, productivity of the nation’s workforce is now more important than ever before. Research shows that installation of art in offices can boost productivity by between 15% and 17% and if you go further and engage workers, the growth in efficiency can rise up to a third (32%).</p><p>A new study of over 3,000 office workers in the UK found that a staggering 63% of 18–29-year-olds prefer going to the office to work over working from home, with the number increasing to three-quarters (75%) of those who work in offices with a lot of art.<em> </em></p><p>Aside from creativity, well-being and an understanding of employee mental health is seen as a crucial factor for workers in their relationship with work. Nearly 7 in 10 (69%) of people agreed that office wellness events help their wellbeing, with two-thirds(69%) of office employees stated that they would benefit from a wellbeing app to connect them to cultural events in the workplace.&nbsp;</p><p>Research by Brookfield Properties in partnership with The School of Lifeas part of their comprehensive Art of the Workplace’ study, found that 77% of respondents affirmed that having interesting social, cultural or wellbeing events available contributes to their wellbeing.</p><p>The release of the report is launched ahead of WHO World Mental Health Day 10 October 2022 and coincides with a new partnership, that will see Brookfield Properties partner with The School of Life, the global organisation helping people lead more fulfilling lives,with a shared commitment to propel happier workplaces and workers.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">086c4f33-2014-4ca3-b6d2-808e09bec4d4</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/63feb369-1c73-4b20-85fd-f037c26d768e/Podcast-Radio-Business-Dan-Scanlon-Raul-Aparici-Brockfield-Scho.mp3" length="24365974" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:09</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>GONE PHISHING: THE PERILS OF YOUR BROWSING HISTORY | Jaya Baloo</title><itunes:title>GONE PHISHING: THE PERILS OF YOUR BROWSING HISTORY | Jaya Baloo</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jaya Baloo, Chief Information Security Officer at Avast,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the recent research, offer hints and tips for people looking to improve their online security and explain how some of their cybersecurity could be breached if not maintained correctly.</p><p>We live in a digital world. We can order groceries, buy a car, and find a new furry four-legged friend all at the tap of a touchscreen and openingof a browser. But the wild west of the internet, privacy, as evidenced by 64% of UK adults keeping their browsing history private, is paramount.</p><p>With 4.6 billion of us ‘digital citizens’ around the world, the internet is ripe for scammers and advertisers which can seduce us with frightening slickness and ease if we do not possess the know how of how to spot red flags and keep our online selves cybersecure.</p><p>In fact, a lofty 26% of us keep our browsing history private to hide our activity on dating sites – just in case we’re forced to explain the tinder match from hell to people.</p><p>As we post more and more about our lives on the internet, we’ve become more suspect about who sees it – have you ever snatched your phone when friend or family member’s hand reaches for it? Not sharing our devices has become commonplace for 69% of UK adults.</p><p>Keeping a tight grip on our online security is necessary, however. Over half of UK adults report being targeted by a phishing scam and 49% of us feel like we’re being tracked online –with 3 in 10 Brits feeling unsafe that companies can track us.</p><p>But closing the knowledge gap is necessary if Brits are to have more control over their online footprint. Amazingly, only 39% of us know how to delete their search history on all their devices. Over half (53%) of Brits don’t know there is free software which can keep their history hidden without them having to delete it and a staggering.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jaya Baloo, Chief Information Security Officer at Avast,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the recent research, offer hints and tips for people looking to improve their online security and explain how some of their cybersecurity could be breached if not maintained correctly.</p><p>We live in a digital world. We can order groceries, buy a car, and find a new furry four-legged friend all at the tap of a touchscreen and openingof a browser. But the wild west of the internet, privacy, as evidenced by 64% of UK adults keeping their browsing history private, is paramount.</p><p>With 4.6 billion of us ‘digital citizens’ around the world, the internet is ripe for scammers and advertisers which can seduce us with frightening slickness and ease if we do not possess the know how of how to spot red flags and keep our online selves cybersecure.</p><p>In fact, a lofty 26% of us keep our browsing history private to hide our activity on dating sites – just in case we’re forced to explain the tinder match from hell to people.</p><p>As we post more and more about our lives on the internet, we’ve become more suspect about who sees it – have you ever snatched your phone when friend or family member’s hand reaches for it? Not sharing our devices has become commonplace for 69% of UK adults.</p><p>Keeping a tight grip on our online security is necessary, however. Over half of UK adults report being targeted by a phishing scam and 49% of us feel like we’re being tracked online –with 3 in 10 Brits feeling unsafe that companies can track us.</p><p>But closing the knowledge gap is necessary if Brits are to have more control over their online footprint. Amazingly, only 39% of us know how to delete their search history on all their devices. Over half (53%) of Brits don’t know there is free software which can keep their history hidden without them having to delete it and a staggering.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">fd329497-cca1-48d9-bc4d-3d894f600176</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/9896e7d1-1a62-404d-9695-18bfd75fbaab/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jaya-Baloo-Avast-12-10-22.mp3" length="32520358" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:33</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>TACKLING CLIMATE CHANGE ONE PURCHASE AT A TIME | Emma kisby</title><itunes:title>TACKLING CLIMATE CHANGE ONE PURCHASE AT A TIME | Emma kisby</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Emma Kisby, CEO of carbon footprint management experts Cogo,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how Cogo helps people and businesses to measure the carbon emissions of their everyday spending as well as reduce, and offset their impact on the climate.</p><p>Emma Kisby &amp; COGO seek  to empower hundreds of millions of consumers and businesses worldwide to measure, reduce and compensate for their impact on people and the planet by helping them be more conscious of the impact their spending has.</p><p>Emma talks about the disconnect between consumers wanting to know about the impact of their spending, yet not knowing where to find this information as research published on 12th OCTOBER 2022 shows that while four in five mobile banking users want to know more about the environmental impact of their spending, only a fifth expect their bank to inform them - three in five would like to receive information from their bank such as advice based on their spending habits, or support in switching to EVs, minimising home energy use, and investing in green financial products.</p><p>Cogo helps people and businesses tomeasure the carbon emissions of their everyday spending as well as reduce, and offset their impact on the climate, displaying the information in their regular banking app. Cogo also offers ‘nudges’ to help people change their habits and reduce their overall carbon footprint, with them able to take recommended actions such as not buying fast fashion or eating less meat. </p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Emma Kisby, CEO of carbon footprint management experts Cogo,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how Cogo helps people and businesses to measure the carbon emissions of their everyday spending as well as reduce, and offset their impact on the climate.</p><p>Emma Kisby &amp; COGO seek  to empower hundreds of millions of consumers and businesses worldwide to measure, reduce and compensate for their impact on people and the planet by helping them be more conscious of the impact their spending has.</p><p>Emma talks about the disconnect between consumers wanting to know about the impact of their spending, yet not knowing where to find this information as research published on 12th OCTOBER 2022 shows that while four in five mobile banking users want to know more about the environmental impact of their spending, only a fifth expect their bank to inform them - three in five would like to receive information from their bank such as advice based on their spending habits, or support in switching to EVs, minimising home energy use, and investing in green financial products.</p><p>Cogo helps people and businesses tomeasure the carbon emissions of their everyday spending as well as reduce, and offset their impact on the climate, displaying the information in their regular banking app. Cogo also offers ‘nudges’ to help people change their habits and reduce their overall carbon footprint, with them able to take recommended actions such as not buying fast fashion or eating less meat. </p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">c76b26b5-2130-420d-8682-2e86eebfdb9d</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/64305180-810d-4ffc-94af-aeda80f3237f/Podcast-Radio-Business-Emma-Kisby-COGO-12-10-22.mp3" length="20687933" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>08:37</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>RECESSION NOT LOYALTY FOR STAFF RETENTION | Ian McVey</title><itunes:title>RECESSION NOT LOYALTY FOR STAFF RETENTION | Ian McVey</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Ian McVey, SVP &amp; General Manager EMEA, Visier, </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how job security &amp; lower salary fears are keeping the workforce in their current roles.</p><p>Businesses across the UK can thank the recession for a retained workforce as new research from business analytics company Visier has revealed eight in </p><p>ten (81%) are planning on riding it out with their current employer, despite 46% willing to find (or open to) new roles if it wasn’t a factor.</p><p>Furthermore, almost three in ten (29%) would have considered changing roles earlier had they foreseen the recession. What’s keeping them is primarily job security (57%) and concerns about having to settle for lower salaries (43%) – while <em>last hired, first fired </em>is not a risk 67% are willing to take. </p><p>These circumstances have led to 45% feeling trapped in their job, with 30% admitting they are more likely to ‘quiet quit’ as a result. This will allow them more time to plan their next move (11%) or pursue personal projects (9%), while 7% know they are going to change jobs after the recession so “it’s not worth trying anymore”.</p><p>So,despite high job vacancies and little opposition to staff retention, businesses could face further hardship post-recession – or even a less motivated and productive workforce when they need it most – if they do not take steps to support their employees. </p><p>Salary increases will make workforces more content (71%) and motivated (71%) – similar to bonus schemes (43%)– while learning and development opportunities (29%) may help businesses grow and retain staff, while also providing useful skills to help employees personally face and deal with their finances during the recession.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Ian McVey, SVP &amp; General Manager EMEA, Visier, </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how job security &amp; lower salary fears are keeping the workforce in their current roles.</p><p>Businesses across the UK can thank the recession for a retained workforce as new research from business analytics company Visier has revealed eight in </p><p>ten (81%) are planning on riding it out with their current employer, despite 46% willing to find (or open to) new roles if it wasn’t a factor.</p><p>Furthermore, almost three in ten (29%) would have considered changing roles earlier had they foreseen the recession. What’s keeping them is primarily job security (57%) and concerns about having to settle for lower salaries (43%) – while <em>last hired, first fired </em>is not a risk 67% are willing to take. </p><p>These circumstances have led to 45% feeling trapped in their job, with 30% admitting they are more likely to ‘quiet quit’ as a result. This will allow them more time to plan their next move (11%) or pursue personal projects (9%), while 7% know they are going to change jobs after the recession so “it’s not worth trying anymore”.</p><p>So,despite high job vacancies and little opposition to staff retention, businesses could face further hardship post-recession – or even a less motivated and productive workforce when they need it most – if they do not take steps to support their employees. </p><p>Salary increases will make workforces more content (71%) and motivated (71%) – similar to bonus schemes (43%)– while learning and development opportunities (29%) may help businesses grow and retain staff, while also providing useful skills to help employees personally face and deal with their finances during the recession.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">510f68b1-75d2-40cc-8633-197e652e345e</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/e7d50bb1-a089-43c8-b50b-8812bc628c93/Podcast-Business-Radio-Ian-McVey-Visier-20-10-22.mp3" length="33893354" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:07</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>HOW THE WORKPLACE CAN EASE THE COST-OF-LIVING CRISIS | Jonathan Watts-Lay</title><itunes:title>HOW THE WORKPLACE CAN EASE THE COST-OF-LIVING CRISIS | Jonathan Watts-Lay</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jonathan Watts-Lay, co-founder and director at WEALTH at work,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how employers can help staff through the cost of living crisis and believes any employees struggling with their finances should speak to their boss to find out what help is on offer.</p><p>The REBA/WEALTH at work Employee Financial Wellbeing Survey 2022 is published on TUESDAY 18th OCTOBER 2022 – it says companies’ productivity and performance is at risk of dipping unless employers do more to support their employees’ financial wellbeing amid the deepening cost-of-living crisis which is highlighting to board level the importance of making sure workers feel secure and in control, despite their finances coming under increasing pressure while 59% of employers say poor financial literacy is a key financial wellbeing risk.&nbsp;</p><p>Employers cite rising energy prices as the No 1 risk to the financial wellbeing of their staff (91%), with other cost-of-living concerns, such as rising consumer inflation (81%), rising rent costs (63%), wages not being high enough to cover the cost of living (50%), and high household debt levels (49%) also factors. In addition, given recent interest rate hikes, many will now also be concerned about mortgage costs as interest rates could head evenhigher, while 71% of those using credit as a safety net report a negative effect on their health, relationships, or ability to work.</p><p>Employers see enhancing the general good health of their staff (85%), creating equity and fairness (69%) and ensuring inclusivity across the entire workforce (68%) as the main reasons to offer financial wellbeing as a benefit. </p><p>They know they must focus more on inclusivity with support for low earners (32%), and families and dependents (38%) among the key areas to introduce in the next two years while 41% plan to offer sustainable wellbeing products and services in this time. As the crisis deepens, boards have become more aware of the importance of financial wellbeing – even more so than staying ahead of competitors and the fallout of Brexit - &nbsp;with 70% of workplaces saying increasing financial capability is a priority.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jonathan Watts-Lay, co-founder and director at WEALTH at work,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how employers can help staff through the cost of living crisis and believes any employees struggling with their finances should speak to their boss to find out what help is on offer.</p><p>The REBA/WEALTH at work Employee Financial Wellbeing Survey 2022 is published on TUESDAY 18th OCTOBER 2022 – it says companies’ productivity and performance is at risk of dipping unless employers do more to support their employees’ financial wellbeing amid the deepening cost-of-living crisis which is highlighting to board level the importance of making sure workers feel secure and in control, despite their finances coming under increasing pressure while 59% of employers say poor financial literacy is a key financial wellbeing risk.&nbsp;</p><p>Employers cite rising energy prices as the No 1 risk to the financial wellbeing of their staff (91%), with other cost-of-living concerns, such as rising consumer inflation (81%), rising rent costs (63%), wages not being high enough to cover the cost of living (50%), and high household debt levels (49%) also factors. In addition, given recent interest rate hikes, many will now also be concerned about mortgage costs as interest rates could head evenhigher, while 71% of those using credit as a safety net report a negative effect on their health, relationships, or ability to work.</p><p>Employers see enhancing the general good health of their staff (85%), creating equity and fairness (69%) and ensuring inclusivity across the entire workforce (68%) as the main reasons to offer financial wellbeing as a benefit. </p><p>They know they must focus more on inclusivity with support for low earners (32%), and families and dependents (38%) among the key areas to introduce in the next two years while 41% plan to offer sustainable wellbeing products and services in this time. As the crisis deepens, boards have become more aware of the importance of financial wellbeing – even more so than staying ahead of competitors and the fallout of Brexit - &nbsp;with 70% of workplaces saying increasing financial capability is a priority.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">290c9624-fde7-432e-abb3-596be293eb11</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/d5c41cf3-1e64-4e04-8e78-4bde7a968ba1/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jonathan-Watts-Lay-WEALTH-at-Work-20-10-.mp3" length="32623803" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:36</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>UNDER 34&apos;s TWICE AS LIKELY TO FALL VICTIM TO FINANCIAL SCAMS | Sarah Card</title><itunes:title>UNDER 34&apos;s TWICE AS LIKELY TO FALL VICTIM TO FINANCIAL SCAMS | Sarah Card</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sarah Card, Head of Delivery and Risk at Marcus by Goldman Sachs,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss  the tactics scammers use to entice people to part with their money, how to spot fraud, and the common mistakes that can lead you to being a target for fraudsters.</p><p>Fraudsters are using the  cost-of-living crisis to target people with scams, with younger people most likely to fall victim to the pressure tactics often used by scammers. Indeed a fifth (22%) of people aged 18-34 saying have been a victim of financial fraud at least once, in comparison to only one in 10 people aged 55+ and 12% of those aged 35-54.</p><p>As the economic situation worsens for millions around the UK, three in 10 people have been targeted by fraud which exploits the rising cost-of-living while 42% of us are more worried about scams than pre-pandemic, and 60% agree it is harder to spot a scam than it was five years ago. </p><p>About 64% of us have regretted a decision we have made when under strain, with the top reasons including being put under time pressure to make a decision (43%), communicating with a very persuasive person (34%) and feeling too embarrassed to decline (29%).</p><p>Almost two thirds of UK adults (64%) have regretted a decision they havemade when under strain, with the top reasons including being put under time pressure to make a decision (43%), communicating with a very persuasive person (34%) and feeling too embarrassed to decline (29%).</p><p>Data from Marcus by Goldman Sachs reveals that one in five (21%) 18–34-year-olds struggle to think clearly when put under pressure during a cold call. They are also the most likely age group to give away personal information on the phone when put under pressure, however, over half (55%) of people in the age category believe they’re too technologically savvy to fall victim to a scam.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Sarah Card, Head of Delivery and Risk at Marcus by Goldman Sachs,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss  the tactics scammers use to entice people to part with their money, how to spot fraud, and the common mistakes that can lead you to being a target for fraudsters.</p><p>Fraudsters are using the  cost-of-living crisis to target people with scams, with younger people most likely to fall victim to the pressure tactics often used by scammers. Indeed a fifth (22%) of people aged 18-34 saying have been a victim of financial fraud at least once, in comparison to only one in 10 people aged 55+ and 12% of those aged 35-54.</p><p>As the economic situation worsens for millions around the UK, three in 10 people have been targeted by fraud which exploits the rising cost-of-living while 42% of us are more worried about scams than pre-pandemic, and 60% agree it is harder to spot a scam than it was five years ago. </p><p>About 64% of us have regretted a decision we have made when under strain, with the top reasons including being put under time pressure to make a decision (43%), communicating with a very persuasive person (34%) and feeling too embarrassed to decline (29%).</p><p>Almost two thirds of UK adults (64%) have regretted a decision they havemade when under strain, with the top reasons including being put under time pressure to make a decision (43%), communicating with a very persuasive person (34%) and feeling too embarrassed to decline (29%).</p><p>Data from Marcus by Goldman Sachs reveals that one in five (21%) 18–34-year-olds struggle to think clearly when put under pressure during a cold call. They are also the most likely age group to give away personal information on the phone when put under pressure, however, over half (55%) of people in the age category believe they’re too technologically savvy to fall victim to a scam.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">dd33298b-810a-4258-b5f0-7f4b685c89b1</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/9e0883e8-ad4c-43da-b6a6-28249781570e/Podcast-Radio-Business-Sarah-Card-Goldman-Sachs-09-11-22.mp3" length="24766170" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:19</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>WHY MORE EMPLOYERS NEED TO GET ON BOARD WITH T LEVELS | Hilary Leevers</title><itunes:title>WHY MORE EMPLOYERS NEED TO GET ON BOARD WITH T LEVELS | Hilary Leevers</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Hilary Leevers, EngineeringUK CEO, </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the importance of T Levels to students and employers, in addition to explaining how the engineering industry can offer rewarding careers for young people.</p><p>With a chronic shortage of skilled engineers and technicians to power UK industry, a new report, Anyone for T? Awareness of T Levels in England, published during Tomorrow’s Engineers Week (7-11 November 2022), shines a spotlight on awareness of T Levels as a key pathway into engineering and manufacturing careers for students looking to get workplace knowledge while learning.</p><p><strong>Hilary Leevers,EngineeringUK CEO, </strong>believes T Levels (two-year courses, equivalent in size to three A-Levels, with a combination of classroom-based learning and an in-depth industry placement of at least 45 days) provide an important route into engineering for young people, however 63% of young people do not know what they are - with only 30% of those aged 11 to 14 (Key Stage 3), 35% of 14- to 16-year-olds (Key Stage 4) and 16 to 18 year olds (Key Stage 5) respectively aware of them - although 49% of 11-18 year-olds in London know what T levels are.</p><p>Hilary Leevers can explain the importance of T Levels to students and employers in addition to explaining how the engineering industry can offer rewarding careers for young people as the report highlights that the engineering and manufacturing T Level route will require as many as 43,500 placements to be provided by employers in the sector by 2024/25, meaning employers need to take action especially as only 28% of employers have both heard of them and understand what they involve, with awareness lower among SMEs which is where the large proportion of engineering and technology jobs are held.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Hilary Leevers, EngineeringUK CEO, </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the importance of T Levels to students and employers, in addition to explaining how the engineering industry can offer rewarding careers for young people.</p><p>With a chronic shortage of skilled engineers and technicians to power UK industry, a new report, Anyone for T? Awareness of T Levels in England, published during Tomorrow’s Engineers Week (7-11 November 2022), shines a spotlight on awareness of T Levels as a key pathway into engineering and manufacturing careers for students looking to get workplace knowledge while learning.</p><p><strong>Hilary Leevers,EngineeringUK CEO, </strong>believes T Levels (two-year courses, equivalent in size to three A-Levels, with a combination of classroom-based learning and an in-depth industry placement of at least 45 days) provide an important route into engineering for young people, however 63% of young people do not know what they are - with only 30% of those aged 11 to 14 (Key Stage 3), 35% of 14- to 16-year-olds (Key Stage 4) and 16 to 18 year olds (Key Stage 5) respectively aware of them - although 49% of 11-18 year-olds in London know what T levels are.</p><p>Hilary Leevers can explain the importance of T Levels to students and employers in addition to explaining how the engineering industry can offer rewarding careers for young people as the report highlights that the engineering and manufacturing T Level route will require as many as 43,500 placements to be provided by employers in the sector by 2024/25, meaning employers need to take action especially as only 28% of employers have both heard of them and understand what they involve, with awareness lower among SMEs which is where the large proportion of engineering and technology jobs are held.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">a2bc7244-c511-4e88-983d-d23eda96a17c</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/ae6dd03f-144d-47b6-b203-75e9c9c4870d/Podcast-Radio-Business-Hilary-Leevers-EngineeringUK-09-11-22.mp3" length="21790301" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:05</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>BUSINESS OWNERS CHOOSING SUSTAINABILITY OVER COST WHEN TRAVELLING | Rosana Elias</title><itunes:title>BUSINESS OWNERS CHOOSING SUSTAINABILITY OVER COST WHEN TRAVELLING | Rosana Elias</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Rosana Elias, head of Sustainability at Premier Inn,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss why business owners and decision makers are becoming increasingly environmentally conscious when it comes to business travel and explains what her company is doing to make a positive difference.</p><p>More UK business owners and decision makers are increasingly opting for environmentally-conscious choices about where and how they travel, with more than three quarters of C-suites travelling more sustainably than they did in 2017.</p><p>In addition, 73% are choosing an environmentally-conscious hotel when considering where they stay while 82% of 25–34-year-old business owners are likely to choose a hotel with good environmental credentials according Premier Inn whose research shows sustainability(65%) along with cost (91%) and location (92%) are the top three priorities for business travel bookings with 72% of all businesses owners wanting to stay in a hotel placing an emphasis on reducing its carbon footprint and becoming more sustainable.</p><p>There’s been a real shift in mindset over the last five years too with new research showing over three quarters&nbsp; of C-suites say they are travelling more sustainably than they did in 2017.</p><p>It’s not just how they travel, it’s where they stay too with 73% choosing an environmentally conscious hotel.</p><p>And there’s hope for the future with 82% of 25–34-year-old business owners likely to choose a hotel with good environmental credentials according to the findings from Premier Inn.</p><p>The hotel chain, which is owned&nbsp; by Whitbread, has accommodation in the UK, Middle East and Germany,&nbsp; has already recognised the need to accommodate business owners and decision makers who want to make a real difference.</p><p>Already, they have reduced carbon emissions by bringing forward their net zero carbon target from 2050 to 2040 and set an interim target of 80% by 2030. Unlike m any, the chain has never used single-use toiletriesin its bathrooms and has also pledged to eliminate unneccesary single-use plastic usage by 2025.</p><p>And it seems that they are on the right track with 92% of business owners and decision makers saying it was important to their organisationto work with “like-minded, environmentally responsible companies” for business traveland 44% booking accommodation with an environmentally conscious provider</p><p>In fact, sustainability (65%) was third behind location (92%) and cost (91%) in what is proritised when booking a hotel for business travel with 72% wanting to stay in a hotel that place an emphasis on reducing their carbon footprint and becoming more sustainable.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Rosana Elias, head of Sustainability at Premier Inn,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss why business owners and decision makers are becoming increasingly environmentally conscious when it comes to business travel and explains what her company is doing to make a positive difference.</p><p>More UK business owners and decision makers are increasingly opting for environmentally-conscious choices about where and how they travel, with more than three quarters of C-suites travelling more sustainably than they did in 2017.</p><p>In addition, 73% are choosing an environmentally-conscious hotel when considering where they stay while 82% of 25–34-year-old business owners are likely to choose a hotel with good environmental credentials according Premier Inn whose research shows sustainability(65%) along with cost (91%) and location (92%) are the top three priorities for business travel bookings with 72% of all businesses owners wanting to stay in a hotel placing an emphasis on reducing its carbon footprint and becoming more sustainable.</p><p>There’s been a real shift in mindset over the last five years too with new research showing over three quarters&nbsp; of C-suites say they are travelling more sustainably than they did in 2017.</p><p>It’s not just how they travel, it’s where they stay too with 73% choosing an environmentally conscious hotel.</p><p>And there’s hope for the future with 82% of 25–34-year-old business owners likely to choose a hotel with good environmental credentials according to the findings from Premier Inn.</p><p>The hotel chain, which is owned&nbsp; by Whitbread, has accommodation in the UK, Middle East and Germany,&nbsp; has already recognised the need to accommodate business owners and decision makers who want to make a real difference.</p><p>Already, they have reduced carbon emissions by bringing forward their net zero carbon target from 2050 to 2040 and set an interim target of 80% by 2030. Unlike m any, the chain has never used single-use toiletriesin its bathrooms and has also pledged to eliminate unneccesary single-use plastic usage by 2025.</p><p>And it seems that they are on the right track with 92% of business owners and decision makers saying it was important to their organisationto work with “like-minded, environmentally responsible companies” for business traveland 44% booking accommodation with an environmentally conscious provider</p><p>In fact, sustainability (65%) was third behind location (92%) and cost (91%) in what is proritised when booking a hotel for business travel with 72% wanting to stay in a hotel that place an emphasis on reducing their carbon footprint and becoming more sustainable.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">4cbd42a4-9485-44e8-a20a-20c2d96ae8ab</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/da6b2f75-4b92-4123-a1e6-d700fc26ff51/Podcast-Radio-Business-Rosana-Elias-Premier-Inn-16-11-22.mp3" length="19179101" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>07:59</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>CRYPTO COLLAPSE – WHAT’S GOING ON? | Asanka Weeratunge</title><itunes:title>CRYPTO COLLAPSE – WHAT’S GOING ON? | Asanka Weeratunge</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Asanka Weeratunge, Financial Markets Trader &amp; Programme Manager at London Academy of Trading, </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss and break down what is happening in the crypto-sphere, and share advice for those concerned about their investments at this tumultuous time.</p><p>Earlier this year, when the pound fell, cryptocurrencies became an attractive alternative for amateur investors with three in ten (29%) admitting to being enticed by get rich quick schemes to help boost their income, according to research from the London Academyof Trading (LAT). </p><p>This prompted the UK’s first accredited trading academy to issue a fresh warning to anyone looking to start trading.</p><p>Now, with crypto giant FTX filing for bankruptcy – shaking the industry and wiping billions from the market – many small investors face major losses, and industry experts are calling for new regulation and support,<a href="https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/technology-63624890" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">led by Binance Chief Changpeng Zhao at the G20 summit in Bali</a>. </p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Asanka Weeratunge, Financial Markets Trader &amp; Programme Manager at London Academy of Trading, </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss and break down what is happening in the crypto-sphere, and share advice for those concerned about their investments at this tumultuous time.</p><p>Earlier this year, when the pound fell, cryptocurrencies became an attractive alternative for amateur investors with three in ten (29%) admitting to being enticed by get rich quick schemes to help boost their income, according to research from the London Academyof Trading (LAT). </p><p>This prompted the UK’s first accredited trading academy to issue a fresh warning to anyone looking to start trading.</p><p>Now, with crypto giant FTX filing for bankruptcy – shaking the industry and wiping billions from the market – many small investors face major losses, and industry experts are calling for new regulation and support,<a href="https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/technology-63624890" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">led by Binance Chief Changpeng Zhao at the G20 summit in Bali</a>. </p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">cc180e7e-898f-4837-b3bd-6e0ebfd85f39</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/c87f1e70-387c-43cc-8455-5471f3b10497/Podcast-Radio-Business-Asanka-Weeratunge-LAT-17-11-22.mp3" length="38031150" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:51</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>GOING IT ALONE – REACHING NEW HIGHS GOING SOLO | Jo Fairley</title><itunes:title>GOING IT ALONE – REACHING NEW HIGHS GOING SOLO | Jo Fairley</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jo Fairley, co-Founder of Green &amp; Black’s,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss<strong> </strong>her experience of starting out and offering her advice as to the dos and don’ts of starting a new business.</p><p>Have you ever thought of being your own boss? If you have you’re not alone, with many considering quitting their job to start their own business.</p><p>For those who haven’t yet, 2023 could be the year you take the plunge, but like all new businesses there can be mistakes along the way.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>That’s according to<em>Jo Fairley,</em> who knows what it’s like to start up on your own, and the lessons she has learnt along the way. The Co-Founder of Green &amp;Black’s is a success story after leaving school with just 6 ‘O’ levels and starting the famous chocolate company in the recession before turning it into a 100 million a year business.</p><p>On the eve of Small Business Saturday (3rd December 2022), Jo is giving advice on the most commons mistakes to avoid when starting a new business and has helpful tips to small business owners and aspiring entrepreneurs. </p><p>Despite the current recession and cost of living crisis, new research shows nearly 1 in 3 people in the UK have either started their own business, or considered doing so, in the last year, with 19% feeling it was the only way for career progression and a further 18% feeling trapped in their job.</p><p>Whatever the motivation to go it alone, there are common pitfalls to avoid. Research from AAT amongst small business owners reveals the top three mistakes when starting out are poor understanding of target market (30%), cash flow management (19%) and ignoring technology (19%).</p><p>26% admit they have next to no accounting knowledge with 19% making mistakes with their cash flow and 18% oversimplifying their business plan or overestimating financial projections (15%).16% have missed the tax deadline or underestimated the time investment (16%) but despite this, on average, they didn’t hire a qualified accountant until just over a year into operating their business. No wonder 65% wish they’d known more about accountancy before they started out.</p><p>When it comes to speaking to experts for advice, who better than Jo Fairley?</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jo Fairley, co-Founder of Green &amp; Black’s,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss<strong> </strong>her experience of starting out and offering her advice as to the dos and don’ts of starting a new business.</p><p>Have you ever thought of being your own boss? If you have you’re not alone, with many considering quitting their job to start their own business.</p><p>For those who haven’t yet, 2023 could be the year you take the plunge, but like all new businesses there can be mistakes along the way.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>That’s according to<em>Jo Fairley,</em> who knows what it’s like to start up on your own, and the lessons she has learnt along the way. The Co-Founder of Green &amp;Black’s is a success story after leaving school with just 6 ‘O’ levels and starting the famous chocolate company in the recession before turning it into a 100 million a year business.</p><p>On the eve of Small Business Saturday (3rd December 2022), Jo is giving advice on the most commons mistakes to avoid when starting a new business and has helpful tips to small business owners and aspiring entrepreneurs. </p><p>Despite the current recession and cost of living crisis, new research shows nearly 1 in 3 people in the UK have either started their own business, or considered doing so, in the last year, with 19% feeling it was the only way for career progression and a further 18% feeling trapped in their job.</p><p>Whatever the motivation to go it alone, there are common pitfalls to avoid. Research from AAT amongst small business owners reveals the top three mistakes when starting out are poor understanding of target market (30%), cash flow management (19%) and ignoring technology (19%).</p><p>26% admit they have next to no accounting knowledge with 19% making mistakes with their cash flow and 18% oversimplifying their business plan or overestimating financial projections (15%).16% have missed the tax deadline or underestimated the time investment (16%) but despite this, on average, they didn’t hire a qualified accountant until just over a year into operating their business. No wonder 65% wish they’d known more about accountancy before they started out.</p><p>When it comes to speaking to experts for advice, who better than Jo Fairley?</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">05b886f5-a3e2-4337-85e6-ba14a80337c6</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/0578de3b-54d7-470d-8db4-124eadf2dfe8/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jo-Fairley-Green-Black-02-12-22.mp3" length="34143084" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:14</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>IS PRESSURE TO WORK FUELLING FESTIVE BURNOUT? | Chris Mills</title><itunes:title>IS PRESSURE TO WORK FUELLING FESTIVE BURNOUT? | Chris Mills</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chris Mills, Head of Customer Success at Slack,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss why 8 in 10 employers will encourage their workers to switch off this Christmas but is pressure to work fuelling burnout?</p><p>It’s the most magical time of the year – but is the pressure to work at Christmas fueling a surge of burnout amongst workers in the UK?</p><p>The majority (79%) of UK bosses say they will encourage their employees to switch off during the holiday season, according to Slack research, but despite this instruction - a third (33%) of employees say they will be online and available to work during the holiday season - even when they have allocated time off.</p><p>In fact, nearly 2 in 5 (35%) UK workers admit they will check in on work emails and calls on Christmas Eve this year, even though it falls on a Saturday. What’s more, almost a fifth (19%) plan to check their work messages on Boxing Day, and 1 in 10 (10%) will even do so on Christmas Day!</p><p>The data indicates that employees are struggling to disconnect because of their own drive, according to 3 in 5 (56%) of those who say they are available to work (despite time off). In fact, half (50%) of employees—compared to 45% of their bosses—worry that the pressure to be constantly available for work will lead to burnout.</p><p>Technology could be the answer to manage the balance of expectation that many employees feel around working across the Christmas period. 70% of all office workers believe having a good digital infrastructure makes it easier to show managers,co-workers and customers that they’re on holiday, as over 3 in 5 (61%) agree it makes it easier to balance work and private life. Over half of workers (58%) plan to switch their notifications off for the entire Christmas period.</p><p><strong>The survey was conducted among 2,001 office workers in the UK. The interviews were conducted by YouGov Deutschland GmbH between 17th - 24th November, 2022, via an email with a link.</strong></p><p><strong>About Slack:</strong></p><p><strong>Slack is a messaging app for business which lets you organise conversations into channels so everyone moves faster and stays in sync. Slack is leading a historic shift towards a digital-first world of work thanks to acting as a digital HQ which connects people, apps, and data on a single platform – helping to drive success from anywhere.</strong></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Chris Mills, Head of Customer Success at Slack,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss why 8 in 10 employers will encourage their workers to switch off this Christmas but is pressure to work fuelling burnout?</p><p>It’s the most magical time of the year – but is the pressure to work at Christmas fueling a surge of burnout amongst workers in the UK?</p><p>The majority (79%) of UK bosses say they will encourage their employees to switch off during the holiday season, according to Slack research, but despite this instruction - a third (33%) of employees say they will be online and available to work during the holiday season - even when they have allocated time off.</p><p>In fact, nearly 2 in 5 (35%) UK workers admit they will check in on work emails and calls on Christmas Eve this year, even though it falls on a Saturday. What’s more, almost a fifth (19%) plan to check their work messages on Boxing Day, and 1 in 10 (10%) will even do so on Christmas Day!</p><p>The data indicates that employees are struggling to disconnect because of their own drive, according to 3 in 5 (56%) of those who say they are available to work (despite time off). In fact, half (50%) of employees—compared to 45% of their bosses—worry that the pressure to be constantly available for work will lead to burnout.</p><p>Technology could be the answer to manage the balance of expectation that many employees feel around working across the Christmas period. 70% of all office workers believe having a good digital infrastructure makes it easier to show managers,co-workers and customers that they’re on holiday, as over 3 in 5 (61%) agree it makes it easier to balance work and private life. Over half of workers (58%) plan to switch their notifications off for the entire Christmas period.</p><p><strong>The survey was conducted among 2,001 office workers in the UK. The interviews were conducted by YouGov Deutschland GmbH between 17th - 24th November, 2022, via an email with a link.</strong></p><p><strong>About Slack:</strong></p><p><strong>Slack is a messaging app for business which lets you organise conversations into channels so everyone moves faster and stays in sync. Slack is leading a historic shift towards a digital-first world of work thanks to acting as a digital HQ which connects people, apps, and data on a single platform – helping to drive success from anywhere.</strong></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">8986c02b-2088-486e-b739-b274b14f1f09</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/4362934a-4b56-4b9d-a3cc-abe8eddd9a17/Podcast-Radio-Business-Chris-Mills-Slack-12-02-22.mp3" length="23637680" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>09:51</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>UNLOCKING THE POTENTIAL OF UK BLACK CREATIVES</title><itunes:title>UNLOCKING THE POTENTIAL OF UK BLACK CREATIVES</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Ez Blaine, UK Lead, ONE School &amp;  Cedric A Thurman, Art Director, BSS&amp;P </strong>talk to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss unlocking the potential of UK Black Creatives</p><p>The global marketing communications company WPP is partnering with The One Club for Creativity to help unlock the potential of black creatives across the UK with a 16-week online portfolio initiative kicking off from March 2023, enrolment for which closes at the end of January.</p><p>After a successful 2020 US launch in which 80% of the 128 graduates got hiredat a top agency or brand, 65% of whom were women, ONE School, which is a free alternative to traditional ad schools, is looking to make waves in the UK with its initial 15-cohort class in 2023.</p><p>Black creatives from all walks of life are encouraged to apply for one of the 15 sought-after places and, crucially, no prior knowledge of the advertising industry is required.</p><p>Successful applicants will get hand on, one-to-one tutoring from Black tutors, Black lecturers and Black mentors working in the top creative departments in the industry.</p><p>The partnership aligns with WPP’s set of anti-racism commitments made in 2020, which aims to advance racial equity and support Black and minorityethnic talent. It will form part of WPP’s Racial Equity Programme which – managed by WPP’s Dr. Stacie Graham – is a three-year, $30 million commitment to fund inclusion programmes within the company and to support external organisations.</p><p>Ez Blaine, ONE School UK lead, speaks on why meaningful action is needed to support, build and grow the Black creative community and how ONE School UK can open many doors for people, teaching students to stand out for their Blackness and be authentic to who they are.</p><p>Cedric A Thurman is a  ONE School US alumni and art directors with BSS&amp;P  and discusses the difference the programme has made to his career journey, his own experience and why it is important to have diverse talent in the creative industries.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Ez Blaine, UK Lead, ONE School &amp;  Cedric A Thurman, Art Director, BSS&amp;P </strong>talk to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss unlocking the potential of UK Black Creatives</p><p>The global marketing communications company WPP is partnering with The One Club for Creativity to help unlock the potential of black creatives across the UK with a 16-week online portfolio initiative kicking off from March 2023, enrolment for which closes at the end of January.</p><p>After a successful 2020 US launch in which 80% of the 128 graduates got hiredat a top agency or brand, 65% of whom were women, ONE School, which is a free alternative to traditional ad schools, is looking to make waves in the UK with its initial 15-cohort class in 2023.</p><p>Black creatives from all walks of life are encouraged to apply for one of the 15 sought-after places and, crucially, no prior knowledge of the advertising industry is required.</p><p>Successful applicants will get hand on, one-to-one tutoring from Black tutors, Black lecturers and Black mentors working in the top creative departments in the industry.</p><p>The partnership aligns with WPP’s set of anti-racism commitments made in 2020, which aims to advance racial equity and support Black and minorityethnic talent. It will form part of WPP’s Racial Equity Programme which – managed by WPP’s Dr. Stacie Graham – is a three-year, $30 million commitment to fund inclusion programmes within the company and to support external organisations.</p><p>Ez Blaine, ONE School UK lead, speaks on why meaningful action is needed to support, build and grow the Black creative community and how ONE School UK can open many doors for people, teaching students to stand out for their Blackness and be authentic to who they are.</p><p>Cedric A Thurman is a  ONE School US alumni and art directors with BSS&amp;P  and discusses the difference the programme has made to his career journey, his own experience and why it is important to have diverse talent in the creative industries.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">92bab5ed-a564-48c7-82a6-0ecdf03ee77c</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/c2e9cc95-ecd1-4bab-9e7c-17b57a273e02/Podcast-Radio-Business-Ez-Blaine-ONE-School-10-01-23.mp3" length="40979852" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>17:04</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>The Pressures Facing UK Businesses | Alan Thomas</title><itunes:title>The Pressures Facing UK Businesses | Alan Thomas</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Alan Thomas, Simply Business CEO,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss his thoughts on the issues facing businesses at the start of 2023.</p><p>We discussed the following:</p><ul><li>What's the state of UK Business in 2023?</li><li>Are interest rates likely to go up or down in 2023?</li><li>With Government support&nbsp; for businesses&nbsp; tapering what is the outlook energywise for SME businesses?</li><li>The Prime Minister is promising to halve inflation. Is it realistic&nbsp; or just more hot air?</li></ul><br/><p><br></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Alan Thomas, Simply Business CEO,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss his thoughts on the issues facing businesses at the start of 2023.</p><p>We discussed the following:</p><ul><li>What's the state of UK Business in 2023?</li><li>Are interest rates likely to go up or down in 2023?</li><li>With Government support&nbsp; for businesses&nbsp; tapering what is the outlook energywise for SME businesses?</li><li>The Prime Minister is promising to halve inflation. Is it realistic&nbsp; or just more hot air?</li></ul><br/><p><br></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">d4fea62b-8202-4c55-8d4e-097cceb9fb12</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/d14ebfb0-a3cf-4d4c-8e55-02d8bf9dee0e/Podcast-Radio-Business-Alan-Thomas-Simply-Business-19-01-23.mp3" length="25830921" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>10:46</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>THE DAMAGING LEGACY OF YEARS OF BANK BRANCH CLOSURES | Stuart Miller</title><itunes:title>THE DAMAGING LEGACY OF YEARS OF BANK BRANCH CLOSURES | Stuart Miller</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Stuart Miller, Chief Customer Officer at Newcastle Building Society &amp; Member of The High Street Task Force,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss a b;lueprint for addressing the damaging legacy of years of bank branch closures.</p><p>A blueprint to restore cash and other financial services to towns and high streets across the UK is being piloted, offering hope to the millions impacted by the damaging legacy of years of bank branch closures.&nbsp; </p><p>In the last 12 months, 29% have seen a bank or building society leave their local area, with more than a third (38%) worried their local branch will close this year. Once a mainstay to every high street, this is causing great concern for many across the country. </p><p>Already,more than one in three (36%) live in an area without access to financial services – not just affecting their ability to manage their bank account, but their access to cash and in-person financial advice, which is now more important than ever. </p><p>That’s why Newcastle Building Society is collaborating with shared bank branch innovator OneBanx to provide access to a multi-bank kiosk in two of itsbranches in the North East and NorthYorkshire, as part of a pilot which could potentially be rolled out across the UK.</p><p>The average UK adult visits their local branch twice a month – 24 times a year – with one in seven (14%) heading in once a week. But now, more than 1.4 million people* must travel more than an hour, with the average round trip costing £9.</p><p>With in-person banking no longer possible for more than a quarter (28%) of UK adults, and 42% saying there is a lack of access to financial services in their community, the blueprint seeks to present a solution for cashless communities across the UK, aiming to keep cash alive and high streets vibrant in local communities.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Stuart Miller, Chief Customer Officer at Newcastle Building Society &amp; Member of The High Street Task Force,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss a b;lueprint for addressing the damaging legacy of years of bank branch closures.</p><p>A blueprint to restore cash and other financial services to towns and high streets across the UK is being piloted, offering hope to the millions impacted by the damaging legacy of years of bank branch closures.&nbsp; </p><p>In the last 12 months, 29% have seen a bank or building society leave their local area, with more than a third (38%) worried their local branch will close this year. Once a mainstay to every high street, this is causing great concern for many across the country. </p><p>Already,more than one in three (36%) live in an area without access to financial services – not just affecting their ability to manage their bank account, but their access to cash and in-person financial advice, which is now more important than ever. </p><p>That’s why Newcastle Building Society is collaborating with shared bank branch innovator OneBanx to provide access to a multi-bank kiosk in two of itsbranches in the North East and NorthYorkshire, as part of a pilot which could potentially be rolled out across the UK.</p><p>The average UK adult visits their local branch twice a month – 24 times a year – with one in seven (14%) heading in once a week. But now, more than 1.4 million people* must travel more than an hour, with the average round trip costing £9.</p><p>With in-person banking no longer possible for more than a quarter (28%) of UK adults, and 42% saying there is a lack of access to financial services in their community, the blueprint seeks to present a solution for cashless communities across the UK, aiming to keep cash alive and high streets vibrant in local communities.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">799c8a4a-ee9d-4956-8874-caf9024a41c2</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/b1a7a7c8-7318-4a47-83c1-e0dd5d7f2aa2/Podcast-Radio-Business-Stuart-Miller-Newcastle-Building-Soc-24-.mp3" length="33101321" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:48</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>TAKING A DIFFERENT ROUTE: ONE IN THREE OF US WANT TO BE OUR OWN BOSS | Honey Langcaster -James</title><itunes:title>TAKING A DIFFERENT ROUTE: ONE IN THREE OF US WANT TO BE OUR OWN BOSS | Honey Langcaster -James</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Honey Langcaster-James, Psychologist, </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss employees attitudes towards their current workplace following ‘the great resignation’ and ‘quiet quitting’ trends of last year.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Half of the nations’ workers are considering a career change – either to achieve a better work/life balance (56%), be paid more (54%) or to pursue a passion (42%) with 21% looking to put the wheels in motion within the next six months while a further 28% also want to become their own boss to achieve greater freedom.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">With many perks to new career paths, 67% have admitted that the cost-of-living crisis is a driving force for this change, alongside the prospect of earning more (67%), and a new challenge would be good for their mental health (38%). </p><p>2022 saw the workplace trends of ‘the great resignation’ and ‘quiet quitting’ come to the forefront as Brits started to put their wellbeing and happiness first. And it turns out 2023 is set to be no different with career freedom and flexibility still high on people’s agenda, and the desire to ‘be your own boss’.</p><p>In fact, new research from AA Driving School has found that half of the nations’ workers are considering a career change – either to achieve a better work life balance (56%), be paid more (54%) or to pursue a passion (42%) – with more than one in five (21%) looking to put the wheels in motion within the next six months.</p><p>A further third (28%) also want to become their own boss to achieve greater freedom. With many perks to new career paths, more than two-thirds (67%) have admitted that the cost-of-living crisis is a driving force for this change, alongside the prospect of earning more (67%), and a new challenge would be good for their mental health (38%).</p><p>But the biggest question is what job can tick off all these desires? Interestingly,it’s something more than half (55%) of us have done to help a friend or family member, yet as a profession it’s often overlooked – and that is becoming a driving instructor – a role which lets you plan your work around your life and puts you in the driving seat when it comes to managing your business.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Honey Langcaster-James, Psychologist, </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss employees attitudes towards their current workplace following ‘the great resignation’ and ‘quiet quitting’ trends of last year.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Half of the nations’ workers are considering a career change – either to achieve a better work/life balance (56%), be paid more (54%) or to pursue a passion (42%) with 21% looking to put the wheels in motion within the next six months while a further 28% also want to become their own boss to achieve greater freedom.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">With many perks to new career paths, 67% have admitted that the cost-of-living crisis is a driving force for this change, alongside the prospect of earning more (67%), and a new challenge would be good for their mental health (38%). </p><p>2022 saw the workplace trends of ‘the great resignation’ and ‘quiet quitting’ come to the forefront as Brits started to put their wellbeing and happiness first. And it turns out 2023 is set to be no different with career freedom and flexibility still high on people’s agenda, and the desire to ‘be your own boss’.</p><p>In fact, new research from AA Driving School has found that half of the nations’ workers are considering a career change – either to achieve a better work life balance (56%), be paid more (54%) or to pursue a passion (42%) – with more than one in five (21%) looking to put the wheels in motion within the next six months.</p><p>A further third (28%) also want to become their own boss to achieve greater freedom. With many perks to new career paths, more than two-thirds (67%) have admitted that the cost-of-living crisis is a driving force for this change, alongside the prospect of earning more (67%), and a new challenge would be good for their mental health (38%).</p><p>But the biggest question is what job can tick off all these desires? Interestingly,it’s something more than half (55%) of us have done to help a friend or family member, yet as a profession it’s often overlooked – and that is becoming a driving instructor – a role which lets you plan your work around your life and puts you in the driving seat when it comes to managing your business.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">e6397151-03aa-4e0d-bb4f-92491b21a970</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/fcb67048-3895-476a-b901-e2860e90cc37/Podcast-Radio-Business-Honey-Langcaster-James-Psychologist-26-0.mp3" length="34068897" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:12</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>WHAT INFLATION MEANS TO OUR PENSIONS AND SAVING FOR THE FUTURE | Romi Savova</title><itunes:title>WHAT INFLATION MEANS TO OUR PENSIONS AND SAVING FOR THE FUTURE | Romi Savova</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>PensionBee CEO Romi Savova,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss what inflation means for our pensions and saving for the future ...while saving the future.</p><p>PensionBee offers a new Impact Plan to allow contributions to be invested in companies tackling challenges such as better healthcare, education, and cleaner energy. Moving the £1 trillion invested in UK defined contribution pensions (that are mostly held in default schemes) to positive impact funds could reduce the carbon footprint of UK pensions by up to 48 million tonnes. Most default workplace pension schemes remain invested in fossil fuels - UK pension schemes investing an estimated £128 billion in coal, oil and gas.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Leading UK pension provider PensionBee has calculated that moving the £1 trillion invested in UK defined contribution pensions (that are mostly held in default schemes) to positive impact funds could reduce thecarbon footprint of UK pensions by up to 48 million tonnes.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">The majority of default workplace pension schemes remain invested in fossil fuels, with UK pension schemes investing an estimated £128 billion in coal, oil and gas.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">This new finding comes as PensionBee launches a new Impact Plan to the general public that will allow savers to invest their retirement funds exclusively in companies that have a positive impact on the planetand society. PensionBee’s new Plan will invest in companies tackling challenges such as better healthcare, education and cleaner energy.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">According to PensionBee research, over half of savers would move their pension to a positive impact fund if they had the choice – equivalent to approximately 14 million Brits.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Thousands of the leading online pension provider’s existing customers have committed over £50m in switches in advance of today’s fund launch.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>PensionBee CEO Romi Savova,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss what inflation means for our pensions and saving for the future ...while saving the future.</p><p>PensionBee offers a new Impact Plan to allow contributions to be invested in companies tackling challenges such as better healthcare, education, and cleaner energy. Moving the £1 trillion invested in UK defined contribution pensions (that are mostly held in default schemes) to positive impact funds could reduce the carbon footprint of UK pensions by up to 48 million tonnes. Most default workplace pension schemes remain invested in fossil fuels - UK pension schemes investing an estimated £128 billion in coal, oil and gas.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Leading UK pension provider PensionBee has calculated that moving the £1 trillion invested in UK defined contribution pensions (that are mostly held in default schemes) to positive impact funds could reduce thecarbon footprint of UK pensions by up to 48 million tonnes.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">The majority of default workplace pension schemes remain invested in fossil fuels, with UK pension schemes investing an estimated £128 billion in coal, oil and gas.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">This new finding comes as PensionBee launches a new Impact Plan to the general public that will allow savers to invest their retirement funds exclusively in companies that have a positive impact on the planetand society. PensionBee’s new Plan will invest in companies tackling challenges such as better healthcare, education and cleaner energy.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">According to PensionBee research, over half of savers would move their pension to a positive impact fund if they had the choice – equivalent to approximately 14 million Brits.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Thousands of the leading online pension provider’s existing customers have committed over £50m in switches in advance of today’s fund launch.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">0c6d3532-73ba-48f8-88a5-c3bcdac57bc6</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/0bedf3a4-bade-402e-b111-a8d4b4eee66a/Podcast-Radio-Business-Romi-Savova-Pension-Bee-15-02-23.mp3" length="29417011" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>12:15</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>£7.5 BILLION LEGAL ACTION LAUNCHES ON BEHALF OF BUSINESSES OVERCHARGED BECAUSE OF VISA AND MASTERCARD</title><itunes:title>£7.5 BILLION LEGAL ACTION LAUNCHES ON BEHALF OF BUSINESSES OVERCHARGED BECAUSE OF VISA AND MASTERCARD</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jeremy Robinson &amp; Tom Ross,  from Harcus Parker Solicitors  </strong>talk to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the £7.5 Multi-billion pound legal action launched on behalf of businesses overcharged because of Mastercard and Visa.</p><p>A class action aiming to recoup billions in fees that small and large businesses incurred after being overcharged on fees for transactions because of Mastercard and Visa’s rules is being launched on TUESDAY 21st FEBRUARY2023 on behalf of hundreds of thousands of UK businesses. </p><p>It is expected to be the one of the biggest compensation claim in UK legal history - the fee issue impacts virtually every business which accepts Visa or Mastercard payments. The action claims that ‘anti-competitive’ and ‘unlawful’ fees have been charged on transactions since 2017 and are still being charged now. </p><p>Law firm Harcus Parker is representing the proposed class representatives, Credit and Debit Card Claims I and II Limited, which are bringing the case on behalf of hundreds of thousands of businesses that have been – and continue to be – charged these fees.</p><p>They say that after damning judgments from both the UK Supreme Court and the EU Court of Justice these fees should be abolished completely. Harcus Parker is asking the court to give businesses their money back, plus interest, as part of a broader campaignagainst unlawful fees and what they call ‘stealth taxes’ in the future.</p><p>Mastercard and Visa have both previously settled several claims for unlawful interchange fees charged to various UK businesses.&nbsp; Recent successful claimants include major supermarkets, including Morrisons earlier this year. Harcus Parker is bringing this claimin the Competition Appeal Tribunal (CAT) because the Tribunal has special rules that allow a large number of claimants to bring their cases together as a class, saving each of them time and money.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Jeremy Robinson &amp; Tom Ross,  from Harcus Parker Solicitors  </strong>talk to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the £7.5 Multi-billion pound legal action launched on behalf of businesses overcharged because of Mastercard and Visa.</p><p>A class action aiming to recoup billions in fees that small and large businesses incurred after being overcharged on fees for transactions because of Mastercard and Visa’s rules is being launched on TUESDAY 21st FEBRUARY2023 on behalf of hundreds of thousands of UK businesses. </p><p>It is expected to be the one of the biggest compensation claim in UK legal history - the fee issue impacts virtually every business which accepts Visa or Mastercard payments. The action claims that ‘anti-competitive’ and ‘unlawful’ fees have been charged on transactions since 2017 and are still being charged now. </p><p>Law firm Harcus Parker is representing the proposed class representatives, Credit and Debit Card Claims I and II Limited, which are bringing the case on behalf of hundreds of thousands of businesses that have been – and continue to be – charged these fees.</p><p>They say that after damning judgments from both the UK Supreme Court and the EU Court of Justice these fees should be abolished completely. Harcus Parker is asking the court to give businesses their money back, plus interest, as part of a broader campaignagainst unlawful fees and what they call ‘stealth taxes’ in the future.</p><p>Mastercard and Visa have both previously settled several claims for unlawful interchange fees charged to various UK businesses.&nbsp; Recent successful claimants include major supermarkets, including Morrisons earlier this year. Harcus Parker is bringing this claimin the Competition Appeal Tribunal (CAT) because the Tribunal has special rules that allow a large number of claimants to bring their cases together as a class, saving each of them time and money.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">3e601ad0-5747-479b-a677-9cf5d6d2ebff</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/9ba9e584-084e-42c9-9c4c-3c4d1cd6b3eb/Podcast-Radio-Business-Jeremy-Robinson-Tom-Ross-Harcus-Parker-2.mp3" length="29177729" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>12:09</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>ARE BUSINESSES READY FOR &apos;GATHERING CYBER STORM&apos;? | Martin Lee</title><itunes:title>ARE BUSINESSES READY FOR &apos;GATHERING CYBER STORM&apos;? | Martin Lee</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Martin Lee, Technical Lead of Security Research, Talos UK </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how the<strong> </strong>the hybrid approach to company organisation, and the blurring of business boundaries posing new risks to organisations around the world, both large and small.</p><p>82% of businesses are expecting a cybersecurity incident to disrupt their operations in the next two years, while 60% experienced an incident within the last 12 months – costing 41% at least $500,000.</p><p>However, only 15% globally have a cybersecurity posture ‘mature’ enough to defend against these developing threats, according to the Cisco Cybersecurity Readiness Index: Resilience in a Hybrid World released on TUESDAY 21st MARCH 2023 which classifies organisations into four categories: Beginner, Formative, Progressive, and Mature. While only 15% are Mature, more than half fall into the Beginner (8%) orFormative (47%) stages, meaning they are performing below average on cybersecurity readiness.</p><p>Closing this ‘readiness gap’ should become a global imperative and top priority for business leaders, according to Cisco, who is urging businesses to be proactive and act sooner, rather than later. To attain resilience, firms require telemetry across ecosystems, active monitoring and filtering, actionable intelligence and expertise, risk-based contextual analysis and trust assessment, an open platform across users/devices/networks/ applications, and optimised efficacy to spring back faster.&nbsp;</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Martin Lee, Technical Lead of Security Research, Talos UK </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss how the<strong> </strong>the hybrid approach to company organisation, and the blurring of business boundaries posing new risks to organisations around the world, both large and small.</p><p>82% of businesses are expecting a cybersecurity incident to disrupt their operations in the next two years, while 60% experienced an incident within the last 12 months – costing 41% at least $500,000.</p><p>However, only 15% globally have a cybersecurity posture ‘mature’ enough to defend against these developing threats, according to the Cisco Cybersecurity Readiness Index: Resilience in a Hybrid World released on TUESDAY 21st MARCH 2023 which classifies organisations into four categories: Beginner, Formative, Progressive, and Mature. While only 15% are Mature, more than half fall into the Beginner (8%) orFormative (47%) stages, meaning they are performing below average on cybersecurity readiness.</p><p>Closing this ‘readiness gap’ should become a global imperative and top priority for business leaders, according to Cisco, who is urging businesses to be proactive and act sooner, rather than later. To attain resilience, firms require telemetry across ecosystems, active monitoring and filtering, actionable intelligence and expertise, risk-based contextual analysis and trust assessment, an open platform across users/devices/networks/ applications, and optimised efficacy to spring back faster.&nbsp;</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">8e79293d-c3d1-4d90-998d-a368c77fb690</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 25 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/6b1daecb-9255-4012-a513-4300fe975f53/Podcast-Radio-Business-Martin-Lee-Talos-22-03-23.mp3" length="41581713" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>17:20</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>GOVERNMENT LEAVING CONVENIENCE STORES HIGH &amp; DRY AS ENERGY BILLS SET TO SKYROCKET | James Lowman</title><itunes:title>GOVERNMENT LEAVING CONVENIENCE STORES HIGH &amp; DRY AS ENERGY BILLS SET TO SKYROCKET | James Lowman</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>James Lowman, Chief Executive, Association of Convenience Stores,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the plight convenience stores are facing and what they think the government should do.</p><p>The Association of Convenience Stores (ACS) is calling on the government to do more to help convenience stores as it says an estimated 6,900 across the nation are at risk of closure, putting more than 46,000 jobs at risk, because of them being stuck in excessive fixed contracts signed during the height of the energy crisis, causing bills to triple and, in some cases, quadruple.</p><p>ACS estimates about 40% of independent stores faced contract renewals between July and December 2022, while wholesale  energy prices peaked. For an average-sized store facing rates of 95p per kWh, this would mean paying more than £75,000each year for electricity, compared to £20,000 in 2021, with governmentsupport at the proposed level (1.9p per kWh) only reduces the average bill by about £1,520 for the year – equating to only £60m in relief across the entire convenience sector.</p><p>At present, just £11m through the Energy Bill Relief Scheme has been allocated to these 6,900 stores, but the loss of their business will cost the Treasury £70m annually in direct tax income, not to mention the additional loss in revenuefrom VAT and excise duties and that is before the impact on the local community is considered.</p><p>ACS wants the government to provide additional support of up to £10,000 per store in the at-risk category to remain viable - at worst this would be cost-neutral to the Treasury - and to require energy companies to allow businesses to moveaway from the fixed-term contracts they entered into when prices peaked. </p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>James Lowman, Chief Executive, Association of Convenience Stores,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong>to discuss the plight convenience stores are facing and what they think the government should do.</p><p>The Association of Convenience Stores (ACS) is calling on the government to do more to help convenience stores as it says an estimated 6,900 across the nation are at risk of closure, putting more than 46,000 jobs at risk, because of them being stuck in excessive fixed contracts signed during the height of the energy crisis, causing bills to triple and, in some cases, quadruple.</p><p>ACS estimates about 40% of independent stores faced contract renewals between July and December 2022, while wholesale  energy prices peaked. For an average-sized store facing rates of 95p per kWh, this would mean paying more than £75,000each year for electricity, compared to £20,000 in 2021, with governmentsupport at the proposed level (1.9p per kWh) only reduces the average bill by about £1,520 for the year – equating to only £60m in relief across the entire convenience sector.</p><p>At present, just £11m through the Energy Bill Relief Scheme has been allocated to these 6,900 stores, but the loss of their business will cost the Treasury £70m annually in direct tax income, not to mention the additional loss in revenuefrom VAT and excise duties and that is before the impact on the local community is considered.</p><p>ACS wants the government to provide additional support of up to £10,000 per store in the at-risk category to remain viable - at worst this would be cost-neutral to the Treasury - and to require energy companies to allow businesses to moveaway from the fixed-term contracts they entered into when prices peaked. </p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">2b38a5c0-5dd4-4603-aee6-fb14ec5a36c0</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 11 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/b468e65b-0dbc-4e66-ad7f-3dd17474369d/Podcast-Radio-Business-James-Lowman-ACS-10-03-23.mp3" length="36202578" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>15:05</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>CAN VIDEO GAMES INSPIRE THE NEXT GENERATION OF FEMALE STEM GRADUATES? | Dr Jackie Bell</title><itunes:title>CAN VIDEO GAMES INSPIRE THE NEXT GENERATION OF FEMALE STEM GRADUATES? | Dr Jackie Bell</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dr Jackie Bell, Mathematician, Physicist, STEM Ambassador &amp; aspiring Astronaut,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>To celebrate International Woman’s Day (#IWD2023), new research from the publishers of Scars Above – a videogame about a lone female astronaut and scientist stranded on a hostile alien planet – reveals a third of 14–19-year-olds females who play video games are more likely to be interested in a career in STEM</strong> <strong>then those who do not (33% v 22%).</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">The report, which explores what motivates the next generation of young women to pursue a STEM career, shows girl gamers are more likely to go on to study STEM subjects at A level (46%) compared to those who don’t (40%). Overall, over half (52%) of female students are planning to study a STEM subject, with this rising to 61% of males.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>MAYBE IT IS ROCKET SCIENCE? </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Of those young women who<em> do</em> or <em>plan </em>to study a STEM subject at A-level, enjoyment of the subject is the main factor (43%), though 37% believe it makes them more likely to get a good job and 19% were supported to do so by their parents. Conversely amongst those not taking a STEM subject, a lack of interest is also the key reason (34%), though 37% don’t think they’re good at the subjects and 26% mention they are too difficult.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Looking at subject breakdowns, Art and English are the most enjoyed subjects for girls at school (34% and 32% respectively), whilst maths was favoured by male students (34%). When it comes to what subjects theythink they’re best at, the same gender divide remains with female students stating English (36%) compared to Maths for males (40%) – in fact seven in ten males (72%) stated they were best at a STEM subject compared to just 54% of females.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>WHEN I GROW UP…</strong>Of those young girls who are interested in pursuing a career in STEM, 69% of them say a female role model inspired their decision – compared to 43% motivated by male role models. More generally, two thirds (67%) of young people say that female role models inspirethem with their careers, rising to 81% of women. While they have been inspired, three quarters (74%) say they would like to see more role models in their chosen career, with this view particularly prominent amongst women (81%)</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>WOMEN STEM IDOLS </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">If it were possible, the women in STEM that most aspire to or would like to meet is Marie Curie (33%), followed by Rosalind Franklin (29%) and Ada Lovelace (19%). Looking at role models on a more fictional level, Tomb Raider’s Lara Croft (33%), Shuri the Princess and Scientist from Black Panther (33%) and the Astrophysicist Dr Jane Foster from the Marvel Universe (32%) are the women in STEM they’d most like to meet.</p><p>Many gamers play games that require a great deal of planning, strategic thinking and using logic to achieve goals within the game. Indeed, simulations are the most popular type of game (39%) amongst girl gamers,followed by puzzlers (38%) and action-adventure(35%). The research indicates 85% of female students play video games and are averaging 5.5 hours each week – in contrast to 95% of males in the same age group who are clocking up 9.9 hours.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><br></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>BIOGRAPHY</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Dr Jackie is an award-winning Senior Teaching Fellow in the Department of Computing,Imperial College London, with a focus on Equality, Diversity, Outreach and Public Engagement.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Dr. Jackie was the first in her family to go to university and is now a proud alumna and honorary fellow of the University of Liverpool, graduating with...]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Dr Jackie Bell, Mathematician, Physicist, STEM Ambassador &amp; aspiring Astronaut,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>To celebrate International Woman’s Day (#IWD2023), new research from the publishers of Scars Above – a videogame about a lone female astronaut and scientist stranded on a hostile alien planet – reveals a third of 14–19-year-olds females who play video games are more likely to be interested in a career in STEM</strong> <strong>then those who do not (33% v 22%).</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">The report, which explores what motivates the next generation of young women to pursue a STEM career, shows girl gamers are more likely to go on to study STEM subjects at A level (46%) compared to those who don’t (40%). Overall, over half (52%) of female students are planning to study a STEM subject, with this rising to 61% of males.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>MAYBE IT IS ROCKET SCIENCE? </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Of those young women who<em> do</em> or <em>plan </em>to study a STEM subject at A-level, enjoyment of the subject is the main factor (43%), though 37% believe it makes them more likely to get a good job and 19% were supported to do so by their parents. Conversely amongst those not taking a STEM subject, a lack of interest is also the key reason (34%), though 37% don’t think they’re good at the subjects and 26% mention they are too difficult.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Looking at subject breakdowns, Art and English are the most enjoyed subjects for girls at school (34% and 32% respectively), whilst maths was favoured by male students (34%). When it comes to what subjects theythink they’re best at, the same gender divide remains with female students stating English (36%) compared to Maths for males (40%) – in fact seven in ten males (72%) stated they were best at a STEM subject compared to just 54% of females.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>WHEN I GROW UP…</strong>Of those young girls who are interested in pursuing a career in STEM, 69% of them say a female role model inspired their decision – compared to 43% motivated by male role models. More generally, two thirds (67%) of young people say that female role models inspirethem with their careers, rising to 81% of women. While they have been inspired, three quarters (74%) say they would like to see more role models in their chosen career, with this view particularly prominent amongst women (81%)</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>WOMEN STEM IDOLS </strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">If it were possible, the women in STEM that most aspire to or would like to meet is Marie Curie (33%), followed by Rosalind Franklin (29%) and Ada Lovelace (19%). Looking at role models on a more fictional level, Tomb Raider’s Lara Croft (33%), Shuri the Princess and Scientist from Black Panther (33%) and the Astrophysicist Dr Jane Foster from the Marvel Universe (32%) are the women in STEM they’d most like to meet.</p><p>Many gamers play games that require a great deal of planning, strategic thinking and using logic to achieve goals within the game. Indeed, simulations are the most popular type of game (39%) amongst girl gamers,followed by puzzlers (38%) and action-adventure(35%). The research indicates 85% of female students play video games and are averaging 5.5 hours each week – in contrast to 95% of males in the same age group who are clocking up 9.9 hours.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><br></p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>BIOGRAPHY</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Dr Jackie is an award-winning Senior Teaching Fellow in the Department of Computing,Imperial College London, with a focus on Equality, Diversity, Outreach and Public Engagement.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Dr. Jackie was the first in her family to go to university and is now a proud alumna and honorary fellow of the University of Liverpool, graduating with a PhD in theoretical particle physics, MSc in Mathematical Sciences and BSc with Honours in Mathematics.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">As a STEM Ambassador and champion for women and diversity within the sciences,Dr Jackie has a keen interest in all STEM (Science Technology, Engineering and Mathematics) subjects as well as a huge passion for communicating science and inspiring more young people to get into the sciences.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">Dr Jackie has also project managed national STEM programmes in partnership with the UK Space Agency and Science and Technology FacilitiesCouncil whilst a project manager at the UK Association for Science and Discovery Centres (ASDC).</p><p>Much of what DrJackie has done has been spurred by her childhood dreams of going into space – a desire which has never left her. In 2017 Jackie was one of 12 candidates to be selected from over 3,000 applicants to take part in BBC2’s 'Astronauts: Do You Have What It Takes?’&nbsp; where she underwent aseries of tests, similar, or identicalto those within the astronaut training programme. </p><p>#IWD2023</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">159ac2f1-c445-4cfc-be4f-a73a155f89d2</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 11 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/050597eb-63e1-438b-b2a2-a1eba9fddada/Podcast-Radio-Business-Dr-Jackie-Bell-08-03-23.mp3" length="31918497" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>13:18</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>30% OF EMPLOYERS SET TO HIRE EX-OFFENDERS TO HELP PLUG LABOUR SHORTAGE  | Tony Simpson  SODEXO UK&amp;I</title><itunes:title>30% OF EMPLOYERS SET TO HIRE EX-OFFENDERS TO HELP PLUG LABOUR SHORTAGE  | Tony Simpson  SODEXO UK&amp;I</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Tony Simpson, Justice Operations Director of SODEXO UK &amp; I </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business dispel some of the myths around the employment of ex-offenders.</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Helping an ex-offender into employment can have a significant and lasting impact on both the level of crime and society as a whole. And now a new study indicates that many employers are open to hiring ex-offenders in 2023 in a bid to fill vacancies.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>One in three (30%) UK businesses in the private sector say they do not currently employ any ex-offenders, despite the majority (62%) struggling to fill positions – according to a new study commissioned by Sodexo, which runs six UK prisons on behalf of the Ministry of Justice and Scottish Prison Service. What’s more, the research shows 43% businesses are finding it difficult to fill in excessof 10 current vacancies.</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">However, the research – commissioned with over 1,000 owners and senior leaders with hiring responsibilities across British businesses – finds nearly two thirds (61%) will be hiring ex-offenders in 2023, compared to just 21% that will not.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">When asked about their greatest concerns, one quarter (25%) agreed they were worried employees would re-offend, and the same proportion agreed they feared for the safety of the rest of their workforce (25%). More than one in five (23%) agreed that they wouldn’t trust them to behave appropriately at work. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">According to the UK government, though the proportion of prison-leavers who were employed at six months from their release rose by almost two thirds between April 2021 and March 2022 to 23%, this must improve. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">Indeed, the research highlights nine false assumptions about the employment of ex-offenders – including 66% of employers incorrectly believing half of ex-offenders find a job within a year of release and 62% wrongly believing ex-offenders who get a job after prison are just as likely to re-offend as those who don’t.</p><p>The best possible outcome is for offenders not to return to old patterns and never offend again.&nbsp; Sodexo is launching the campaign ‘Starting Fresh’ today, and is collaborating with partners including &nbsp;<a href="https://newfuturesnetwork.gov.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">New Futures Network</a>, <a href="https://www.oswinproject.org.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">The Oswin Project</a>,<a href="https://www.cleansheet.org.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Clean Sheet</a> and <a href="https://www.novus.ac.uk/novus-works-employer-partnerships/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Novus Works</a> to help remove the perceived barriers associated with the employment of ex-offenders, which hold back the reintegration of people into communities.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Tony Simpson, Justice Operations Director of SODEXO UK &amp; I </strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business dispel some of the myths around the employment of ex-offenders.</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">Helping an ex-offender into employment can have a significant and lasting impact on both the level of crime and society as a whole. And now a new study indicates that many employers are open to hiring ex-offenders in 2023 in a bid to fill vacancies.</p><p class="ql-align-justify"><strong>One in three (30%) UK businesses in the private sector say they do not currently employ any ex-offenders, despite the majority (62%) struggling to fill positions – according to a new study commissioned by Sodexo, which runs six UK prisons on behalf of the Ministry of Justice and Scottish Prison Service. What’s more, the research shows 43% businesses are finding it difficult to fill in excessof 10 current vacancies.</strong></p><p class="ql-align-justify">However, the research – commissioned with over 1,000 owners and senior leaders with hiring responsibilities across British businesses – finds nearly two thirds (61%) will be hiring ex-offenders in 2023, compared to just 21% that will not.</p><p class="ql-align-justify">When asked about their greatest concerns, one quarter (25%) agreed they were worried employees would re-offend, and the same proportion agreed they feared for the safety of the rest of their workforce (25%). More than one in five (23%) agreed that they wouldn’t trust them to behave appropriately at work. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">According to the UK government, though the proportion of prison-leavers who were employed at six months from their release rose by almost two thirds between April 2021 and March 2022 to 23%, this must improve. </p><p class="ql-align-justify">Indeed, the research highlights nine false assumptions about the employment of ex-offenders – including 66% of employers incorrectly believing half of ex-offenders find a job within a year of release and 62% wrongly believing ex-offenders who get a job after prison are just as likely to re-offend as those who don’t.</p><p>The best possible outcome is for offenders not to return to old patterns and never offend again.&nbsp; Sodexo is launching the campaign ‘Starting Fresh’ today, and is collaborating with partners including &nbsp;<a href="https://newfuturesnetwork.gov.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">New Futures Network</a>, <a href="https://www.oswinproject.org.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">The Oswin Project</a>,<a href="https://www.cleansheet.org.uk/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Clean Sheet</a> and <a href="https://www.novus.ac.uk/novus-works-employer-partnerships/" rel="noopener noreferrer" target="_blank">Novus Works</a> to help remove the perceived barriers associated with the employment of ex-offenders, which hold back the reintegration of people into communities.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">1a98255d-1b8a-4aeb-b582-9a30e1628e65</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 11 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/aa3bb9dc-9e34-4960-8f44-7489cc8b7a6b/Podcast-Radio-Business-Tony-Simpson-SODEXO-UK-07-03-23.mp3" length="27184064" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>11:20</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>GETTING THE OVER-50s BACK INTO WORK: Catherine Foot, Director of Phoenix Insights</title><itunes:title>GETTING THE OVER-50s BACK INTO WORK: Catherine Foot, Director of Phoenix Insights</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Catherine Foot, Director of Phoenix Insight talks to Clayton M Coke  of Podcast Radio Business </strong> about what needs to be done if the government is to get older workers back into the workforce.</p><p>While some over 50s retired early during the pandemic, others have stepped away because of sickness or to care for those who are ill but have not returned, fuelling a sharp rise in economic inactivity (when working-age adults are neither in work nor looking for a job) among this age group. </p><p>The main drivers of economic inactivity differ from region to region and Catherine believes understanding the reasons why many over 50s have left the workforce is vital before tempting them back into employment and that the issue needs to be tackled locally first.</p><p>Financial vulnerability is one of the biggest issues facing over-50s out of work and addressing economic inactivity is not just about getting wealthy retirees back into employment but supporting people, such as the millions out of work with long-term sickness or caring responsibilities, to stay in good work throughout their 50s and 60s and build up their financial resilience - the average wealth of an over-50 who has left the workforce for long-term sickness is a mere 5% compare to someone from the same age group who has chosen to retire (£57,000 vs £1,240,000, while the median figure for 50-64 years old still in work is £750,000).&nbsp;</p><p>With many older workers feeling ‘left behind’by their employers, these figures highlight need for the government to tackle the root causes of economic inactivity ahead of the Spring Budget with Phoenix Insights’ highlightingthe wealth disparity across those with different causes of economic inactivity, regional disparities, and the broader attitudes of over-50s towards employment.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Catherine Foot, Director of Phoenix Insight talks to Clayton M Coke  of Podcast Radio Business </strong> about what needs to be done if the government is to get older workers back into the workforce.</p><p>While some over 50s retired early during the pandemic, others have stepped away because of sickness or to care for those who are ill but have not returned, fuelling a sharp rise in economic inactivity (when working-age adults are neither in work nor looking for a job) among this age group. </p><p>The main drivers of economic inactivity differ from region to region and Catherine believes understanding the reasons why many over 50s have left the workforce is vital before tempting them back into employment and that the issue needs to be tackled locally first.</p><p>Financial vulnerability is one of the biggest issues facing over-50s out of work and addressing economic inactivity is not just about getting wealthy retirees back into employment but supporting people, such as the millions out of work with long-term sickness or caring responsibilities, to stay in good work throughout their 50s and 60s and build up their financial resilience - the average wealth of an over-50 who has left the workforce for long-term sickness is a mere 5% compare to someone from the same age group who has chosen to retire (£57,000 vs £1,240,000, while the median figure for 50-64 years old still in work is £750,000).&nbsp;</p><p>With many older workers feeling ‘left behind’by their employers, these figures highlight need for the government to tackle the root causes of economic inactivity ahead of the Spring Budget with Phoenix Insights’ highlightingthe wealth disparity across those with different causes of economic inactivity, regional disparities, and the broader attitudes of over-50s towards employment.</p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">ea7bdb4c-357f-4832-9967-f9182cbda4f3</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 11 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/989bc70a-6473-4434-ad7b-f4b9cfc22458/Podcast-Radio-Business-Catherine-Foot-Phoenix-Insights-06-03-23.mp3" length="43356995" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>18:04</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>SUPERMARKET STAPLES AT RISK OF BECOMING ‘ENDANGERED’ |  MICHAEL GIDNEY, CEO FAIRTRADE FOUNDATION</title><itunes:title>SUPERMARKET STAPLES AT RISK OF BECOMING ‘ENDANGERED’ |  MICHAEL GIDNEY, CEO FAIRTRADE FOUNDATION</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Michael Gidney, CEO of Fairtrade Foundation</strong> talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to highlight what small changes we can all adopt to help us transitions toward a more sustainable supply chain for our everyday goods.</p><p>Empty supermarket shelves and stock shortages are becoming increasingly common, but today sustainability experts warn everyday essentials including bananas, coffee and cocoa are now at risk of becoming ‘endangered’ due to climate change.</p><p>A new report from the Fairtrade Foundation highlights the environmental risks threatening the UK’s favourite foods the most, revealing the supply of bananas, coffee and cocoa to be vulnerable to threats caused by climate change, deforestation, and biodiversity loss.</p><p>New research reveals significant sections of the British public believe that climate change will affect their weekly shop, with 33% saying they think availability will be affected and 41% stating that it will affect the price. However,only a third (38%) have made active changes to their shopping habits and a quarter (23%) are not sure how to help.</p><p>To further emphasise the issue and to coincide with Fairtrade Fortnight, an immersive retail space, ‘The Endangered Aisle’, opens today (28 February) in Shoreditch, London to highlight the urgent need to protect the future of food and the small switches shoppers can make to play their part.</p><p>Visitors will be able to experience the reality of what the supermarket shop could be like in the near future, learn more about where their favourite supermarket staples come from and hear first-hand stories from Fairtrade producers about the challenges they face related to the climate crisis.<strong><br></strong></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Michael Gidney, CEO of Fairtrade Foundation</strong> talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business</strong> to highlight what small changes we can all adopt to help us transitions toward a more sustainable supply chain for our everyday goods.</p><p>Empty supermarket shelves and stock shortages are becoming increasingly common, but today sustainability experts warn everyday essentials including bananas, coffee and cocoa are now at risk of becoming ‘endangered’ due to climate change.</p><p>A new report from the Fairtrade Foundation highlights the environmental risks threatening the UK’s favourite foods the most, revealing the supply of bananas, coffee and cocoa to be vulnerable to threats caused by climate change, deforestation, and biodiversity loss.</p><p>New research reveals significant sections of the British public believe that climate change will affect their weekly shop, with 33% saying they think availability will be affected and 41% stating that it will affect the price. However,only a third (38%) have made active changes to their shopping habits and a quarter (23%) are not sure how to help.</p><p>To further emphasise the issue and to coincide with Fairtrade Fortnight, an immersive retail space, ‘The Endangered Aisle’, opens today (28 February) in Shoreditch, London to highlight the urgent need to protect the future of food and the small switches shoppers can make to play their part.</p><p>Visitors will be able to experience the reality of what the supermarket shop could be like in the near future, learn more about where their favourite supermarket staples come from and hear first-hand stories from Fairtrade producers about the challenges they face related to the climate crisis.<strong><br></strong></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">ed438e57-9f6b-41ee-bb91-3242aca69d15</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 06 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/a11f18f5-e572-41a9-8ad5-5beef510c7e5/Podcast-Radio-Business-Michael-Gidney-Fairtrade-28-02-23.mp3" length="29102497" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>12:08</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item><item><title>2000 PUBS AT RISK OF CLOSURE WITHOUT HELP IN THE BUDGET | Emma McClarkin, CEO British Beer and Pub Association</title><itunes:title>2000 PUBS AT RISK OF CLOSURE WITHOUT HELP IN THE BUDGET | Emma McClarkin, CEO British Beer and Pub Association</itunes:title><description><![CDATA[<p><strong>Emma McClarkin, CEO British Beer and Pub Association,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong> about the plight of the nation's pubs and what action she and the BBPA would like the government to take as well as highlight the importance of pubs to our local communities with 69% of us saying local pubs play an important role in bringing communities together and creating jobs (67%) while 42% of us agree that closure of our local would devastate our community. Emma also explains why this is a make-or-break moment and is encouragingus to sign the "Long Live the Local petition." </p><p>The British Beer and Pub Association (BBPA) is calling on the government to help pubs in the Spring Budget with an estimated 2000 pubs at risk of closure without support as they face the perfect storm of cost pressures, slowing consumer spend plus a further duty increase in August.</p><p>The BBPA wants Chancellor Jeremy Hunt to freeze duty rates, implement a significant increase in the discount for draft beer sold in pubs, and introduce the previously announced reduced rate for lower-strength beers from 1st August, with Oxford Economics modelling estimating a 9% decline in on-trade beer sales in 2023/4, equating to one million fewer barrels of beer being sold (288 million pints) and 25,000 potential job losses in pubs and thewider industry. </p><p>With Energy Bill Relief Schemesupport ending on 31st March, many pubs and breweries will again be subject to rocketing bills that threaten to them to declare last orders once and for all.<strong><br></strong></p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Emma McClarkin, CEO British Beer and Pub Association,</strong>talks to <strong>Clayton M. Coke of Podcast Radio Business </strong> about the plight of the nation's pubs and what action she and the BBPA would like the government to take as well as highlight the importance of pubs to our local communities with 69% of us saying local pubs play an important role in bringing communities together and creating jobs (67%) while 42% of us agree that closure of our local would devastate our community. Emma also explains why this is a make-or-break moment and is encouragingus to sign the "Long Live the Local petition." </p><p>The British Beer and Pub Association (BBPA) is calling on the government to help pubs in the Spring Budget with an estimated 2000 pubs at risk of closure without support as they face the perfect storm of cost pressures, slowing consumer spend plus a further duty increase in August.</p><p>The BBPA wants Chancellor Jeremy Hunt to freeze duty rates, implement a significant increase in the discount for draft beer sold in pubs, and introduce the previously announced reduced rate for lower-strength beers from 1st August, with Oxford Economics modelling estimating a 9% decline in on-trade beer sales in 2023/4, equating to one million fewer barrels of beer being sold (288 million pints) and 25,000 potential job losses in pubs and thewider industry. </p><p>With Energy Bill Relief Schemesupport ending on 31st March, many pubs and breweries will again be subject to rocketing bills that threaten to them to declare last orders once and for all.<strong><br></strong></p>]]></content:encoded><link><![CDATA[https://www.podcastradionetwork.com/]]></link><guid isPermaLink="false">6ee29deb-55d6-4b1a-b12f-2d2bc525c2c6</guid><itunes:image href="https://artwork.captivate.fm/336e5be4-e39b-4f18-8551-8f0ef0440139/raCaz21qjUy6qTE5kEKHr4LH.png"/><dc:creator><![CDATA[Podcast Radio]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Mon, 06 Mar 2023 09:00:00 +0100</pubDate><enclosure url="https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/8deeb2f6-3974-48b9-b2c4-6256dfeb89bc/Podcast-Radio-Business-Emma-McClarkin-BBPA-01-03-23.mp3" length="34495215" type="audio/mpeg"/><itunes:duration>14:22</itunes:duration><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:author>Podcast Radio</itunes:author></item></channel></rss>